Kubota RCK60B-23BX Owner Manual

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

A

SAFETY FIRST

This symbol, the industry's "Safety Alert Symbol", is used throughout this manual and on labels on the machine itself to warn of the possibility of personal injury. Read these instructions carefully.

It is essential that you read the instructions and safety regulations before you attempt to repair or use this unit.

I

A

DANGER : Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

A

WARNING : Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

A

CAUTION : Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

• IMPORTANT : Indicates that equipment or property damage could result if instructions are not followed.

• NOTE : Gives helpful information .

BEFORE SERVICING AND REPAIRING

• Read all instructions and safety instructions in this manual and on your machine safety decals.

• Clean the work area and machine.

• Park the machine on a firm and level ground, and set the parking brake.

• Lower the implement to the ground.

• Stop the engine, and remove the key.

• Disconnect the battery negative cable.

• Hang a ''~O NOT OPERATEn tag in operator station.

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCKSOB-23BX, lA240, BTS01, WSM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY STARTING

• Do not start the engine by shorting across starter terminals or bypassing the safety start switch.

• Do not alter or remove any part of machine safety system.

• Before starting the engine, make sure that all shift levers are in neutral positions or in disengaged positions.

• Never start the engine while standing on ground.

Start the engine only from operator's seat.

SAFETY WORKING

• Do not work on the machine while under the influence of alcohol, medication, or other substances or while fatigued.

• Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment appropriate to the job.

• Use tools appropriate to the work. Makeshift tools, parts, and procedures are not recommended.

• When servicing is performed together by two or more persons, take care to perform all work safely.

• Do not work under the machine that is supported solely by a jack. Always support the machine by safety stands.

• Do not touch the rotating or hot parts while the engine is running.

• Never remove the radiator cap while the engine is running, or immediately after stopping. Otherwise, hot water will spout out from radiator. Only remove radiator cap when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen the cap to first stop to relieve pressure before removing completely.

• Escaping fluid (fuel or hydraulic oil) under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or fuel lines.

Tighten all connections before applying pressure.

• Do not open high-pressure fuel system.

High-pressure fluid remaining in fuel lines can cause serious injury. Do not disconnect or attempt repair fuel lines, sensors, or any other components between the high-pressure fuel pump and injectors on engines with high pressure common rail fuel system.

• High voltage exceeding 100 V is generated in the

ECU, and is applied to the injector.

Pay sufficient caution to electric shock when performing work activities.

2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

+

•

­

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

AVOID FIRES

• Fuel is extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions. Do not smoke or allow flames or sparks in your working area .

• To avoid sparks from an accidental short circuit, always disconnect the battery negative cable first and connect it last.

• Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and open flame away from the top of battery, especially when charging the battery.

• Make sure that no fuel has been spilled on the engine.

VENTILATE WORK AREA

• If the engine must be running to do some work, make sure the area is well ventilated. Never run the engine in a closed area. The exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide.

3

PREVENT ACID BURNS

• Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin, clothing and cause blindness if splashed into eyes. Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothing. If you spill electrolyte on yourself, flush with water, and get medical attention immediately.

DISPOSE OF FLUIDS PROPERLY

• Do not pour fluids into the ground, down a drain, or into a stream, pond, or lake. Observe relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of oil, fuel, coolant, electrolyte and other harmful waste.

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX,lA240, BT601, WSM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

• Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy at all times.

• Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service, hospital and fire department near your telephone.

4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY DECALS

I

The following safety decals are installed on the machine.

If a decal becomes damaged, illegible or is not on the machine, replace it. The decal part number is listed in the parts list.

(1) Part No. K2581-6548-1

1AGAJAXAP042E

(4) Part No. K2581-6549-1 (3) Part No. K2581-6552-1

Do not put hands Diesel fuel No fire under the rear fender. i

AWAR,NINGl

1 l

only

[ •

~

Il@1

(2) Part No. K2581-6548-1

Never modify or repair a ROPS because welding, grinding, drilling or culling any portion may weaken the sb'Ucture.

~

TO AVOID PERSONAL

INJURY WHEN

RAISING OR

FOLDING ROPS:

1. Set parking brake and stop engine.

2. Remove any obstruction that may prevent raising or folding of the ROPS.

3. Do not allow any bystanders.

4. A I way s per for m function from a stable position at the rear 01 the tractor.

5. Hoi d the top 0 j the ROPS securely when raising or folding.

6. Make sure all pins are installed and

...

.,. lAGAJAXAP047E

(2)

(3)

I

.3TAAAAGCP004A

5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1) Part No. K2581-6554-1

1 AGAJAXAP044E

(3) Part No. K2581-6556-1 (4) Part No. K2581-6555-1

~

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY

A CAUTION

1 Attacll nul Ie!! or tOl.'lecl loaels io the Illtch only.

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY

FROM SEPARATION:

2. Use tile 3-1)0Il1t IlIte!l onlv wl1l1 equipment [Ieslgnecl tor l11l

GROOVE -

J

3-point Ililch usage

I-GROOVE

[g!1]

1AGAJAXAP046E

DO NOT EXTEND LIFT ROD BEYOND

THE GROOVE ON THE THREADED ROD.

.

. .

.

...

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(2) Part No. K2591-6557-2

3TAAAAJCP001A

6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

(1) Part No. K2581-6557-1

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(2) Part No. K2581-6547-1

Stay clear of engine fan and fanbelt

1AGAJAXAP048E

(3) Part No. K2581-6542-1

Do not touch hot surface like muffler, etc.

(4) Part No. K2581-6543-1

1AGAJAXAP052E

1 AGAJAXAP050E

1AGAJAXAP049E

3TAAAAGCP005A

7

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1) Part No. K2561-6115-1

KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.

00 NOT TIP. DO NOT OPEN BATTERY'

FLUSH

EYES

IMMEDIATELY

WITH WATER . -

~GET t!~:if.

MEDICAL

HELP

FAST

1AGAJAXAP053E

(2) Part No, K2561-6116-1

EXPLOSIVE

GASEScAN

CAUSE

BUNDNESS OR INJURY

I

1AGAJAXAP054E

I

I

I

I NO

- SPARKS

-FLAMES

• SMOKING

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CARES FOR SAFETY ALERT LABELS

1. Always keep the labels clean and avoid damaging them.

If a label is dirty, clean it with soap and water. Then wipe it with a soft cloth.

Never use a solvent like thinner or acetone, which may erase letters or symbols.

2. When you wash the machine using a high pressure washer. do not pour high pressure water directly on any label to prevent it from peeling off.

3. If any label is damaged or missing. place an order with your dealer for replacement.

4. Before you affix a new label, completely clean the surface on which the label is placed. Wait until the surface is dry, and then affix

5. the label in its place.

When you replace any part carrying a label, replace the label with a new one at the same time.

3TAAAAFCP006A

8

BX25, RCK54(P)·23BX, RCK60B·23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

Model

PTO power

Engine

Maker

Model

Type

Number of cylinders

Bore and stroke

Total displacement

Engine gross power

Rated revolution

Maximum torque

Battery

Fuel

Fuel tank

Capacities

Dimensions

Engine crankcase (with filter)

Engine coolant

Recovery tank

Transmission case

Overall length (without 3P)

Overall length (with 3P)

Overall width

Overall height (with ROPS)

(with Folded ROPS)

(Top of steering wheel)

Wheel base

Min. ground clearance

Tread

Front

Rear

Weight (with ROPS)

Clutch

Travelling system

Tires

Front

Rear

Steering

Transmission

Brake

Min. turning radius (without brake)

Hydraulic control system

Hydraulic unit

PTO

Pump capacity

I

Three point hitch

Max. lift force

At lift points

24 in. behind points

Rear

Mid

PTO Shaft

Revolution

PTO Shaft

Revolution

BX25

13.2 kW (17.7 HP)'

KUBOTA

D902·E3·BX·2

Indirect Injection, vertical, water·cooled, 4·cycle diesel

3

72 x 73.6 mm (2.83 x 2.90 in.)

898 cm,j (54.8 cu.in.)

17.1 kW (23.0 HP)

3200min-' (rpm)

56.1 N'm (5.7 kgf-m, 41.4 ft-Ibs)

12 V, CCA : 535 A, RC : 80 min.

Diesel fuel No. 2·D [above -10°C (14 OF)], Diesel fuel No.1 [below -10°C (14 OF)]

25 L (6.6 U.S.gals, 5.5 Imp.gals)

3.1 L (3.3 U.S.qts., 2.73 Imp.qts)

2.7 L (2.8 U.S.qts., 2.4 Imp.qts)

0.4 L (0.4 U.S.qts, 0.4 Imp.qts)

11.6 L (3.1 U.S.gals, 2.6 Imp.gals)

2170 mm (85.4 in.)

2490 mm (98.0 in.)

1145 mm (45.1 in.)

2140 mm (84.3 in.)

1610 mm (63.4 in.)

1255 mm (49.4 in.)

1400 mm (55.1 in.)

175 mm (6.9 in.)

910 mm (35.8 in.)

820 mm (32.2 in.)

690 kg (1520 Ibs)

NIA

18 x 8.50 -10 (Turf, Bar, Ind.)

26 x 12.00 - 12 (Turf, Bar, Ind.)

Hydrostatic power steering

Main: Hydrostatic transmission, High·Low gear shift (2 forward and 2 reverse)

Wet disk type

2.3 m (7.5 feet)

Directional control, auto-return lever system

23.5 Llmin. (6.2 U.S.gals.lmin., 5.2 Imp.gals.lmin.)

SAE Category I

5390 N (550 kg, 1210 Ibs)

3040 N (310 kg, 680 Ibs)

SAE 1·3/8, 6 splines

1 speed (540 min-' (rpm) at 3142 engine min-

1

(rpm»

USA No.5 (KUBOTA 10·tooth) involute spline

1 speed (2500 min-

1

(rpm) at 3043 engine min-' (rpm))

NOTE: 'Manufacture's estimate. The company reserves the right to change the speCifications Without notice.

"See and check IMPLEMENT LIMITATIONS.

W1028103

9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

TRAVELLING SPEEDS

Tire size (Rear)

Model

Forward

(At rated engine rpm)

Reverse

(At rated engine rpm)

Range gear shift lever

Low

High

Low

High km/h o to 6.0 o to 13.0 o to 4.5 o to 10.0

The company reserves the right to change the specifications without notice.

BX25

26 x 12.00 12

TRAVELLING SPEEDS mile/h o to 3.7 o to 8.1 o to 2.8 o to 6.2

W1035065

10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

DIMENSIONS

.S: lfi

~

.5 co lfi tl.

E

E

E

E l()

'<t

0 a;

E

E

0

0>

C\I

~

.S co c::i

!:!1

.S:

'<t cri

~

E

E

If)

If)

C\I

3TAAAAJ FPOO 1 A

1400 mm (55.1 in.)

2170 mm (85.4 in.)

4442 mm (174.9 in.)

11

~

.S

<L!

'<t

~

E

E

~

.5

C\I

«> iE.

E

E

0

0>

(;j

DIMENSIONS

~

.5 .5 l()

C')

N tl. i

E E

E E

0

C\I co

0

C')

GENERAL

CONTENTS

1. TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... G-1

2. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................ G-2

3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS AND WIRING .. G-3

[1] WiRING ...................................................................................................... G-3

[2] BATTERy ................................................................................................... G-5

[3] FUSE .......................................................................................................... G-5

[4] CONNECTOR ............................................................................................ G-5

[5] HANDLING OF CIRCUIT TESTER ......................................................... G-6

4. LUBRICANTS FUEL AND COOLANT .......................................................... G-7

5. TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................................... G-8

[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS ................................... G-8

[2] STUD BOLTS ............................................................................................ G-8

[3] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS. BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC

OR UNF THREADS ................................................................................. G-9

[4] PLUGS ....................................................................................................... G-9

6. MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST ..................................................................... G-10

7. CHECK AND MAINTENANCE ..................................................................... G-11

[1] DAILY CHECK ........................................................................................ G-11

[2] CHECK POINTS OF INITIAL 50 HOURS ........................................... G-12

[3] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 50 HOURS ........................................... G-14

[4] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 100 HOURS ......................................... G-16

[5] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 200 HOURS ......................................... G-22

[6] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 300 HOURS ......................................... G-24

[7] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 400 HOURS ........................................... G-25

[8] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 500 HOURS ........................................... G-25

[9] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 800 HOURS ........................................... G-26

[10]CHECK POINT OF EVERY 1500 HOURS ......................................... G-26

[11]CHECK POINT OF EVERY 3000 HOURS ......................................... G-26

[12]CHECK POINT OF EVERY 1 yEAR ................................................... G-26

[13]CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 2 yEARS .............................................. G-26

[14]OTHERS .................................................................................................. G-30

8. SPECIAL TOOLS .......................................................................................... G-32

[1] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR ENGINE .......................................................... G-32

[2] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR TRACTOR ....................................................... G-37

9. TIRES ............................................................................................................. G-41

[1] TIRE PRESSURE ................................................................................... G-41

[2] WHEEL TREAD ...................................................................................... G-42

[3] BALLAST ................................................................................................. G-43

(1) Front Ballast. ...................................................................................... G-43

(2) Rear Ballast ....................................................................................... G-44

10. IMPLEMENT LIMITATIONS .......................................................................... G-45

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

1. TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION

When contacting your local KUBOTA distributor, always specify engine serial number, tractor serial number and hour meter reading.

(1) Tractor Identification Plate

(2) Tractor Serial Number

(3) Engine Serial Number

(4) Hour Meter

W1010590

G-1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

2. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

(2)

(2)

(A)

dop

-

(4)

(8)

(1 )

(3)

• During disassembly, carefully arrange removed parts in a clean area to prevent confusion later. Screws, bolts and nuts should be installed in their original position to prevent reassembly errors.

• When special tools are required, use KUBOTA genuine special tools. Special tools which are not frequently used should be made according to the drawings provided.

Before disassembling or servicing electrical wires, always disconnect the ground cable from the battery first.

• Remove oil and dirt from parts before measuring.

• Use only KUBOTA genuine parts for parts replacement to maintain machine performance and to assure safety.

• Gaskets and O-rings must be replaced during reassembly.

Apply grease to new O-rings or oil seals before assembling.

See the figure left side.

• When reassembling external snap rings or internal snap rings, they must be pOSitioned so that sharp edge faces against the direction from which a force is applied. See the figure left side.

• When inserting spring pins, their splits must face the direction from which a force is applied. See the figure left side.

• To prevent damage to the hydraulic system, use only specified fluid or equivalent.

(1) Grease

(2) Force

(3) Sharp Edge

(4) Axial Force

(5) Rotating Movement

(A) External Snap Ring

(8) Internal Snap Ring

W10109040

n ~O

3TMABABOP005A

G-2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS

AND WIRING

(1 )

3TMABABOP006A

To ensure safety and prevent damage to the machine and surrounding equipment, heed the following precautions in handling electrical parts and wiring .

• IMPORTANT

• Check electrical wiring for damage and loosened connection every year. To this end, educate the customer to do his or her own check and at the same time recommend the dealer to perform periodic check for a fee.

• Do not attempt to modify or remodel any electrical parts and wiring.

• When removing the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable first. When installing the battery cables, connect the positive cable first.

(1) Negative Terminal (2) Positive Terminal

W10111140

[1] WIRING

(1 )

• Securely tighten wiring terminals.

(1) Correct

(Securely Tighten)

(2) Incorrect

(Loosening Leads to Faulty Contact)

W10112160

3TMABABOP007 A

• Do not let wiring contact dangerous part.

(1) Dangerous Part

(2) Wiring (Incorrect)

(3) Wiring (Correct)

(4) Dangerous Part

W10113130

3TMABABOP008A

(A) (8)

(1)

~

• Securely insert grommet.

(1) Grommet (AI Correct

(8) Incorrect

3TMABABOP009A

W10113880

G-3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

• Securely clamp. being careful not to damage wiring.

(1) Clamp

• Wind Clamp Spirally

(2) Wire Harness

(3) Clamp

(4) Welding Dent

W10114580

3TMABABOP010A

(1 ) (2)

(4)

• Clamp wiring so that there is no twist. unnecessary sag. or excessive tension. except for movable part. where sag be required.

(1) Wiring

(2) Clamp

(A) Correct

(8) Incorrect

W10115870

(8)

3TMABABOP011A (1)

(A)

(2)

• In installing a part. take care not to get wiring caught by it.

(1) Wiring (A) Incorrect

W10116700

(1 )

3TMABABOP012A

(1 )

• After installing wiring, check protection of terminals and clamped condition of wiring, only connect battery.

(1) Cover

• Securely Install Cover

W10117350

3TMABABOP013A

G-4

3TMABABOPOO6B

G GENERAL BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

[2] BATTERY

o o

Take care not to confuse positive and negative terminal posts.

When removing battery cables, disconnect negative cable first.

When installing battery cables, check for polarity and connect positive cable first.

• Do not install any battery with capacity other than is specified

(Ah).

• After connecting cables to battery terminal posts, apply high temperature grease to them and securely install terminal covers on them.

• Do not allow dirt and dust to collect on battery.

A

CAUTION

• Take care not to let battery liquid spill on your skin and clothes. If contaminated, wash it off with water immediately.

• Before recharging the battery, remove it from the machine.

• Before recharging, remove cell caps.

• Do recharging in a well-ventilated place where there is no open flame nearby, as hydrogen gas and oxygen are formed.

W10118160

[3] FUSE

(2) o o o

Use fuses with specified capacity.

Neither too large or small capacity fuse is acceptable.

Never use steel or copper wire in place of fuse.

Do not install working light. radio set. etc. on machine which is not provided with reserve power supply.

• Do not install accessories if fuse capacity of reserve power supply is exceeded.

(1) Fuse (2) Slow Blow Fuse

W10120920

3TMABABOP014A

[4] CONNECTOR

(A)

• For connector with lock, push lock to separate.

(A) Push

W10122110

3TMABABOP015A

(8)

• In separating connectors, do not pull wire harnesses.

• Hold connector bodies to separate.

(A) Correct (8) Incorrect

W10122720

3TMABABOP016A

G-5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601. WSM

~(4)

~?

G GENERAL

• Use sandpaper to remove rust from terminals.

• Repair deformed terminal. Make certain there is no terminal being exposed or displaced.

(1) Exposed Terminal

(2) Deformed Terminal

(3) Sandpaper

(4) Rust

W10123460

(1 )

, (8)

• Make certain that there is no female connector being too open.

(A) Correct (8) Incorrect

W10124300

3TMABABOP018A

(A~~

(1 ) k(1)

~~

• Make certain plastic cover is large enough to cover whole connector.

(1) Cover (A) Correct

(8) Incorrect

W10125190

3TMABABOP019A

[5] HANDLING OF CIRCUIT TESTER

• Use tester correctly following manual provided with tester.

• Check for polarity and range.

W10126840

3TMABABOP020A

G-6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

4. LUBRICANTS FUEL AND COOLANT

No.

2

Place

1 Fuel tank

Cooling system with recovery tank

Capacity

BX25

25.0 L

6.6 U.S.gals

5.5 Imp.gals

3.1 L

3.3 U.S.qts

2.7Imp.qts

Lubricants, fuel and coolant

No. 2-D diesel fuel

No. 1-0 diesel fuel if temperature is below -10°C

(14 OF)

Fresh clean water with anti-freeze

3 Engine crankcase

3.1 L

3.3 U.S.qts

2.7Imp.qts

Engine oil : API Service CD, CE or CF

Below 0 °C (32 OF): SAE10W, 10W-30 or 10W-40 o to 25°C (32 to 77 OF): SAE20, 10W-30 or

10W-40

Above 25°C (77 OF): SAE30, 10W-30 or 10W-40

4 Transmission case

5 Front axle case

Place

6 Battery terminal

7

Speed control pedal

11.6 L

3.1 U.S.gals

2.6 Imp.gals

4.7 L

5.0 U.S.qts

4.1Imp.qts

1

KUBOTA SUPER UDT f1uid*

KUBOTA SUPER UDT fluid or SAE80, SAE90 gear oil

Greasing

No. of greasing point

2

Capacity

Moderate amount

Until grease overflows

Type of grease

Multipurpose type

Grease

NLGI-2 or NLGI-1 (GC­

LG)

* KUBOTA original transmission hydraulic fluid.

G-7

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

5. TIGHTENING TORQUES

[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS

Screws, bolts, and nuts whose tightening torques are not specified in this Workshop Manual should be tightened according to the table below.

Indication on top of bolt

Material of bolt

0

@

No-grade or 4T

SS400,S20C ill

7T

S43C,S48C

®

SCr435,

SCM435

9T

Material of opponent part

Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness

M6

(6 mm, 0.24 in.)

M8

(8 mm, 0.31 in.)

M10

(10 mm, 0.39 in.)

M12

(12 mm, 0.47 in.)

M14

(14 mm, 0.55 in.)

M16

(16 mm, 0.63 in.)

M18

(18 mm, 0.71 in.)

M20

(20 mm, 0.79 in.) kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf'm IbHt N'm kgf'm IbHt N'm kgf'm IbHt N'm kgf·m IbNt

I

N'm

7.9 0.80 5.8 to to to

9.3 0.95 6.8

18 to

20

1.8 to

2.1

13 to

15

40 to

45

4.0 to

4.6

29 to

33

63 to

72

6.4 to

7.4

47 to

53

108 11.0 to to

125 12.8 92.5

167 17.0 123 to to to

191 19.5 141

246 25.0 181 to to to

284 29.0 209

334 34.0 246 to to to

392 40.0 289

7.9 0.80 5.8 9.81 1.00 7.24 7.9 0.80 5.8 to

8.8 to

0.90 to

6.5 to

11.2 to

1.15 to

8.31 to to to

12.3 to

1.25 to

9.05 to

8.8 0.90 6.5 14.2 1.45 10.4

17 to

19

1.7 to

13 to

24 to

27

2.4 to

2.8

18 to

20

18 to

20

1.8 to

2.1

13 to

15

30 to

34

3.0 to

3.5

22 to

25

32 to

34

-

-

-

ltt14 t to

3.5 25

-

-

-

-

-

48 to

55

4.9 to

5.7

36 t

78 to

90

7.9 to

9.2

58 to

66

124 12.6 91.2 to to to

147 15.0 108

197 20.0 145 to to

225 23.0 to

275 28.0 to to

318 32.5 235

368 37.5 272 to to to

431 44.0 318

40 to

44

63 to

72

-

-

-

4.0 to

4.5

6.4 to

7.4

-

-

29 to

32

47 to

53

-

61 to

70

6.2 to

7.2

45 to

52

103 10.5 76.0 to

117 to to

167 17. to

196 20.0 to m to

123

260 26.5 192 to to

304 31.0 224

344 35.0 254 to to to

402 41.0 296

491 50.0 362 to to to

568 58.0 419

W1034542

[2] STUD BOLTS

Material of opponent part

Ordinariness Aluminum

~it

; Diameter

N'm kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf'm IbHt

I M8

(8 mm, 0.31 in.)

M10

(10 mm, 0.39 in.)

12 to

15

25 to

31

1.2 to

1.6

2.5 to

3.2

8.7 to

11

18 to

23

8.9 to

11

20 to

25

0.90 to

1.2

2.0 to

2.6

6.5 to

8.6

15 to

18

M12

(12 mm, 0.47 in.)

M14

(14 mm, 0.55 in.)

M16

(16 mm, 0.63 in.)

M18

(18 mm, 0.71 in.)

29.5 to

49.0

62 to

73

98.1 to

112

172 to

201

3.0 to

5.0

6.3 to

7.5

10.0 to

11.5

17.5 to

20.5

21.7 to

36.1

46 to

54

72.4 to

83.1

127 to

148

31.4 3.2 23.1

-

-

-

-

W1048139

G-8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[3] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC OR

UNF THREADS

Grade

SAEGR.5

G

SAEGR.8

@

~

5116

3/8

1/2

9/16

518

N'm

23.1 to 27.7

481056

109 to 130

149.210178.9

203.4 to 244 kgf'm

2.35 to 2.83

4.9105.8

11.1 to 13.2

15.211018.24

20.74 to 24.88

IbHt

17.0 to 20.5

35.01042.0

80.01096.0

110.0 to 132.0

150.010180.0

N'm

32.6 to 39.3

61.1 to 73.2

149.2 to 178.9

217.0 to 260.3

298.310357.9 kgf·m

3.32 to 4.00

6.23 to 7.46

15.21 1018.24

22.121026.54

30.42 10 36.49

IbHt

24.0 to 29.0

45.01054.0

110.0 to 132.0

160.0 to 192.0

220.0 to 264.0

Wi 022485

[4] PLUGS

Material of opponent part

Shape

Tapered screw

'EJ

Straight screw

U

Size

R1/8

R1/4

R318

Ri/2

G1/4

G3/8

Gi/2

N'm

131021

25 to 44

49 to 88

59 to 107

25 to 34

62 to 82

49 to 88

Ordinariness kgf·m

1.3 to 2.2

2.5 to 4.5

5.0 to 9.0

6.0 to 11.0

2.5 to 3.5

6.3 to 8.4

5.0 to 9.0

IbHt

9.4 to 15

18 to 32

37 to 65

44 to 79.5

18 to 25

46 to 60

37 to 65

N'm

13 to 21

25 to 34

49.0 to 58

59 to 78

-

-

Aluminum kgf·m

1.3 to 2.0

2.5103.5

5.0106.0

6.0 to 8.0

-

-

IbHt

9.41015

18 to 25

371043

44 to 57

-

-

-

0000001666E

G-9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

6. MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST

No.

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

Transmission oil filter

Transmission fluid

Ie case oil

Ie pivot start system

10

11 Battery condition

12 Air cleaner element el filter element

Clean

Adjust

{;{

','1'

"

*

*

{;(

!.~ i.~r

-tt

'l':.(

)~

~

"u

*

{;.(

G GENERAL

'4

'1

G-24

G-25

G-14

G-15

G-15

G·16

G-18

HST neutral spring tor hose and clamp

18 Power steering oil line

19 Fuel line

Adjust

Adjust

1:.<

*

{;.( *

'):::.:

*

-A'

G·22

G·23

G·23

G·19

*

@ 1·S20

'i~r npump

27 Fuel system

28 Fuse

29 Light bulb

Flush

Change

Bleed

Replace

Replace

{;.(

Service as required

@ 1·S19

G·27

G-27

• IMPORTANT

• The jobs Indicated by

* must be done after the first 50 hours of operation.

• *1: Air cleaner should be cleaned more often in dusty conditions than in nonmal conditions.

• *2: Every year or every 6 times of cleaning.

• *3: Replace only if necessary,

• *4: When the battery is used for less than 100 hours per year, check the fluid level annually.

• The Items listed above (@ marked) are registered as emission related critical parts by KUBOTA in the U.S. EPA non-road emission regulation. As the engine owner, you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenance on the engine according to the above instruction.

Please see the Warranty Statement in detail.

W1035769

G-10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

7. CHECK AND MAINTENANCE

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to check and service the tractor on a level surface with the engine shut off and the parking brake

"ON" and implement lowered to the ground.

[1] DAILY CHECK

To prevent trouble from occurring, it is important to know the condition of the tractor. Check the following items before starting .

• Walk Around Inspection

Look around the under the tractor for such items as loose bolts, trash build-up, oil or coolant leaks, broken or worn parts.

Checking

1. Checking and refueling.

2. Check the engine oil level.

3. Check the transmission fluid level.

4. Check the coolant level.

5. Clean panel and radiator screen.

6. Check the brake pedal.

7. Check the gauge, the meters and easy checkers.

8. Check the head light, the hazard light etc ..

9. Check and clean the electrical wiring and the battery cables.

10.Check the seat belt and ROPS.

G-11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[2] CHECK POINTS OF INITIAL 50 HOURS

Changing Engine Oil

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop the engine before changing engine oil.

1. Start and warm up the engine for approx. 5 minutes.

2. Place an oil pan underneath the engine.

3. To drain the used oil, remove the drain plug (1) at the bottom of the engine and drain the oil completely.

4. Screw in the drain plug (1).

5. Fill new oil up to upper line on the dipstick (3) .

• IMPORTANT

• When using an oil of different manufacture or viscosity from the previous one, remove all of the old oil.

• Never mix two different types of oil.

• Use the proper SAE Engine Oil according to ambient temperatures.

• Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT". (See page

G-7.)

Engine oil capacity

3.n

3.3 U.S.qts

2.7Imp.qts

(1) Drain Plug

(2) Oil Inlet

(3) Dipstick

IA) Oil level is acceptable within this range.

W1014065

Replacing Engine Oil Filter

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop the engine before changing oil filter cartridge.

1. Remove the oil filter.

2. Put a film of clean engine oil on the rubber seal of the new filter.

3. Tighten the filter quickly until it contacts the mounting surface.

Tighten filter by hand an additional 1/2 turn only.

4. After the new filter has been replaced, the engine oil normally decrease a little. Make sure that the engine oil does not leak through the seal and be sure to check the oil level on the dipstick.

Then, replenish the engine oil up to the specified level.

5. Properly dispose of used oil.

• IMPORTANT

• To prevent serious damage to the engine, replacement element must be highly efficient. Use only a KUBOTA genuine filter or its equivalent.

(1) Engine Oil Filter Cartridge

W1014316

G-12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Replacing Transmission Oil Filter

A

CAUTION

• Allow engine to cool down sufficiently, oil can be hot and can burn.

1. Remove the oil filter.

2. Put a film of clean transmission oil on the rubber seal of the new filter.

3. Tighten the filter quickly until it contacts the mounting surface.

Tighten filter by hand an additional 1/2 turn only.

4. After the new filter has been replaced, the transmission fluid level will decrease a little. Make sure that the transmission fluid does not leak through the seal, and check the fluid level. Top off if necessary.

5. Properly dispose of used oil .

• IMPORTANT

• To prevent serious damage to the hydraulic system, use only a KUBOTA genuine filter.

(1) Transmission Oil Filter

W1014458

Cleaning Transmission Oil Strainer

1. When changing the transmission fluid, disassemble and rinse the strainer with nonflammable solvent to completely clean off fillings.

2. When reassembling, be careful not to damage the parts .

• NOTE

• Since the fine fillings in the iI can damage the precision component parts of the hydraulic system, the end of the suction line is provided with an oil strainer.

(1) Stainer (2) Filter Plate

W1014665

G-13

B)(25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[3] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 50 HOURS

Checking Engine Start System

A

CAUTION

• Do not allow anyone near the tractor while testing.

• If the tractor does not pass the test do not operate the tractor.

• Preparation before testing.

1. Sit on the operator's seat.

2. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.

3. Shift the range gear shift lever (1) to "NEUTRAL" position.

4. Check the speed control pedal "NEUTRAL" position

5. Shift the PTO clutch control lever (2) to "OFF" position.

• Test 1 : Switch for the speed control pedal

1. Shift the range gear shift lever (1) to "NEUTRAL" position.

2. Depress the speed control pedal.

3. Turn the key to "START" position.

4. The engine must not crank.

• Test 2 : Switch for the PTO clutch lever

1. Shift the range gear shift lever (1) to "NEUTRAL" position.

2. Check the speed control pedal "NEUTRAL" position.

3. Shift the PTO clutch control lever (2) to "ON" position.

4. Turn the key to "START" position.

5. The engine must not crank.

• Test 3 : Switches for the operator's seat and the speed control pedal

1. Sit on the operator's seat.

2. Shift the range gear shift lever (1) to "NEUTRAL" position.

3. Start the engine.

4. Depress the speed control pedal.

5. Stand up. (Do not get off the machine.)

6. The engine must shut off after approximately 1 second.

• Test : Switches for the operator's seat and the PTO clutch lever

1. Sit on the operator's seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Engage the PTO clutch control lever (2).

4. Stand up. (Do not get off the machine.)

5. The engine must shut off after approximately 1 second.

(1) Range Gear Shift Lever (2) PTO Clutch Control Lever

W1014904

G-14

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Greasing

1. Apply a small amount of multipurpose grease to the following points.

(1) Battery Terminals (2) Speed Control Pedal Shaft

W1015242

3T888;6;GOP005;6;­

(A)

(1)

Checking Wheel Mounting Screws Tightening Torque

A

CAUTION

• Never operate tractor with a loose rim, wheel, or axle.

• Any time screws are loosened, retighten to specified torque.

• Check all screws frequently and keep them tight.

1. Check wheel screws regularly especially when new. If there are loosened, tighten as follows.

Tightening torque

Front wheel mounting screws

Rear wheel mounting screws

149.2 to 179.0 N'm

15.2 to 18.3 kgf·m

110 to 132 ft-Ibs

108.5 to 130.2 N'm

11.1 to 13.3 kgf·m

80 to 96 ft-Ibs

(1) Front Wheel Mounting Screw

(2) Rear Wheel Mounting Screw

(A) Front

(8) Rear

W1015311

G-15

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[4] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 100 HOURS

Checking Battery Condition

A.

DANGER

To avoid the possibility of battery explosion:

For the refillable type battery, follow the instructions below.

Do not use or charge the refillable type battery if the fluid level is below the LOWER (lower limit level) mark.

Otherwise, the battery component parts may prematurely deteriorate, which may shorten the battery's service life or cause an explosion. Check the fluid level regularly and add distilled water as required so that the fluid level is between the UPPER and LOWER levels.

A.

CAUTION

• Never remove the vent plugs while the engine is running.

• Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothes. If you are spattered with it, wash it away completely with water immediately and get medical attention.

• Wear eye protection and rubber gloves when working around battery.

1. Mishandling the battery shortens the service life and adds to maintenance costs.

2. The original battery is maintenance free type battery, but need some servicing.

If the battery is weak, the engine is difficult to start and the lights become dim. It is important to check the battery periodically.

(1) Battery

W1015551

G-16

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3)

( 1 ) - )

3TAMABOP013A

(4)

(5)

G GENERAL

Checking Battery Condition (Continued)

• Battery Charging

A

CAUTION

• When the battery is being activated, hydrogen and oxygen gases in the battery are extremely explosive. Keep open sparks and flames away from the battery at all times, especially when charging the battery.

• When charging battery, remove battery vent caps are securely in place (if equipped).

• When disconnecting the cable from the battery, start with the negative terminal first.

When connecting the cable to the battery, start with the positive terminal first.

• Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts.

Use a voltmeter or hydrometer. (For accessible maintainable type batteries with removable vent caps.)

1. Make sure each electrolyte level is to the bottom of vent wells, if necessary add distilled water in a well-ventilated area.

2. The water in the electrolyte evaporates during recharging. liquid shortage damages the battery. Excessive liquid spills over and damages the tractor body.

3. To slow charge the battery, connect the battery positive terminal to the charger positive terminal and the negative to the negative, then recharge in the normal manner.

4. A boost charge is only for emergencies. It will partially charges the battery at a high rate and in a short time.

When using a boost-charged battery, it is necessary to recharge the battery as early as possible.

Failure to do this will shorten the battery's service life.

5. When the specific gravity of electrolyte become between 1.27 and 1.29 charge has completed.

6. When exchanging an old battery for a new one, use battery of equal specification shown in table 1.

Table 1

Tractor Type Battery Type

BX25

(1) Lowest Level

(2) Highest Level

(2) Electrolyte

526RA

Volts (V)

12

Reserve

Capacity

(min.)

80

(4) Vent Well

(5) Separator

Cold Cranking

Amps

535

W1019057

G-17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Checking Battery Condition (Continued)

• Battery for storage

1. When storing the tractor for a long period, remove the battery from tractor, adjust the electrolyte to the proper level and store in a dry place out of direct sunlight.

2. The battery self-discharges while it is stored.

Recharge it once every three months in hot seasons and once every six months in cold seasons.

3. (For non-accessible maintenance-free type batteries.)

Maintenance-free, non-accessible batteries are designed to eliminate the need to add water. Yet the volume of electrolyte above plates may eventually become depleted due to abnormal conditions such as high heat or improper regulator setting. Use a voltmeter to check the state of change. (See reference chart below to determine if charging is necessary.)

Battery voltage

12.6

12.4

12.2

12.0

11.8

Reference state of charge

100 % (Full charge)

75%

50%

25%

0%

W1033625

Cleaning Air Cleaner Element

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before cleaning air cleaner element.

1. Remove the air cleaner cover (2) and the element (1).

- Undo the hook.

- Turn the cover clockwise and detach it.

2. Clean the element:

- When dry dust adheres to the element, blow compressed air from the inside, turning the element. Pressure of compressed air must be under 205 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm

2,

30 psi).

- When carbon or oil adheres to the element, soak the element in detergent for 15 minutes then wash it several times in water, rinse with clean water and dry it naturally. After element is fully dried, inspect inside of the element with a light and check if it is damaged or not. (referring to the instructions on the label attached to the case.)

3. Replace air cleaner element:

Once yearly or after every sixth cleaning, whichever comes first.

• NOTE

• Check to see if the evacuator valve is blocked with dust.

• IMPORTANT

• The air cleaner uses a dry element, never apply oil.

• Do not run the engine with filter element removed,

• Align the arrow marks when reinstalling the cover. If the cover is improperly fitted, dust passes by the baffle and directly adheres to the element.

• Evacuator Valve

Open the evacuator valve once a week under ordinary conditions or daily when used in a dusty place to get rid of large particles of dust and dirt.

(1) Element

(2) Cover

(3) Evacuator Valve

W1017166

G-18

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Checking Fuel Lines and Fuel Filter Element

A

CAUTION

• Stop the engine and remove the key before checking fuel lines and fuel filter.

• Check the fuel lines periodically. The fuel lines are subject to wear and aging. Fuel may leak out onto the running engine, causing a fire.

The fuel line connections should be checked annually or every

100 service hours, whichever occurs first.

1. The fuel line is made of rubber and ages regardless of service period.

2. After inspection, if the fuel line and clamps are found damaged or deteriorated, replace them.

3. Check fuel filter, if it is clogged by debris or contaminated by water, replace it.

• IMPORTANT

• When the fuel line is disconnected for maintenance or repair, plug both ends of the fuel line with a clean plug of suitable size to prevent dust and dirt from entering.

Particular care must be taken not to admit dust and dirt into the fuel system. Entrance of dust and dirt causes malfunction of the fuel pump.

• NOTE

• If the fuel line is removed, be sure to properly bleed the fuel system (see "Bleeding Fuel System" in service as required).

(1) Pipe Clamps

(2) Fuel Line

(3) Fuel Filter

(4) Fuel Pump

(5) Fuel Filter

W1017546

G-19

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Checking Fan Belt Tension

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop engine and remove the key before checking belt tension.

1. Stop the engine and remove the key.

2. Apply moderate thumb pressure to belt between pulleys.

3. If tension is incorrect, loosen the alternator mounting bolts and using a lever placed between the alternator and the engine block, pull the alternator out until the deflection of the belt falls within acceptable limits.

4. Replace fan belt if it is damaged.

Fan belt tension Factory spec.

A deflection of between 7 to 9 mm (0.28 to 0.34 in.) when the belt is pressed in the middle of the span.

(1) Mounting Bolt (A) Check the belt tension

W1017708

G-20

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAFKP049A

G GENERAL

Checking and Adjusting HST Neutral Spring (for Dynamic

Braking)

A

WARNING

• Do not operate if tractor move on level ground with foot off speed control pedal.

• If tractor moves on level ground with foot off the pedal, or, if the pedal is too slow in returning to "NEUTRAL" position when removing the foot from the pedal, adjust the HST neutral spring.

The HST neutral spring located under the front right side of the fender can adjust returning speed of speed control pedal.

Since the HST neutral spring tension is weakened, the HST tension should be checked and adjusted every 100 hours.

1. Checking the HST neutral spring tension: Dynamic braking

Start the engine and hold the maximum engine speeds.

- Operate the machine on the concrete level ground.

- Shift the range gear shift lever to "High" position.

- Depress the speed control pedal to "Forward".

- Release the foot from the speed control pedal.

- Check the distance between the foot releasing point and the machine stopping point.

- If the distance is more than approximately 3 m (9.8 feet), strengthen the HST neutral spring tension so that the machine will stop in approximately 3 m (9.8 feet) after releasing the foot from the speed control pedal.

(Reference)

Distance (l) between the foot releasing point and the machine stopping point

Reference

Approximately 3 m (9.8 feet)

2. Remove the step from the machine.

- Loosen the lock nut (2).

- Turn the adjusting nut (3) half turn to pull the HST neutral spring

(1 ).

- Tighten and lock the lock nut (2).

- Start the engine and check dynamic brake as mentioned former.

- If the machine will not stop with dynamic brake in approximately

3 m (9.8 feet), adjust the neutral spring again.

(Reference)

Length (M) of adjusting rod at shipping the machine from the factory

Reference

10mm

0.39 in.

(1) HST Neutral Spring

(2) Lock Nut

(3) Adjusting Nut

(4) Adjusting Rod

(A) Foot Releasing Point

(8) Machine Stopping Point

Point and the Machine Stopping

Point

M : length of Adjusting Rod from

Stay

W1079634

G-21

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

IF

3TAAAAGOP010A

Adjusting Brake Pedal Free Travel

A

CAUTION

• Stop the engine, remove the key, lower the implement to the ground, and chock the wheels before checking brake pedal.

• Even if the brake pedal free travel is within the limitation, adjust the brake pedal following the procedure below.

1. Release the parking brake.

2. Loosen the lock nut and turn the turnbuckle to adjust the rod length so that the brake pedal free travel is 10 mm (0.4 in.).

3. Extend the turnbuckle one additional turn.

4. Retighten the lock nut.

5. Depress the brake pedal several times and make sure the brake pedal free travel is from 25 to 35 mm (1.0 to 1.4 in.).

Brake pedal free travel Factory spec.

25 to 35mm

1.0 to 1.4 in.

(1) Tumbuckle

(2) Lock Nut

A: Free Travel

W1018144

[5]

CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 200 HOURS

Changing Engine Oil

1. See page G-12.

W1043804

Replacing Engine Oil Filter

1. See page G-12.

W1018516

Replacing Transmission Oil Filter

1. See page G-13.

W1043871

Checking Radiator Hoses and Hose Clamps

Check to see if radiator hoses are properly fixed every 200 hours of operation or six months, whichever comes first.

1. If hose damps are loose or water leaks, tighten clamps securely.

2. Replace hoses and tighten hose clamps securely, if radiator hoses are swollen, hardened or cracked.

3. Properly dispose of used coolant.

Replace hoses and hose clamps every 2 years or earlier if checked and found that hoses are swollen, hardened or cracked.

• Precaution at Overheating

Take the following actions in the event the coolant temperature be nearly or more than the boiling point, what is called

"Overheating" .

1. Stop the machine operation in a safe place and keep the engine idling unloaded.

2. Don't stop the engine suddenly, but stop it after about 5 minutes of unloaded idling.

3. Keep yourself well away from the machine for an additional 10 minutes or until the steam has blown out.

4. Checking that there is no danger such as burn. get rid of the cause of overheating according to the manual. see "ENGINE" section. and then, start the engine again.

(1) Radiator Hose (2) Hose Clamp

W1018562

G-22

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Checking Power Steering Line

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before checking power steering line.

1. Check to see that all lines are tight and not damaged.

2. If hoses are found to be worn or damaged, replace or repair them at once.

(1) Power Steering Hose

W1018751

1

~

(A) t

(C)

"I

3TMABABOP042A

(8)

Checking Intake Air Line

1. Check to see that hose and hose clamps are tight and not damaged.

2. If hose and clamps are found to be worn or damaged, replace or repair them at once.

(1) Hose (2) Clamp

W1018915

Adjusting Toe-in

1. Park tractor on a firm, flat and level place.

2. Turn steering wheel so front wheels are in the straight ahead position.

3. Lower the implement to the ground, lock the parking brake, stop the engine and remove the key.

4. Measure distance between tire beads at front of tire at hub height.

5. Measure distance between tire beads at rear of tire at hub height.

6. Front distance should be 0 to 5 mm (0 to 0.19 in.) less that rear distance. If not, adjust tie rod length.

Toe-in «(8) - (Al)

(1) Lock Nul

(2) Tie-rod

Factory spec.

010 5 mm

OtoO.19 in .

• Adjusting

1. Loosen the lock nuts and turn the steering tie-rod to adjust the rod length until the proper toe-in measurement is obtained.

2. Retighten the lock nuts.

(A) Wheel to Wheel Distance at Front

(8) Wheel to Wheel Distance at Rear

(e) Front

W1019009

G-23

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM G GENERAL

[6] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 400 HOURS

(1 )

Changing Transmission Fluid

1. See page G-13.

W1019295

Cleaning Transmission Oil Strainer

1. When changing the transmission fluid, disassemble and rinse the strainer with nonflammable solvent to completely clean off fillings.

2. When reassembling, be careful not to damage the parts .

• NOTE

• Since the fine fillings in the oil can damage the precision component parts of the hydraulic system, the end of the suction line is provided with an oil strainer.

(1) Strainer (2) Filter Plate

W1019390

(3)

(3)

(2) e

~:

(A)

Changing Front Axle Case Oil

1. Park the machine on a firm, flat and level surface.

2. To drain the used oil, remove the right and left drain plugs and oil gauge at the front axle case and drain the oil completely into the oil pan.

\\~

3. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs.

. (1) w,IF

4. Remove the right and left breather plugs.

5. Fill with new oil up to the upper notch on the dipstick.

~ • IMPORTANT

• After ten minutes, check the oil level again; add oil to prescribed level.

6. After filling, reinstall the oil gauge and breather plugs.

Front axle case oil capacity

4.7l

5.0 U.S.qts

4.1Imp.qts

(1) Breather Plug

(2) Oil Gauge with Dipstick

(3) Drain Plug

(A) 011 level is acceptable within this range.

W1019508

G-24

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL u Adjusting Front Axle Pivot

1. Remove the split pin (2), tighten the adjusting nut (1).

2. Make sure that one of the nut slots aligns with the split pin hole, tighten the nut slightly if necessary to align.

3. Replace the split pin. lightening torque Factory spec.

20N'm

2.0 kgf·m

15 ft-Ibs

(1) Adjusting Nut (2) Split Pin

3TAAAAGOP017 A W1019713

[7] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 500 HOURS

Replacing Fuel Filter Element

1. Disconnect the fuel hoses and replace the fuel filter (2).

2. Disconnect the fuel hoses and loosen the pipe clamp to replace the fuel filter (5) .

• NOTE

• If the fuel line is removed, be sure to properly bleed the fuel system. (See page G-30.)

(1) Fuel Pump

(2) Fuel Filter

(3) Fuel Line

(4) Hose Clamp

(5) Fuel Filter

W1019858

G-25

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[8] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 800 HOURS

Adjusting Engine Valve Clearance

1. See page 1-S13.

W1019995

[9] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 1500 HOURS

Checking Fuel Injection Nozzle Injection Pressure

1. See page 1-S20.

W1020203

[10] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 3000 HOURS

Checking Injection Pump

1. See page 1-S 19.

W1020260

[11] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 1 YEAR

Replacing Air Cleaner Element

1. See page G-18.

W1020343

[12] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 2 YEARS

Replacing Radiator Hoses (Water Pipes)

1. Replace the hoses and clamps.

Refer to "Checking Radiator Hoses and Hose Clamps".

(See page G-22.)

W1020468

Replacing Power Steering Hoses

1. Replace the hoses.

Refer to "Checking Power Steering Line".

(See page G-23.)

W1020513

Replacing Fuel Line

1. Replace the hoses and clamps.

Refer to "Checking Fuel Line and Fuel Filter".

(See page G-19.)

W1020558

Replacing Intake Air Line

1. Replace the intake hose.

2. Refer to "Checking Intake Air Line".

(See page G-23.)

W1020422

G-26

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Flushing Cooling System and Changing Coolant

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before checking coolant level.

• Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Then loosen cap slightly to the stop to relieve any excess pressure before removing cap completely.

1. Stop the engine, remove the key and let cool down.

2. To drain the coolant, open the radiator drain plug, and remove radiator cap. The radiator cap must be removed to completely drain the coolant.

3. After all coolant is drained, close the drain plug.

4. Fill with clean water and cooling system cleaner.

5. Follow directions of the cleaner instruction.

6. After flushing, fill with clean water and anti-freeze until the coolant level is just below the radiator cap.

Install the radiator cap securely.

7. Fill with coolant up to "H" mark on the recovery tank.

8. Start and operate the engine for few minutes.

9. Stop the engine, remove the key and let cool.

1 a.Check coolant level of recovery tank and add coolant if necessary.

11.Properly dispose of used coolant.

• IMPORTANT

• Do not start engine without coolant.

• Use clean, fresh water and anti-freeze to fill the radiator.

• When the anti-freeze is mixed with water, the anti-freeze mixing ratio must be less than 50 %.

• Securely tighten radiator cap. If the cap is loose or improperly fitted, water may leak out and the engine could overheat.

Coolant capacity (with recovery tank)

3.1L

3.3 U.S.qts

2.7Imp.qts

(1) Radiator Cap (2) Drain Plug

W1021307

G-27

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Flushing Cooling system and Changing Coolant (Continued)

• Anti-Freeze

A

CAUTION

• When using antifreeze, put on some protection such as rubber gloves (Antifreeze contains position.).

• If should drink antifreeze, throw up at once and take medical attention.

• When antifreeze comes in contact with the skin or clothing, wash it off immediately.

• Do not mix different types of Antifreeze.

The mixture can produce chemical reaction causing harmful substances.

• Antifreeze is extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions. Keep fire and children away from antifreeze.

• When draining fluids from the engine, place some container underneath the engine body.

• Do not pour waste onto the grounds, down a drain, or into any water source.

• Also, observe the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of antifreeze.

If it freezes, coolant can damage the cylinders and radiator. If the ambient temperature falls below 0 °C (32 OF) or before a long-term storage, let out cooling water completely, or mix fresh water with long-life coolant and fill the radiator and reserve tank with the mixture.

1. Long-life coolant (hereafter LLC) comes in several types. Use ethylene glycol (EG) type for this engine.

2. Before employing LLC-mixed cooling water, fill the radiator with fresh water and empty it again.

Repeat this procedure 2 or 3 times to clean up the inside.

3. Mixing the LLC.

Put the LLC in cooling water in the percentage (%) for a target temperature. When mixing, stir it up well, and then fill into the radiator.

4. The procedure for the mixing of water and antifreeze differs according to the make of the antifreeze and the ambient temperature. Refer to SAE J1034 standard, more specifically also to SAE J814c .

• IMPORTANT

• When the antifreeze is mixed with water, thee antifreeze mixing ratio must be less than 50 %.

Vol % Anti-freeze

40

50

Freezing Point

°C

OF

-24

37

-12

34

Boiling Point'

°C

OF

106 222

1 226

W1022492

G-28

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Flushing Cooling system and Changing Coolant (Continued)

5. Adding the LLC.

- Add only water if the mixture reduces in amount by evaporation.

- If there is a mixture leak, add the LLC of the same manufacture

* and type in the same mixture percentage.

Never add any long-life coolant of different manufacture.

(Different brands may have different additive components, and the engine may fail to perform as specified.)

6. When the LLC is mixed, do not employ any radiator cleaning agent. The LLC contains anticorrosive agent. If mixed with the cleaning agent, sludge may build up, adversely affecting the engine parts.

7. Kubota's genuine long-life coolant has a service life of 2 years.

Be sure to change the coolant every 2 years.

W1032576

G-29

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[13] OTHERS

G GENERAL

Bleeding Fuel System

Air must removed:

1. When the fuel filter (2) or lines are removed.

2. When tank is completely empty.

3. After the tractor has not been used for a long period of time .

• Bleeding procedure is as follows:

1. Fill the fuel tank with fuel.

2. Tum the key switch to "ON" position for about 30 seconds.

Doing so allows fuel pump (1) to work and pump air out of the fuel system.

3. Start the engine and run for about 30 seconds, and then stop the engine.

(1) Fuel Pump (2) Fuel Filter

W1021149

G-30

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAFOP012A i ,

;/; l i

!

G GENERAL

Replacing Fuse

1. The tractor electrical system is protected from potential damage by fuses.

A blown fuse indicates that there is an overload or short somewhere in the electrical system.

2. If any of the fuses should blow, replace with a new one of the same capacity .

• IMPORTANT

• Before replacing a blown fuse, determine why the fuse blew and make any necessary repairs. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious damage to the tractor electrical system.

If any of the fuses should blow, replace with a new one of the same capacity.

• Protected Circuit

[Fuse Box]

Fuse No.

(1 )

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Capacity (A)

15

15

15

20

10

10

Protected circuit

Solenoid

Hazard

ACC

Working Light

DC Outlet

Timer Relay

Fuse No.

(7)

Capacity (A)

Slow Blow Fuse

(50A)

Protected circuit

Check circuit against wrong battery connection

(B) Fuse Box

W1023430

Replacing Light Bulb

1. Head lights:

Take the bulb out of the light body and replace with a new one.

2. Other lights:

Detach the lens and replace the bulb.

Light

Head light

Taillight

Hazard light I Turn signal light

Capacity

37.5W

12.8W

23 W 123W

(1) Head Light

(2) Tail Light

(3) Hazard Light I Turn Signal Light

Wi 023802

G-31

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

8. SPECIAL TOOLS

[1] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR ENGINE

Special Use Puller Set

Code No.: 07916-09032

Application: Use exclusively for pulling out bearing, gears and other parts with ease.

W1024050

Piston Ring Compressor

Code No.: 07909-32111

Application: Use exclusively for pushing in the piston with piston rings into the cylinder.

W1024100

3TMABABOP050A

Piston Ring Tool

Code No.: 07909-32121

Application: Use exclusively for removing or installing the piston ring with ease.

W1024150

3TMABABOP051 A

(10)(11)

(1 )

~~~

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) t~t~t'@'

~-.;;;r;g;;;e;-;r&l. ~

(2)

3TMABABOP052A

Diesel Engine Compression Tester (for Injection Nozzle)

Code No.: 07909-30208 (Assembly) 07909-31251 (G)

07909-30934 (A to F) 07909-31271 (I)

07909-31211 (E and F) 07909-31281 (J)

07909-31231 (H)

Application: Use to measure diesel engine compression and diagnostics of need for major overhaul.

(1) Gauge

(2) L Joint

(3) Adaptor A

(4) Adaptor B

(5) Adaptor C

(6) Adaptor E

(7) Adaptor F

(8) Adaptor G

(9) Adaptor H

(10) Adaptor I

(11) Adaptor J

W1024200

G-32

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3)~

(4)

~ (5)~

_.

~(2)

G GENERAL

Diesel Engine Compression Tester (for Glow Plug)

Code No.: 07909-39081 (Assembly) 07909-31301 (L)

07909-31291 (K) 07909-31311 (M)

Application: Use to measure diesel engine compression and diagnostics of need for major overhaul.

(1) Gauge

(2) L Joint

(3) Adaptor K

(4) Adaptor L

(5) Adaptor M

0000001398E

3EEACAA 1 P063A

~

• @

~

@

~

©

(4) (5) (6)

~

@ @

~

(1 ) (2) (3)

3TMABABOP053A e

(7) (8)

Oil Pressure Tester

Code No.: 07916-32032

Application: Use to measure lubricating oil pressure.

(1) Gauge

(2) Cable

(3) Threaded Joint

(4) Adaptor 1

(5) Adaptor 2

(6) Adaptor 3

(7) Adaptor 4

(8) Adaptor 5

Valve Seat Cutter

Code No.: 07909-33102

Application: Use to reseat valves.

Angle: 0.785 rad (45°)

0.262 rad (15°)

Diameter: 28.6 mm (1.126 in.)

31.6 mm (1.244 in.)

35.0 mm (1.378 in.)

W1024318

38.0 mm (1.496 in.)

41.3 mm (1.626 in.)

50.8 mm (2.000 in.)

W1024458

3TMABABOP054A

Radiator Tester

Code No.: 07909-31551

Application: Use to check of radiator cap pressure, and leaks from cooling system.

Remarks: Adaptor (1) BANZAI Code No. RCT-2A-30S

W1024532

3TAAAABOP029A

Connecting Rod Alignment Tool

Code No.: 07909-31661

Application: Use to check the connecting rod alignment.

Applicable: Connecting rod big end 1.0. range 30 to 75 mm (1.18 to 2.95 in.) dia.

Connecting rod length

65 to 300 mm (2.56 to 11.81 in.)

W1024583

3TMABABOP056A

G-33

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Nozzle Tester

Code No.: 07909-31361

Application: Use to check the fuel injection pressure and spray pattern of nozzle.

Measuring: 0 to 50 MPa range (0 to 500 kgf/cm

2

, 0 to 7000 psi)

W1024653

3TLABAB1 P041A

Plastigage

Code No.: 07909-30241

Application: Use to check the oil clearance between crankshaft and bearing, etc ..

Measuring: Green 0.025 to 0.076 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in.) range Red 0.051 to 0.152 mm (0.002 to 0.006 in.)

BlueO.102 to 0.229 mm (0.004 to 0.009 in.)

W1024719

3TMABABOP058A

Red Check

Code No.: 07909-31371

Application: Use to check cracks on cylinder head, cylinder block, etc..

W1024909

8

3TMABABOP059A

~

2

A

3TMABABOP063A

D

E

V9'

C1

B

F

CO.3 C 1

C

G

L

Valve Guide Replacing Tool

Application: Use to press out and press fit the valve guide. o

E mm dia. (0.460 to 0.468 in. dia.) to 6.6 mm dia. (0.256 to 0.259 in. dia.)

225 mm (8.86 in.)

70 mm (2.76 in.)

45 mm (1.77 in.) F

G

H

J

K

25 mm (0.98 in.)

5 mm (0.197 in.)

6.7 to 7.0 mm dia. (0.263 to 0.275 in. dia.)

20 mm dia. (0.787 in. dia.)

12.5 to 12.8 mm dia. (0.492 to 0.504 in. dia.)

8.9 to 9.1 mm (0.350 to 358 in.)

Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

Chamfer 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)

CO.3 Chamfer 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

W1025017

3TMABABOP064A

J

K

G-34

BX25, RCK54{P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

•

C2

A

3TMABABOP063A

D vv

C1

B

E F

•

CO.3 C 1

C

G GENERAL

E

F

G

H

A

B

C

D

Valve Guide Replacing Tool

Application: Use to press out and press fit the valve guide .

20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)

9.96 to 9.98 mm dia. (0.3921 to 0.3929 in. dia.)

5.5 to 5.7 mm dia. (0.2165 to 0.2244 in. dia.)

220 mm (8.66 in.)

80 mm (3.15 in.)

40 mm (1.58 in.)

25 mm dia. (0.98 in. dia.)

5 mm (0.197 in.)

6.0 to 6.1 mm dia. (0.236 to 0.240 in. dia.)

G J

K

L

L

C1

C2

CO.3

. 17 to 0.421 in. dia.)

6.9 to 7.1 mm (0.272 to 0.280 in.)

Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

Chamfer 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)

Chamfer 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

3TMABABOP064A

W1234567

B

3EEACAA 1 P069A

A

F

C

C2

Bushing Replacing Tool

Application: Use to press out and press fit the bushing.

1. For small end bushing

A

B

C

D

E

F

C1

C2

145 mm (5.71 in.)

20 mm (0.79 in.)

100 mm (3.94 in.)

19.90 to 19.95 mm dia. (0.7835 to 0.7854 in. dia.)

I

21.90 to 21.95 mm dia. (0.8622 to 0.8642 in. dia.)

25 mm dia. (0.98 in. dia.)

Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

Chamfer 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)

CO.3 a

Chamfer 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

6.3 Ilm (250 Ilin.) b 6.3 Ilm (250 Ilin.)

2. For idle gear bushing

A 150 mm (5.91 in.) t=!=

23 mm (0.91 in.)

C 100 mm (3.94 in.)

D 19.90 to 19.95 mm dia. (0.7835 to 0.7854 in. dia.)

21.90 to 21.95 mm dia. (0.8622 to 0.8642 in. dia.) E

F 25 mm dia. (0.98 in. dia.)

C1

C2

CO.3 a b

Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

Chamfer 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)

Chamfer 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

6.3 11m (250 Ilin.)

6.3 11m (250 Ilin.)

W12358870

G-35

B)(25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

E~-+~~---------------4

3TMABABOP067D

C2

3GFABABOP041 B

C

A

C1

D E

H

CO.3 C1

G GENERAL

Flywheel Stopper

Application: Use to loosen and tighten the flywheel screw.

A

B

C

0

E

F

200 mm (7.87 in.)

30 mm (1.18 in.)

~mm

(0.79 in.)

15 mm (0.59 in.)

8 mm (0.31 in.)

10 mm dia. (0.39 in. dia.)

W1472583

Crankshaft Bearing 1 Replacing Tool

Application: Use to press out and press fit the crankshaft bearing 1.

B

C

0

E

F

G

H

C1

C2

CO.3

[Press Out]

A 135 mm (5.31 in.)

72 mm (2.83 in.)

40 mm radius (1.57 in. radius)

10 mm (0.39 in.)

22 mm (0.87 in.)

20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)

47.90 to 47.95 mm dia. (1.8858 to 1.8878 in. dia.)

43.90 to 43.95 mm dia. (1.7283 to 1.7303 in. dia.)

Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

Chamfer 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)

Chamfer 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

0

E

F

G

H

C1

C2

CO.3

[Press Fit] for 0902-E2B

A 130 mm (5.12 in.)

B

C

72 mm (2.83 in.)

40 mm radius (1.57 in. radius)

9 mm (0.35 in.)

24 mm (0.95 in.)

20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)

68 mm dia. (2.68 in. dia.)

43.90 to 43.95 mm dia. (1.7283 to 1.7303 in. dia.)

Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

Chamfer 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)

Chamfer 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

W9632587

G-36

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[2] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR TRACTOR

Tie-rod End Lifter

Code No.: 07909-39051

Application: Use for removing the tie-rod end with ease.

W1026472

3TMABABOP071 A

(1 )

(2)

(3)

(5) (6) (7)

~ ~ ~ l

(8)

J

3TMABABOP077 A

(13)

3TAAAABOP031A

Relief Valve Pressure Tester

Code No.: 07916-50045

Application: This allows easy measurement of relief set pressure.

(1) Gauge (07916-50322)

(2) Cable (07916-50331)

(3) Threaded Joint (07916-50401)

(4) Threaded Joint (07916-50341)

(5) Adaptor B (M18 x P1.5)

(07916-50361 )

(6) Adaptor C (PS3/8) (07916-50371)

(7) Adaptor D (PT1/8) (07916-50381)

(8) Adaptor E (PS3/8) (07916-50392)

(9) Adaptor F (PF1/2) (07916-62601)

(10) Adaptor 58 (PT1/4) (07916-52391)

W1026741

Hydrostatic Transmission Tester and HST Adaptor Set

Code No.: 07916-52040 (Hydrostatic Transmission Tester)

07916-53072 (HST Adaptor Set)

Application: This allows easy measurement of hydrostatic transmission pressure.

(1) Hydrostatic Transmission Tester

(07916-52040)

(2) Gasket (04714-00200)

(3) Connector 3 (07916-51331)

(4) Vacuum Gauge (07916-51331)

(5) Pressure Gauge (Low Pressure)

(07916-51301 )

(6) Pressure Gauge (High Pressure)

(in Relief Valve Set Pressure Tester)

(07916-50321 )

(7) HN Tube (in Relief Valve Set

Pressure Tester) (07916-50331)

(8) Valve Seat Driver (07916-60841)

(9) Connector 1 (07916-60811)

(10) Connector 2 (07916-60821)

(11) Long Connector (07916-60831)

(12) Adaptor 1 (07916-52621)

(13) Adaptor 2 with Collar

(07916-52632)

(14) Adaptor 3 with Collar

(07916-52642)

(15) HST Adaptor Set (07916-53072)

W1023682

G-37

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

A

J

E A

3TBAAAGOP034A

K

------------J

0

M

G GENERAL

Independant PTO Clutch Spring Compression Tool

Application: Use for compressing the spring into the spline boss.

This tool can be used for B30 series, BX50 series and

BX25 tractor.

A

B

12 mm (0.47 in.)

25.4 mm (1.00 in.)

C 19 mm radius (0.75 in.) Hex.

~ 7 mm (0.11 in.)

E mm (0.31 in.)

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

15 mm dia. (0.59 in. dia.)

37 mm (1.46 in.)

70 mm (2.76 in.)

M14 x1.5

R 3 mm (0.12 in.)

30 mm (1.18 in.)

17 mm (0.67 in.)

38 mm (1.50 in.)

W10301570

3TAAAAFOP014A

G-38

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK606-236X, LA240, 6T601, WSM

Disassembling and Assembling Stand (1/2)

A

B

G GENERAL

D

E

F

,

I

,

I

-$­

J

G

U

P

M

0

L

W

Q~~------------------------~I----------------------~

R

3TAAAAGOP023A

Application: Use to disassembling transaxle assembly and to assembling transaxle assembly.

F

G

H

I

J

K

A

B

C

D

E

$ 9 mm ($ 0.35 in.) 3 Holes

225 mm (8.86 in.)

$ 13 mm ($ 0.51 in.) 3 Holes

140 mm (5.51 in.)

99.5 to 100.5 mm (3.92 to 3.95 in.)

59.5 to 60.5 mm (2.35 to 2.38 in.)

92.5 to 93.5 mm (3.65 to 3.68 in.)

12.5 to 13.5 mm (0.50 to 0.53 in.) i

55 mm (2.17 in.)

20 mm (0.79 in.)

17 mm (0.67 in.)

P

Q

R

S

T

U

W

L

M

N

0

30.5 to 31.5 mm (1.21 to 1.24 in.)

226 mm (8.90 in.)

125.5 to 126.5 mm (4.95 to 4.98 in.)

352 mm (13.86 in.)

25 mm (0.98 in.)

9.5 mm (0.37 in.)

397 mm (15.63 in.)

46 mm (1.81 in.)

R 25 mm (0.98 in.)

11 mm (0.43 in.)

20 mm (0.79 in.)

H

K

G-39

G GENERAL BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

Disassembling and Assembling Stand (2/2)

B C!

A D

B

Cl

G

E

V

I

!

I

!

I

I

I

I i

I

I

I

I

F

H

I

S

T

"'­ p

~--+4>------$-

at

Ii

W

U

A

B

F

G

H

I

C

0

E

J

K

3TAAAAGOP024A

Application: Use to disassembling transaxle assembly and to assembling transaxle assembly.

311 mm (12.24 in.)

40 mm (1.57 in.)

38.1 mm (1.50 in.)

235 mm (9.25 in.)

170 mm (6.69 in.)

9.5 mm (0.37 in.)

6.4 mm (0.25 in.)

365 mm (14.37 in.)

377.8 mm (14.87 in.)

50.8 mm (2.00 in.)

40 mm (1.57 in.)

Q

R

S

T

U

V

L

M

N

0

P

38.1 mm (1.50 in.)

1.9 mm (0.07 in.)

4.8 mm (0.19 in.)

200 mm (7.87 in.)

69 mm (ell 0.35 in.), 3 Holes

25 mm (0.98 in.)

39.5 to 40.5 mm (1.56 to 1.59 in.)

140 mm (5.51 in.)

260 mm (10.24 in.)

99.5 to 100.5 mm (3.92 to 3.95 in.)

45 mm (1.77 in.)

J

r----K-

l M

N

0 f-----

I •

I

I

I .

I I

.

I I

I I

I i

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

~

N-.....­

G-40

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[3] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR FRONT LOADER

(a) A

Sliding Jig and Correcting Jig

Application: Use to install the O-mig and the piston seal.

B

3UFAAACLP035A

E

G

(b)

-

-

~

I

3UFAAACLP036A

~J

I

•

....f

C 0

K L

G

H

I

J

K

L

Boom Cylinder (40 mm (1.57 in.)

A

B

C

D

E

F

80 "

0.157 rad

9°

40.18 mm dia.

1.582 in. dia.

41.18 mm dia.

1.621 in. dia.

42.0 mm

1.65 in.

I

10.0 mm

0.4 in.

58.5 mm

2.30 in.

14mm

0.55 in .

35.0 mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad

7°

40,2 mmdia,

1.583 in, dia,

48.9 mmdia.

1.925 in. dia.

Bucket Cylinder (65 mm (2.56 in.) i

80 "

0.157 rad

9°

65.18 mm dia.

2.566 in. dia.

66.18 mm dia.

2.606 in. dia.

42.0mm

1.65 in.

10.0mm

0.4 in.

58.5mm

2.30 in.

14mm

0.55 in,

35.0 mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad

7°

65,2 mm dia.

2,567 in. dia,

73,9 mmdia.

2,909 in. dia, i

(a) Sliding Jig (b) Correcting Jig

W1017590

G-41

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[4] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR BACKHOE

(a) A

Sliding Jig and Correcting Jig

Application: Use to install the O-rnig and the piston seal.

B

3UFAAACLP035A

E

G

(b) t-!i-

3UFAAACLP036A

~J

I

I

C D

K L

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

Boom Cylinder

80..,!

0.157 rad.

9°

65.18 mm

2.57 in.

66.18 mm

2.61 in.

42.0 mm

1.65 in.

10.0 mm

0.4 in.

58.5 mm

2.3 in.

14.0 mm

0.55 in.

35.0 mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad.

7°

65.2 mm

2.57 in.

73.9 mm

2.91 in.

Dipperstick. Swing,

Stabilizer Cylinder

80..,!

0.157 rad.

9°

60.18 mm

2.37 in.

61.18mm

2.41 in.

42.0mm

1.65 in.

10.0 mm

0.4 in.

58.5mm

2.30 in.

14.0 mm

0.55 in.

35.0 mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad.

7°

60.2 mm

2.37 in.

68.9 mm

2.71 in.

Bucket Cylinder

80..,!

0.157 rad.

9°

50.18 mm

1.98 in.

51.18 mm

2.01 in.

42.0mm

1.65 in.

10.0 mm

0.4 in.

58.5mm

2.30 in.

14.0 mm

0.55 in.

35.0mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad.

7°

50.2 mm

1.98 in.

58.9 mm

2.32 in.

(a) Sliding Jig (b) Correcting Jig

Wi 022090

G-42

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

9. TIRES

[1] TIRE PRESSURE

A

WARNING

• Do not attempt to mount a tire on a rim. This should be done by a qualified person with the proper equipment.

• Always maintain the correct tire pressure.

Do not inflate tires above the recommended pressure shown in the operator's manual.

• IMPORTANT

• Do not use tires larger than specified.

• When you intend to mount different size of tires from equipped ones, consult your distributor about front drive gear ratio for detail.

Excessive wear of tires may occur due to improper gear ratio. without

Loader

Rear

Front

Tire sizes

26 x 12.00 12 Turf

26 x 12.00 -12 Bar

26 x 12.00 - 12 Ind.

18 x 8.50 -10 Turf

18 x 8.50 - 10 Bar

18 x 8.50 10 Ind.

Inflation pressure

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm£. 20 psi)

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm 2 , 20 psi)

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm

2

, 20 psi)

150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm£, 22 psi)

150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm

2

, 22 psi)

150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm

2 ,

22 psi) with

Loader

Rear

Front

Tire sizes

26 x 12.00 - 12 Turf

26 x 12.00-12 Bar

26 x 12.00 12 Ind.

18 x 8.50 -10 Turf

18 x 8.50 - 10 Bar

18 x 8.50 - 10 Ind.

Inflation pressure

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cmL, 20 psi)

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm

2

,

2

,

20 psi)

20 psi)

180 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm L

,

25.4 psi)

180 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm2 , 25.4 psi)

180 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm

2

, 25.4 psi)

Though the tire pressure is factory-set to the prescribed level, it naturally drops slowly in the course of time.

Thus, check it everyday and inflate as necessary .

• NOTE

• Maintain the maximum pressure in front tires, if using a front loader or when equipped with a full load of front weights.

G-43

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[2] WHEEL TREAD

The tread can not be adjusted .

• IMPORTANT

• Do not turn discs to obtain wider tread.

• Always attach tires as shown in the drawing.

• If not attached as illustrated, transmission parts may be damaged.

• When re-fitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to the following torques then recheck after driving the tractor 200 m or 200 yards and thereafter daily check service .

• NOTE

• Use the tapered bolts for wheels with beveled or tapered holes.

Front

18 x 8.50 - 10 Turf, Bar and Ind.

Rear

26 x 12.00 - 12 Turf, Bar and Ind.

8

(1 )

3TAAAAGOP025A 3TAAAAGOP008A nghtening torque

Front wheel

Rear wheel

(1) Wheel Mounting Screw

149.2 to 179.0 N'm

15.2 to 18.3 kgf·m

110 to 132 ft-Ibs

108.5 to 130.2 N'm

11.1 to 13.3 kgf·m

80 to 96 ft-Ibs

A: 910 mm (35.8 in.)

B : 820 mm (32.2 in.)

W1045824

3TVAAACOP014A

G-44

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

[3] BALLAST

(1) Front Ballast

Add weights needed for stability and improve traction.

Heavy pulling and heavy rear mounted implements tend to lift front wheels. Add enough ballast to maintain steering control and prevent tip over.

Remove weight when no longer needed.

(1 )

Front End Weights (Option)

1. The front end weights can be attached to the bumper.

See your implement operator's manual for required number of weights .

• NOTE

• Besides the weight, a front weight bracket and mounting bolt kit(s) are required for mounting the weight.

• IMPORTANT

• Do not overload tires.

• Add no more weight than indicated in chart.

3TAAAAFOP011A

Maximum weight Factory spec.

125 kg

2751bs

(1) Front End Weights (2) Front Weight Bracket (Option)

W1029958

G-45

BX25, RCK54{P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, 8T601, WSM G GENERAL

(2)

(2) Rear Ballast

Add weights to rear wheels if needed to improve traction or for stability The amount of rear ballast should be matched to job and the ballast should be remove when it is not needed.

The weight should be added to the tractor in the form of liquid ballast.

(A)

3TMABABOP107B

(8)

Liquid Ballast in Rear Tires

1. Water and calcium chloride solution provides safe economical ballast. Used properly, it will not damage tires, tubes or rims.

2. The addition of calcium chloride is recommended to prevent the water from freezing.

3. Use of this method of weighting the wheels has the full approval of the tire companies .

• IMPORTANT

• Do not fill tires with water or solution more than 75 % of full capacity (to the level of valve stem at 12 o'clock position).

• To avoid damage of transmission, do not use rear wheel weights and liquid ballast at the same time.

26 x 12.00 - 12 Tire sizes

Slush free at -10°C {14 OF}

Solid at -30°C {-22 OF}

[Approx. 1 kg (2 Ibs) CaCI2 per 4 L (1 gal.) of water)

Slush free at -24°C (-11°F)

Solid at -47°C (-52 OF)

[Approx. 1.5 kg (3.5 Ibs) CaCI2 per 4 L (1 gal.} of water)

Slush free at -47 °C (-53 OF)

Solid at -52°C (-62 OF)

[Approx. 2.25 kg (5 Ibs) CaCI2 per 4 L (1 gal.) of water)

45 kg

(991bs)

50 kg

(1101bs)

56 kg

(123Ibs)

(1) Air

(2) Water

(3) Valve Stem

(A) Correct: 75 % Full Air

Compresses Like A Cushion

(B) Incorrect: 100 % Full

Water Can Not Be Compressed

~{11

W1041433

Attaching Injector

1. Lift the rear tires off the ground.

2. Turn the tire so that the air valve is at the top.

3. Remove the air valve, and attach the injector. (Code No. 07916­

52511)

(1) Injector (2) Hose

W1041681

I 3TAAAABOP034A

G-46

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, 6T601, WSM G GENERAL

10.IMPLEMENT LIMITATIONS

The KUBOTA Tractor has been thoroughly tested for proper performance with implements sold or approved by

KUBOTA. Use with implements which exceed the maximum specifications listed below, or which are otherwise unfit for use with the KUBOTA Tractor may result in malfunctions or failures of the tractor, damage to other property and injury to the operator or others. [Any malfunctions or failures of the tractor resulting from use with improper implements are not covered by the warranty.]

~ Tread (max. width) with farm tires

Rear

BX25 910 mm (35.8 in.) 820 mm (32.2 in.)

Lower link end max. loading weight Wo

550 kg (1210 Ibs)

~

As in the following list

BX25

Implement weight W1 and I

(Shown on the next page)

Actual figures

Max. Drawbar Load W2

250 kg (550 Ibs)

Trailer loading weight W3

Max. capacity

800 kg (1765 Ibs)

Lower link end max. hydraulic lifting capacity ..... Wo

Implement weight... ........................................... The implement's weight which can be put on the lower link: W1

Max. drawbar load ............................................. W2

Trailer loading weight ......................................... The max. loading weight for trailer (without trailer's weight) : W3

B

~Q

Wo t

3TMABABOP109A

~ ~@1ty,

W1

8

~~31

W2

• NOTE

• Implement size may vary depending on soil operating conditions.

G-47

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM G GENERAL

Mower

Sprayer

Implement

Backhoe*

Front-end Loader u

Disc Plow

Cultivator

Mid-Mount

Rotary-C utter

(1 Blade)

Rear-Mount

(2 or 3 Blade)

Flail Mower

Sickle Bar

Rotary Tiller

Bottom Plow

Disc Harrow

Front Blade

Rear Blade

Box Blade

Remarks

Max. Digging Depth

Max. Weight

Max. Lifting Capacity

Max. Width

Sub frame

Max. Cutting Width

Max.Weight

Max. Cutting Width

Max.Weight

Max. Cutting Width

Max.Weight

Max. Cutting Width

Max. Cutting Width

Max. Tilling Width

Max. Weight

Max. Size

Max. Size

Max. Width

Max. Harrowing Width

Max. Weight

Max. Tank Capacity

Max. Cutting Width

Sub Frame

Max. Cutting Width

Max. Weight

Max. Cutting Width

BX25

1840 mm (6 ft.)

262 kg (578Ibs) without Bucket

210 kg (460 Ibs)

1220 mm (48 in.)

Necessary

1520 mm (60 in.)

115 kg (254 Ibs)

1070 mm (42 in.)

140 kg (300 Ibs)

1520 mm (60 in.)

140 kg (300 Ibs)

1070 mm (42 in.)

1220 mm (48 in.)

1070 mm (42 in.)

170 kg (375Ibs)

360 mm (14 in.) x 1

560 mm (22 in.) x 1

1220 mm (48 in.) 1 Row

1370 mm (54 in.)

140 kg (300 Ibs)

150 L (40 U.S.gals, 33 Imp.gals)

1520 mm (60 in.)

Necessary

1520 mm (60 in.)

160 kg (350 Ibs)

1070 mm (42 in.)

1220 mm (48 in.)

170 kg (375 Ibs)

1270 mm (50 in.)

Max. Weight

Max. Working Width

Snow Blower (Front) Max. Weight 160 kg (350 Ibs)

Post Hole Digger

Sub Frame

Digging Depth

Necessary

1140 mm (45 in.)

Rotary Broom

I

Trailer

Cleaning Width

Max. Load Capacity

* KUBOTA provides BT601 Backhoe for BX25.

No other Backhoe installed by 3-points hitch is permitted for BX25.

** KUBOTA provides LA240 Front-end Loader for BX25 .

1190 mm (47 in.)

800 kg (1765 Ibs)

• NOTE

• Backhoe cannot be attached.

• Implement size may very depending on soil operating conditions.

• Reduce speed and trailer loads when operating in slippery conditions or when operating on slopes and utilize front wheel drive.

W1012736

G-48

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. LUBRICATING SYSTEM .............................................................................. 1-M1

2. COOLING SySTEM ...................................................................................... 1-M2

3. FUEL SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 1-M3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. LUBRICATING SYSTEM

(4)

(1 ) (2) (3)

ENGINE

(10)

(11 )

(12)

(1) Rocker Arm

(2) Oil Pressure Switch

(3) Rocker Arm Shaft

(4) Valve

(5) Idle Gear

(6) Crankshaft

(7) Oil Pump

(8) Oil Strainer

(9) Relief Valve

(10) Push Rod

(11) Tappet

(12) Camshaft

(13) Piston

(14) Connecting Rod

(15) Oil Filter Cartridge

W1014160

(5)

(6)

-----I~~I

(7)

(8)

3TAAAAE1 P002A

This engine's lubricating system consists of oil strainer (8), oil pump (7), relief valve (9), oil filter cartridge (15) and oil pressure switch (2).

The oil pump sucks lubricating oil from the oil pan through the oil strainer and the oil flows down to the filter cartridge, where it is further filtered. Then the oil is forced to crankshaft (6), connecting rods (14), idle gear (5), camshaft (12) and rocker arm shaft (3) to lubricate each part.

Some part of oil, splashed by the crankshaft or leaking and dropping from gaps of each part, lubricates these parts: piston (13), cylinders, small ends or connecting rods, tappets (11), push rods (10), inlet and exhaust valves (4) and timing gears.

1-M1

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2. COOLING SYSTEM

(1 )

(2)

(3)

(1) Radiator

(2) Water Pump

(3) Cooling Fan

(4) Thermostat

(5) Cylinder Head

(6) Cylinder Head

ENGINE

3TAAAAE1 P003A

The cooling system consists of a radiator (1). a centrifugal water pump (2). a cooling fan (3) and a thermostat (4).

The coolant is cooled through the radiator core. and the cooling fan (3) set behind the radiator (1) pulls cooling air through the radiator core to improve cooling.

The water pump receives water from the radiator or from the cylinder head and force it into the cylinder block.

The thermostat opens or closes according to the water temperature. When the water temperature is high, the thermostat opens to allow the water to flow from the cylinder head to the radiator. When the water temperature is low, the thermostat close to flow the water only to the water pump.

1-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

3. FUEL SYSTEM

(1 )

ENGINE

(1) Injection Nozzle

(2) Fuel Overflow Pipe

(3) Fuel Tank

(4) Fuel Filter

(5) Fuel Feed Pump

(6) Fuel Filter

(7) Injection Pump

(8) Injection Pipe

(8)

(7)

(6)

(3)

(5) (4)

3TAAAAF1 P013A

Fuel from the fuel tank (3) passes through the fuel filter (4), and then enters the injection pump (7) after impurities such as dirt, water, etc. are removed.

The fuel pressurized by the injection pump to the opening pressure (13.7 to 14.7 MPa, 140 to 150 kgf/cm

2,

1990 to 2133 psi), of the injection nozzle (1) is injected into the combustion chamber.

Part of the fuel fed to the injection nozzle (1) lubricates the moving parts of the needle valve inside the nozzle, then returns to the fuel tank through the fuel overflow pipe (2) from the upper part of the nozzle holder.

1-M3

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................... 1-S1

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 1-S4

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................................ 1-S10

4. CHECKING. DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING .................................... 1-S11

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ............................................................. 1-S11

(1) Engine Body ...................................................................................... 1-S11

(2) Lubricating System ........................................................................... 1-S 14

(3) Cooling System ................................................................................. 1-S 15

(4) Fuel System ...................................................................................... 1-S17

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLlNG ................................................ 1-S22

(1) Separating Engine ............................................................................ 1-S22

(2) Removing Outer Parts ...................................................................... 1-S25

(3) Cylinder Head and Valves ................................................................ 1-S25

(4) Gear Case and Timing Gears ........................................................... 1-S30

(5) Piston and Connecting Rod .............................................................. 1-S35

(6) Flywheel and Crankshaft .................................................................. 1-S38

(7) Injection Nozzle ................................................................................. 1-S41

[3] SERViCiNG ............................................................................................ 1-S42

(1) Cylinder Head and Valves ................................................................ 1-S42

(2) Timing Gears .................................................................................... 1-S47

(3) Piston and Connecting Rod .............................................................. 1-S50

(4) Crankshaft ......................................................................................... 1-S52

(5) Cylinder ............................................................................................. 1-S58

(6) Oil Pump ........................................................................................... 1-S58

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

ENGINE

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom

Engine Does Not

Start

Probable Cause Solution

No fuel

Air in the fuel system

Water in the fuel system

Fuel pipe clogged

Fuel filter clogged

Excessively high viscosity of fuel or engine oil at low temperature

Fuel with low cetane number

Fuel leak due to loose injection pipe retaining nut

Incorrect injection timing

Fuel camshaft worn

Injection nozzle clogged

Injection pump malfunctioning

Seizure of crankshaft, camshaft, piston, cylinder or bearing

Compression leak from cylinder

Improper valve timing

Piston ring and cylinder worn

Replenish fuel

Bleed

Change fuel and repair or replace fuel system

Clean

Change

Use specified fuel or engine oil

Use specified fuel

Tighten retaining nut

Adjust

Replace

Clean or replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Replace head gasket, tighten cylinder head screw, glow plug and nozzle holder

Correct or replace timing gear

Replace

Reference I

Page

G-7

G-30

-

G-25

G-25

G-7

G-7

1-S25

1-S17

1-S35

1-S26

1-S30

1-S34

1-S26, S27

1-S34

Starter Does Not Run

Engine Revolution Is

Not Smooth

Excessive valve clearance

Battery discharged

Starter malfunctioning

Main switch malfunctioning

Adjust

Charge

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Adjust or replace Safety switches malfunctioning

Wiring disconnected

Fuel filter clogged or dirty

Connect

Replace

Air cleaner clogged Clean or replace

Fuel leak due to loose injection pipe retaining nut Tighten retaining nut

Injection pump malfunctioning Replace

Incorrect nozzle injection pressure Adjust

Injection nozzle stuck or clogged

Governor malfunctioning

Repair or replace

Repair

1-S35 to

S37

1-S13

G-17

6-S27

6-S9

6-S8, S9

G-19

G-18

1-S26

1-S30

1-S20

1-S26

1-S30

W1014322

1-S1

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

Symptom Probable Cause

Either White or Blue Excessive engine oil

Exhaust Gas Is

Observed

Piston ring and cylinder worn or stuck

Incorrect injection timing

Deficient compression

Either Black or Dark Overload

Gray Exhaust Gas Is

Observed

Low grade fuel used

Fuel filter clogged

Air cleaner clogged

Deficient nozzle injection

Deficient Output Incorrect injection timing

Engine's moving parts seem to be seizing

Uneven fuel injection

Deficient nozzle injection

Compression leak

Excessive Lubricant Piston ring's gap facing the same direction

Oil Consumption

Oil ring worn or stuck

Piston ring groove worn

Valve stem and valve guide wom

Oil leaking due to defective seals or packing

Fuel Mixed into

Lubricant Oil

Injection pump's plunger worn

Deficient nozzle injection

Water Mixed into

Lubricant Oil

Injection pump broken

Head gasket defective

Cylinder block or cylinder head flawed

ENGINE

Solution

Reference

Page

G-12 Reduce to specified level

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

1-837

Adjust

Check

Reduce the load

Use specified fuel

Replace

Clean or replace

Repair or replace nozzle

Adjust

Repair or replace replace injection pump

Repair or replace nozzle

Replace head gasket, tighten cylinder head screws, glow plug and nozzle holder

5hift ring gap direction

Replace

Replace piston

Replace

1-834

1-811

-

G-7

G-25

I

G-18

1-826

1-834

-

1-530

1-526

1-526,527

1-536

1-536,552

1-536,552

1-543

Replace epair or replace

Repair or replace nozzle

1-831

1-526

1-531

1-527

1-542

W1014322

1-52

BX25, RCK54(P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Symptom

Low Oil Pressure

High Oil Pressure

Engine Overheated

Probable Cause

Engine oil insufficient

Oil strainer clogged

Oil filter clogged

Relief valve stuck with dirt

Relief valve spring weaken or broken

Excessive oil clearance of crankshaft bearing

Solution

Replenish

Clean

Replace

Clean

Replace

Replace

Reference

Page

G-?

1-S29

G-12

Excessive oil clearance of crankpin bearing

Excessive oil clearance of rocker arm

Oil passage clogged

Different type of oil

Oil pump defective

Different type of oil

Relief valve defective

Engine oil insufficient

Fan belt broken or tensioned improperly

Coolant insufficient

Radiator net and radiator fin clogged with dust

Inside of radiator corroded

Coolant flow route corroded

Radiator cap defective

Radiator hose damaged

Overload running

Head gasket defective

Incorrect injection timing

Unsuitable fuel used

Replace

Replace

Clean

Use specified type of oil

Repair or replace

Use specified type of oil

Replace

Replenish

Replace or adjust

Replenish

Clean

Clean or replace

Clean or replace

Replace

Replace

Reduce the load

Replace

Adjust

Use specified fuel

1-S14

1-S55 to

S58

1-S53

G-?

1-S35

G-?

1-S14

1-S22

G-20

G-?

-

-

G-2?

1-S15

G-22

-

1-S2?

1-S1?

G-?

W1014322

1-S3

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE BODY

Item

Compression Pressure

Factory Specification

3.53 to 4.02 MPa

36.0 to 41.0 kgf/cm

2

512 to 583 psi

Difference among Cylinders

Top Clearance

Valve Clearance (Cold)

0.50 to 0.70 mm

0.0197 to 0.0276 in.

0.145 to 0.185 mm

0.00571 to 0.00728 in.

Cylinder Head Surface Flatness

-

ENGINE

Allowable Limit

2.55 MPa

26.0 kgf/cm

2

370 psi

10 % or less

Valve Recessing

Valve Stem to Valve Guide

Valve Stem

Valve Guide

Valve Seat

Intake and Exhaust

Clearance

0.0.

-0.10 to 0.10 mm

-0.0039 to 0.0039 in.

0.030 to 0.057 mm

0.00118 to 0.00224 in.

5.968 to 5.980 mm

0.23496 to 0.23543 in.

1.0.

Width

6.010 to 6.025 mm

0.23661 to 0.23720 in.

2.12 mm

0.0835 in.

Angle 0.785 rad

45 0

0.05 mm

0.0020 in.

0.30 mm

0.0118 in.

0.10 mm

0.0039 in.

-

-

-

Valve Face

Valve Spring

Angle

Free Length

Tilt

Setting Load

0.785 rad

45 0

31.3 to 31.8 mm

1.232 to 1.252 in.

-

64.7 N 127.0 mm

6.6 kgf 127.0 mm

14.6 Ibs 11.063 in.

28.4 mm

1.118 in.

1.2mm

0.047 in.

54.9 N I 27.0 mm

5.6 kgf 127.0 mm

12.31bs 11.063 in.

W10138740

1-S4

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

ENGINE BODY (Continued)

Item

Rocker Arm Shaft to Rocker Arm Clearance

Rocker Arm Shaft

Rocker Arm

Push Rod

Tappet to Tappet Guide

Tappet

Tappet Guide

Timing Gear

Crank Gear to Idle Gear

Idle Gear to Cam Gear

1.0.

Alignment

Oil Clearance

Idle Gear to Injection Pump Gear Backlash

Alignment

Cam Height

Camshaft Journal to Cylinder Block Bore

Intake and

Exhaust

Oil Clearance

Camshaft Journal

Cylinder Block Bore

0.0.

0.0.

1.0.

Backlash

Backlash

Crank Gear to Oil Pump Drive Gear Backlash

Idle Gear

Camshaft

Side Clearance

Side Clearance

0.0.

1.0.

ENGINE

Factory Specification

0.016 to 0.045 mm

0.00063 to 0.00177 in.

10.473 to 10.484 mm

0.41232 to 0.41276 in.

10.500 to 10.518 mm

0.41339 to 0.41410 in.

-

0.016 to 0.052 mm

0.00063 to 0.00205 in.

17.966 to 17.984 mm

0.70732 to 0.70803 in.

18.000 to 18.018 mm

0.70866 to 0.70937 in.

Allowable Limit

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

-

-

0.25 mm

0.0098 in.

0.10 mm

0.0039 in.

-

0.043 to 0.124 mm

0.00169 to 0.00488 in.

0.047 to 0.123 mm

0.00185 to 0.00484 in.

0.046 to 0.124 mm

0.00181 to 0.00488 in.

0.041 to 0.123 mm

0.00161 to 0.00484 in.

0.20 to 0.51 mm

0.0079 to 0.0201 in.

0.15toO.31 mm

0.0059 to 0.0122 in.

26.88 mm

1.0583 in.

0.050 to 0.091 mm

0.00197 to 0.00358 in.

32.934 to 32.950 mm

1.29661 to 1.29724 in.

33.000 to 33.025 mm

1.29921 to 1.30020 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

0.80 mm

0.0315 in.

0.50 mm

0.0197 in.

0.01 mm

0.0004 in.

26.83 mm

1.0563 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

-

W1013874

1-S5

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM

ENGINE BODY (Continued)

Item

Idle Gear Shaft to Idle Gear Bushing Oil Clearance

Idle Gear Shaft

Idle Gear Bushing

Piston Pin Bore

Piston Pin to Small End Bushing

Piston Pin

Small End Bushing

Piston Pin to Small End Bushing

(Spare Parts)

Small End Bushing

Connecting Rod

Piston Ring Gap

Piston Ring to Piston Ring Groove

Second Ring

Oil Ring

Crankshaft

Crankshaft

0.0.

1.0.

1.0.

Clearance

0.0.

1.0.

Oil Clearance

1.0.

Alignment

Top Ring

Second Ring

Oil Ring

Clearance

Clearance

Side Clearance

Alignment

ENGINE

Factory Specification

0.020 to 0.084 mm

0.00079 to 0.00331 in.

19.967 to 19.980 mm

0.78610 to 0.78661 in.

20.000 to 20.051 mm

0.78740 to 0.78941 in.

20.000 to 20.013 mm

0.78740 to 0.78791 in.

0.014 to 0.038 mm

0.00055 to 0.00150 in.

20.002 to 20.011 mm

0.78748 to 0.78783 in.

20.025 to 20.040 mm

0.78839 to 0.78897 in.

0.015 to 0.075 mm

0.00059 to 0.00295 in.

20.026 to 20.077 mm

0.78843 to 0.79043 in.

Allowable Limit

0.10 mm

0.0039 in.

-

20.05 mm

0.7894 in.

0.10 mm

0.0039 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

-

-

0.20 to 0.35 mm

0.0079 to 0.0138 in.

0.35 to 0.50 mm

0.0138 to 0.0197 in.

0.20 to 0.35 mm

0.0079 to 0.0138 in.

0.05mm

0.0020 in.

1.25 mm

0.0492 in.

1.25 mm

0.0492 in.

1.25 mm

0.0492 in.

0.090 to 0.120 mm

0.00354 to 0.00472 in.

0.04 to 0.08 mm

0.0016 to 0.0031 in.

0.15 to 0.31 mm

0.0059 to 0.0122 in.

-

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

0.15mm

0.0059 in.

0.50 mm

0.0197 in.

0.02 mm

0.0008 in.

W10138740

I

1-S6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK608-23BX, LA240, 8T601, WSM

ENGINE BODY (Continued)

Crankpin to Crankpin Bearing

Item

Oil Clearance

Crankpin 0.0.

Crankpin Bearing 1.0.

Crankshaft Journal to Crankshaft Bearing

1

Crankshaft Journal

Oil Clearance

0.0.

Crankshaft Bearing 1 1.0.

Crankshaft Bearing

Dimension

Crankshaft Joumal to Crankshaft Bearing

2 (Flywheel Side)

Crankshaft Journal

Clearance

Oil Clearance

0.0.

Crankshaft Bearing 2 1.0.

Crankshaft Journal to Crankshaft Bearing

3 (Intermediate)

Crankshaft Journal

Oil Clearance

0.0.

Crankshaft Bearing 3

Cylinder Liner

I

~:~~er

Liner

[Oversize: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.)]

1.0.

1.0.

1.0.

ENGINE

Factory Specification

0.020 to 0.051 mm

0.00079 to 0.00201 in.

33.959 to 33.975 mm

1.33697 to 1.33760 in.

33.995 to 34.010 mm

1.33839 to 1.33898 in.

0.034 to 0.106 mm

0.00134 to 0.00417 in.

43.934 to 43.950 mm

1.72968 to 1.73031 in.

43.984 to 44.040 mm

1.73165 to 1.73386 in.

0.0 to 0.3 mm

0.0 to 0.0118 in.

0.028 to 0.059 mm

0.00110 to 0.00232 in.

43.934 to 43.950 mm

1.72968 to 1.73031 in.

43.978 to 43.993 mm

1.73142 to 1.73201 in.

0.028 to 0.059 mm

0.00110 to 0.00232 in.

43.934 to 43.950 mm

1.72968 to 1.73031 in.

43.978 to 43.993 mm

1.73142 to 1.73201 in.

72.000 to 72.019 mm

2.83464 to 2.83539 in.

72.250 to 72.269 mm

2.84449 to 2.84524 in.

Allowable Limit

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

-

-

0.20 mm

0.0079 in.

-

-

0.20 mm

0.0079 in.

-

0.20 mm

0.0079 in.

-

72.150 mm

2.84055 in.

72.400 mm

2.85040 in.

W10138740

1-S7

BX25. RCK54{P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT60i. WSM

LUBRICATING SYSTEM

Engine Oil Pressure At Idle Speed

Relief Valve Spring

Inner Rotor to Outer Rotor

Outer Rotor to Pump Body

Inner Rotor to Cover

COOLING SYSTEM

Fan Belt

Radiator Cap

Radiator

Thermostat

Item

At Rated Speed

Free Length

Clearance

Clearance

Clearance

Tension

Pressure Falling

Time

Water Leakage

Test Pressure

Valve Opening

Temperature

(At Beginning)

Valve Opening

Temperature

(Opened

Completely)

85°C

185 OF

ENGINE

More than 49 kPa

0.5 kgf/cm

2

7 psi

196 to 441 kPa

2.0 to 4.5 kgf/cm

2

28 to 64 psi

32mm

1.26 in.

0.03 to 0.14 mm

0.0012 to 0.0055 in.

0.07 to 0.15 mm

0.0028 to 0.0059 in.

0.075 to 0.135 mm

0.00295 to 0.00531 in.

147 kPa

1.5 kgf/cm

2

21 psi

28mm

1.10 in.

-

-

Wi0139730

Factory Specification

7.0 to 9.0 mm 198 N

0.28 to 0.35 in. 198 N

(10 kgf. 221bs)

10 seconds or more

88 ~ 59 kPa

0.9

~

0.6 kgf/cm

2

13 ~ 9 psi

No leak at specified pressure

157 kPa

1.6 kgf/cm

2

23 psi

69.5 to 72.5 °C

157.1 to 162.5 OF

Allowable Limit

-

-

-

-

W10135990

1-S8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601. WSM

FUEL SYSTEM

Item

Injection Pump

Pump Element

Delivery Valve

Injection Nozzle

Injection Nozzle Valve Seat

ENGINE

Injection Timing

Fuel Tightness

Fuel Tightness

Injection Pressure

Valve Seat

Tightness

Factory Specification

-

-

10 seconds

13.7 ~ 12.8 MPa

140

~

130 kgf/cm

2

1991 ~ 1849 psi

13.7 to 14.7 MPa

140 to 150 kgf/cm

2

1991 to 2134 psi

When the pressure is

12.8 MPa

(130 kgf/cm

2 ,

1849 psi), the valve seat must be fuel tightness.

Allowable Limit

0.30 to 0.33 rad

(17 to 19°) before T.D.C.

13.7 MPa

140 kgf/cm2

1991 psi

5 seconds

13.7 ~ 12.8 MPa

140

~

130 kgf/cm

2

1991 ~ 1849 psi

-

W10139730

1-S9

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601. WSM ENGINE

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES

Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.

(Tractor section for general use screws, bolts and nuts: See page G-8.)

Tractor Section

Item

Front coupling mounting bolt

Engine mounting nut

Cushion mounting nut

N'm

23.6 to 27.4

23.6 to 27.4

23.6 to 27.4 kgf·m

2.4 to 2.8

2.4 to 2.8

2.4 to 2.8 ft-Ibs

17.4 to 20.2

17.4 to 20.2

17.4 to 20.2

W1012736

Engine Section

Item

*Cylinder head screw

Oil pressure switch

Engine oil filter joint

Nozzle holder

Overflow pipe retaining nut

Nozzle holder assembly

*Cylinder head cover screw

Injection pipe retaining nut

Glow plug

*Rocker arm bracket nut

*Fan drive pulley screw

*Idle gear shaft mounting screw

*Connecting rod screw

*Flywheel screw

Bearing case cover mounting screw

*Main bearing case screw 2

*Main bearing case screw 1

I

Size x Pitch

M8 x 1.25

PT 1/8

-

-

M12x1.5

M20 x 1.5

M6 x 1

M12 x 1.5

M8 x 1

M6 x 1

M12x1.5

M6 x 1

M7 x 0.75

M10 x 1.25

M6 x 1

M7 x 1

M6 x 1

N'm

37.3 to 42.2

14.7 to 19.6

39.2 to 49.0

34.3 to 39.2

19.6 to 24.5

49.0 to 68.6

6.86 to 11.3

24.5 to 34.3

7.8 to 14.7

9.8 to 11.3

117.7 to 127.5

9.8 to 11.3

26.5 to 30.4

53.9 to 58.8

9.8 to 11.3

26.5 to 30.4

12.7 to 15.7 kgf'm

3.8 to 4.3

1.5 to 2.0

4.0 to 5.0

3.5 to 4.0

2.0 to 2.5

5.0 to 7.0

0.7 to 1.15

2.5 to 3.5

0.8t01.5

1.00 to 1.15

12.0 to 13.0

1.00to 1.15

2.7 to 3.1

5.5 to 6.0

1.00 to 1.15

2.7 to 3.1

1.3 to 1.6 ft-Ibs

27.5 to 31.1

10.8 to 14.5 ....

29.0 to 36.3

25.3 to 28.9

14.5t018.1

36.2 to 50.6

5.1 to 8.3

18.1 to 25.3

5.8 to 10.8

7.2 to 8.3

86.8 to 94.0

7.2 to 8.3

19.5 to 22.4

39.8 to 43.4

7.2 to 8.3

19.5 to 22.4

9.4 to 11.6

• NOTE

• In removing and applying the bolts and nuts marked with ".", a pneumatic wrench or similar pneumatic tool, if employed, must be used with enough care not to get them seized.

• For· marked screws, bolts and nuts on the table, apply engine oil to their threads and seats before tightening.

• The letter "M" in Size x Pitch means that the screw, bolt or nut dimension stands for metric. The size is the nominal outside diameter in mm of the threads. The pitch is the nominal distance in mm between two threads.

W1013236

1-S10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

(1) Engine Body

Compression Pressure (by Glow Plug Hole Adaptor Setting)

1. Run the engine until it is warmed up.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Remove the air cleaner, the muffler, the breather tube, the head cover and all glow plugs.

4. Set a compression tester (Code No. 07909~30208) with the adaptor (Adaptor L, code No. 07909~31301) to the glow plug hole.

5. After making sure that the stop lever is set at the stop position

(non~injection), run the engine with the starter and measure the compression pressure.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each cylinder.

7. If the measurement is below the allowable limit, apply a small amount of oil to the cylinder wall through the glow plug hole (or nozzle hole) and measure the compression pressure again.

8. If the compression pressure is still less than the allowable limit, check the top clearance, valve clearance and cylinder head.

9. If the compression pressure increases after applying oil, check the cylinder wall and piston rings .

• NOTE

• Check the compression pressure with the specified valve clearance.

• Always use a fully charged battery for performing this test.

• Variances in cylinder compression values should be under

10%.

Compression pressure

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

3.53 to 4.02 MPa

36 to 41 kgftcm

2

512 to 583 psi

2.55 MPa

26 kgftcm

2

370 psi

W10178940

1~S11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TMABAB1 P023B

3EEABAB1P057A

(1 )

ENGINE

Top Clearance

1. Remove the cylinder head. (Do not attempt to remove the cylinder head gasket.)

2. Move the piston up and stick a strip of fuse [1.5 mm dia. (0.059 in. dia.), 5 to 7 mm long (0.197 to 0.276 in. long)] on the piston head at three positions with grease so as to avoid the intake and exhaust valves and the combustion chamber ports.

3. Lower the piston, and install the cylinder head and tighten the cylinder head screws to the specified torque.

4. Turn the flywheel until the piston exceeds top dead center.

5. Remove the cylinder head, and measure the thickness of the squeezed fuses.

6. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, check the oil clearance between the crankpin and crankpin bearing and between the piston pin and small end bushing .

• NOTE

• After checking the top clearance, be sure to assemble the cylinder head with a new cylinder head gasket.

Top clearance

I

Factory spec.

0.50 to 0.70 mm

0.0197 to 0.0276 in.

1ightening torque Cylinder head screws

37.3 to 42.2 N'm

3.8 to 4.3 kgf·m

27.5 to 31.1 ft-Ibs

(1) Fuse

W1020190

1-S12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Checking Valve Clearance

• IMPORTANT

• Valve clearance must be checked and adjusted when engine is cold.

1. Remove the cylinder head cover and the glow plugs.

2. Align the "1TC" mark (1) on the flywheel and alignment mark (2) on the rear end plate so that the No. 1 piston comes to the compression top dead center.

3. Check the following valve clearance marked with "*~ using a feeler gauge.

4. If the clearance is not within the factory specifications, adjust with the adjusting screw.

5. Then tum the flywheel 6.28 rad (360 0), and align the "1TC" mark

(1) on the flywheel and alignment mark (3) on the rear end plate so that the No.1 piston comes to the overlap position.

6. Check the following valve clearance marked with ",,:,," using a feeler gauge.

7. If the clearance is not within the factory specifications, adjust with the adjusting screw.

EX IN

3TAAAAB1 P037A

EX IN EX IN

-+A

Intake valve Exhaust valve location of piston

No.1

No.2

*

-!~,

* :

No.3 *

When No.1 piston is at the compression top dead center position.

: When No. 1 piston is at the overlap position.

*

*

~J,~

H

Intake and exhaust valve clearance (cold)

Factory spec.

0.145 to 0.185 mm

0.00571 to 0.00728 in.

• NOTE

• The sequence of cylinder numbers is given as No.1, No.2 and No.3 starting from the gear case side.

• After adjusting the valve clearance, secure the adjusting screw with the lock nut.

(1) "1TC" Mark

(2) Alignment Mark

A : Gear Case Side

W10172470

1-S13

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Lubricating System

ENGINE

Engine Oil Pressure

1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and set an oil pressure tester. (Code No. : 07916-32032.)

2. Start the engine. After warming up, measure the oil pressure of both idling and rated speeds.

3. If the oil pressure is less than the allowable limit, check the following.

• Engine oil insufficient

• Oil pump defective

• Oil strainer clogged

• Oil filter cartridge clogged

• Oil gallery clogged

• Excessive oil clearance

• Foreign matter in the relief valve

Engine oil pressure

At idle speed

At rated speed

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

More than 49 kPa

0.5 kgf/cm

2

7 psi

196 to 441 kPa

2.0 to 4.5 kgf/cm

2

28 to 64 psi

147 kPa

1.5 kgf/cm

2

21 psi

(When reassembling)

• After checking the engine oil pressure, tighten the engine oil pressure switch to the specified torque.

Tightening torque Oil pressure switch

14.7 to 19.6 N'm

1.5 to 2.0 kgf·m

10.8 to 14.5 ft-Ibs

W10349520

Relief Valve

1. Remove the oil filter base

2. Check the relief valve for dirt, and the seat and ball for damage.

3. If damaged, replace.

4. Check the free length of spring.

5. If less than the allowable limit. replace.

Relief valve spring

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

32mm

1.26 in.

28mm

1.10 in.

Tightening torque Joint

39.2 to 49.0 N'm

4.0 to 5.0 kgf'm

29.0 to 36.3 ft-Ibs

(1) Relief Valve

(2) Joint

(3) Spring

W10756890

3TAAAAF1P014A

1-S14

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3) Cooling System

(A)

ENGINE

Fan Belt Tension

1. Measure the deflection (A), depressing the belt halfway between the fan drive pulley and alternator pulley at specified force 98 N

(10 kgf, 22Ibs).

2. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, loosen the alternator mounting screws and relocate the alternator to adjust.

Deflection (A) Factory spec.

7.0 to 9.0 mm

0.28 to 0.35 in.

(A) Deflection

W10356670

Fan Belt Damage and Wear

1. Check the fan belt for damage.

2. If the fan belt is damaged, replace it.

3. Check if the fan belt is worn and sunk in the pulley groove.

4. If the fan belt is nearly worn out and deeply sunk in the pulley groove, replace it.

(A) Good (B) Bad

W1016443

(B)

3EEABAB1P019B

_ifl

(A) (8)

3EEABAB 1 PO 18A

A

CAUTION

• When removing the radiator cap, wait at least ten minutes after the engine has stopped and cooled down.

Otherwise, hot water may gush out, scalding nearby people.

Radiator Cap Air Leakage

1. Set a radiator tester (1) and an adaptor (2) on the radiator cap.

2. Apply the specified pressure (88 kPa, 0.9 kgf/cm

2

,

13 psi), and measure the time for the pressure to fall to 59 kPa (0.6 kgf/cm

2

,

9 psi).

3. If the measurement is less than the factory specification, replace the radiator cap.

3TAAAAB1 P060A

Pressure falling time Factory spec.

More than 10 seconds for pressure fall from

88 to 59 kPa

(from 0.9 to 0.6 kgf/cm

2

, from 13 to 9 psi)

(2) Adaptor ( 1) Radiator Tester

W1054156

1-S15

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3EEABAB1P160A

~

..

~

ENGINE

Radiator Water Leakage

1. Pour a specified amount of water into the radiator.

2. Set a radiator tester (1) and an adapter (2) and raise the water pressure to the specified pressure.

3. Check the radiator for water leaks.

4. For water leak from the pinhole, repair with the radiator cement.

When water leak is excessive, replace the radiator.

Radiator water leakage test pressure

Factory spec.

157 kPa

1.6 kgf/cmL

23 psi

(1) Adaptor (2) Radiator Tester

W1016903

Thermostat Valve Opening Temperature

1. Suspend the thermostat in the water by a string with its end inserted between the valve and seat.

2. Heating the water gradually, read the temperature when the valve opens and leaves the string.

3. Continue heating and read the temperature when the valve opens approx. 8 mm (0.315 in.).

4. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, replace the thermostat.

Thermostat's valve opening temperature

Temperature at which thermostat completely opens

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

69.5 to 72.5 °C

157.1 to 162.5 of

85°C

185 of

W1035849

1-S16

BX25, RCK54(P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(4) Fuel System

3EEABAB1 P167G

(4)

ENGINE

Injection Timing

1. Remove the injection pipes.

2. Remove the engine stop solenoid.

3. Turn the flywheel counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel side) until the fuel fills up to the hole of the delivery valve holder (3) for

No. 1 cylinder.

4. After the fuel fills up to the hole of the delivery valve holder for No.

1 cylinder, turn back (clockwise) the flywheel around 1.57 rad

(90 0).

5. Turn the flywheel counterclockwise to set at around 0.44 rad

(25 0) before T.O.C ..

6. Slowly turn the flywheel counterclockwise and stop turning when the fuel begins to come up, to get the present injection timing.

7. Check to see the degree on flywheel.

The flywheel has mark "1TC", "10" and "20" for the crank angle before the top dead center of No. 1 cylinder.

8. Check to see if the timing angle on the flywheel is aligned with the alignment mark (2).

9. If injection timing is out of adjustment, readjust the timing with shims.

Injection timing Factory spec.

0.30 to 0.33 rad (17 to

19°) before T.D.C.

(1) Timing Line

(2) Alignment Mark

(3) Delivery Valve Holder

(4) Shim (Soft Metal Gasket Shim)

(5) Two-holes: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)

(6) One-hole: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.)

(7) Without hole: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in.)

W1018724

3TAAAAB1 P062B

1-S17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Injection Timing (Continued)

• NOTE

• The sealant is applied to both sides of the shims (soft metal gasket shim). The liquid gasket is not required for assembling.

• Shims are available in thickness of 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.), 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) and 0.30 mm (0.0118 in.). Combine these shims for adjustments.

• Addition or reduction of shim (0.05 mm, 0.0020 in.) delays or advances the injection timing by approx. 0.0087 rad (0.5°).

• In disassembling and replacing the injection pump, be sure to use the same number of new shims with the same thickness.

• Refer to figure of the shim to check the thickness of the shims.

W1018986

1-S18

BX25, RCK54(Pj-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Fuel Tightness of Pump Element

1. Remove the engine stop solenoid.

2. Remove the injection pipes and glow plugs.

3. Install the injection pump pressure tester to the injection pump.

4. Install the injection nozzle (1) jetted with the proper injection pressure to the injection pump pressure tester (2). (Refer to the photo.)

5. Set the speed control lever to the maximum speed position.

6. Run the starter to increase the pressure.

7. If the pressure can not reach the allowable limit, replace the pump with new one or repair with a Kubota-authorized pump service shop.

Fuel tightness of pump element

Allowable limit

13.7 MPa

140 kgf/cm

2

1991 psi

• NOTE

• Never try to disassemble the injection pump assembly. For repairs, you are strongly requested to contact a Kubota­ authorized pump service shop.

(1) Injection Nozzle

(2) Injection Pump Pressure Tester

(3) Protection Cover for Jetted Fuel

W1017430

Fuel Tightness of Delivery Valve

1. Remove the engine stop solenoid.

2. Remove the injection pipes and glow plugs.

3. Set a pressure tester to the fuel injection pump.

4. Install the injection nozzle (1) jetted with the proper injection pressure to the injection pump pressure tester (2).

5. Run the starter to increase the pressure.

6. Stop the starter when the fuel jets from the injection nozzle. After that, tum the flywheel by hands and raise the pressure to approx.

13.7 MPa (140 kgf/cm 2 • 1991 psi).

7. Now tum the flywheel back about half a tum (to keep the plunger free). Maintain the flywheel at this position and clock the time taken for the pressure to drop from 13.7 to 12.8 MPa (from 140 to 130 kgf/cm

2

, from 1991 to 1849 psi).

8. Measure the time needed to decrease the pressure from 13.7 to

12.8 MPa (140 to 130 kgf/cm

2,

1991 to 1849 psi).

9. If the measurement is less than allowable limit, replace the pump with new one or repair with a Kubota-authorized pump service shop.

Fuel tightness of delivery valve

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

10 seconds

13.7 -> 12.8 MPa

140 -> 130 kgf/cm

2

1991 -> 1849 psi

5 seconds

13.7 -> 12.8 MPa

140 -> 130 kgf/cm

2

1991 -> 1849 psi

• NOTE

• Never try to disassemble the injection pump assembly. For repairs, you are strongly requested to contact a Kubota­ authorized pump service shop.

(1) Injection Nozzle

(2) Injection Pump Pressure Tester

(3) Protection Cover for Jetted Fuel

W1017786

1-S19

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

A

CAUTION

• Check the nozzle injection pressure and condition after confirming that there is nobody standing in the direction the fume goes.

• If the fume from the nozzle directly contacts the human body, cells may be destroyed and blood poisoning may be caused.

(a) (b)

Nozzle Spraying Condition

1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester, and check the nozzle spraying condition.

2. If the spraying condition is defective, replace the nozzle piece.

(a) Good (b) Bad

W10181310

3EEABAB 1 P037 A

3TLABAB1 P040A

(1 )

Fuel Injection Pressure

1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester.

2. Slowly move the tester handle to measure the pressure at which fuel begins jetting out from the nozzle.

3. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, replace the adjusting washer (1) in the nozzle holder to adjust it.

(Reference)

• Pressure variation with 0.025 mm (0.0010 in.) difference of adjusting washer thickness.

Approx. 588 kPa (6.0 kgf/cm

2 ,

85 psi)

Fuel injection pressure Factory spec.

13.7 to 14.7 MPa

140 to 150 kgf/cm2

1991 to 2134 psi

(1) Adjusting Washer

W10182100

3EEABAB1P171B

3TLABAB1 P041A

Valve Seat Tightness

1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester.

2. Raise the fuel pressure, and keep at 12.8 MPa (130 kgf/cm

2

,

1849 psi) for 10 seconds.

3. If any fuel leak is found, replace the nozzle piece.

Valve seat tightness Factory spec.

No fuel leak at

12.8 MPa

130 kgf/cm2

1849 psi

W10183690

1-S20

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1 )

3EEABAB1P171A

~(2)

1==:::

~(5)

(6)

(7)

ENGINE

Nozzle Holder

1. Secure the nozzle retaining nut (7) with a vise.

2. Remove the nozzle holder (1), and take out parts inside.

(When reassembling)

• Assemble the nozzle in clean fuel oil.

• Install the push rod (4). noting its direction.

• After assembling the nozzle, be sure to adjust the fuel injection pressure.

TIghtening torque

Nozzle holder

34.3 to 39.2 N'm

3.5 to 4.0 kgf'm

25.3 to 28.9 ft-Ibs

19.6 to 24.5 N'm

Overflow pipe retaining nut 2.0 to 2.5 kgf·m

14.5 to 18.1 ft-Ibs

Nozzle holder assembly

49.0 to 68.6 N'm

5.0 to 7.0 kgf·m

36.2 to 50.6 ft-Ibs

(1) Nozzle Holder

(2) Adjusting Washer

(3) Nozzle Spring

(4) Push Rod

(5) Distance Piece

(6) Nozzle Piece

(7) Nozzle Retaining Nut

W1018491

1-S21

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM ENGINE

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

• Before proceeding this section, disassembling the loader assembling and backhoe. (Refer to section 8 and 9.)

(1) Separating Engine

Draining Engine Oil

1. Start and warm up the engine for approx. 5 minutes.

2. Place an oil pan underneath the engine.

3. Remove the drain plug (1) to d rain oil.

4. After draining, screw in the drain plug (1).

(When refilling)

• Fill the engine oil up to the upper line on the dipstick (3) .

• IMPORTANT

• Never mix two different type of oil.

• Use the proper SAE Engine Oil according to ambient temperature.

Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT" (See page

G-7).

Engine oil Capacity

3.1 L

3.3 U.S.qts

2.7Imp.qts

(1) Drain Plug

(2) Oil Inlet

(3) Dipstick

(A) Oil level is acceptable within this range

W1023464

Battery Cables and Battery

A

CAUTION

• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. When connecting, connect the positive cable to the battery first.

1. Remove the under panel.

2. Disconnect the negative cable (2) from the battery (1).

3. Disconnect the positive cable (3) from the battery (1) and remove the battery (1).

(1) Battery

(2) Negative cable

(3) Positive Cable

W1045893

1-822

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Bonnet and Under Cover

1. Remove the front guard (1).

2. Open the bonnet (2), and then loosen the knob bolts and pull forward to remove the under cover (3).

3. Disconnect the connectors (4) for head light and remove the bonnet bracket (5) with bonnet.

(1) Front Guard

(2) Bonnet

(3) Under Cover

(4) Connector

(5) Bonnet Bracket

W1032046

Accelerator Wire, Bonnet Post, Fuel Hoses, Wiring Harness and

Others

1. Disconnect the wiring harness (3) from coolant temperature switch, stop solenoid, glow plug, starter motor, engine oil switch, alternator and ground cable.

2. Disconnect the accelerator wire (2).

3. Remove the bonnet post (1).

(1) Bonnet Post

(2) Accelerator Wire

(3) Wiring Harness

W1Q23496

1-S23

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Engine Assembly

1. Disconnect the ground cable.

2. Disconnect the front coupling (1).

3. Remove the engine mounting nuts (3).

4. Hook the engine and separate the engine assembly with the radiator from the frame.

(When reassembling) nghtening torque

Front coupling mounting bolt

Engine mounting nut

Cushion mounting nut

23.6 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.8 kgf-m

17.4 to 20.2 ft-Ibs

23.6 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m

17.4 to 20.2 ft-Ibs

23.6 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.7 kgf-m

17.4 to 20.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Front Coupling

(2) Front Coupling Mounting Bolt

(3) Engine Mounting Nut

W1049824

3TAAAAG1POO4A

1-S24

3TAMAF1P012A

(3)

(1 )

ENGINE BX25, RCK54(P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Removing Outer Parts

Draining Coolant, Radiator, Air Cleaner and Muffler etc.

A

CAUTION

• Never open the radiator cap while operating or immediately after stopping. Otherwise, hot water will spout out from the radiator. Wait for more than ten minutes to cool the radiator, before opening the cap

1. Set the engine stands (9) to the crankcase.

2. Open the radiator drain plug, and remove radiator cap to completely drain the coolant.

3. After all coolant is drained, close the drain plug.

4. Loosen the inlet hose band and the radiator hose bands, and remove the radiator (1) with the radiator hoses (2) and the air cleaner (3).

5. Loosen the fan belt. Remove the alternator (6), the starter motor

(8), the fan and the fan belt.

6. Remove the heat proof cover (7), the muffler (5) and the exhaust manifold.

Coolant Capacity

Radiator

Radiator tank

2.7 L

2.85 U.S.qts

2.38 Imp.qts

0.4 L

0.42 U.S.qts

0.35 Imp.qts

(1) Radiator

(2) Radiator Hose

(3) Air Cleaner

(4) Inlet Hose

(5) Muffler

(6) Alternator

(7) Heat Proof Cover

(8) Starter Motor

(9) Engine Stand

W1051348

(3) Cylinder Head and Valves

Cylinder Head Cover

1. Disconnect the breather hose (1).

2. Remove the cylinder head cover screws (2).

3. Remove the cylinder head cover (3).

(When reassembling)

• Check to see if the cylinder head cover gasket is not defective.

Tightening torque

6.86 to 11.3 N'm

Cylinder head cover screw 0.7 to 1.15 kgf'm

5.1 to 8.3 ft-Ibs

(1) Breather Hose

(2) Cylinder Head Cover Screws

(3) Cylinder Head Cover

W1028468

Injection Pipes

1. Loosen the screws to the pipe clamp (1).

2. Detach the injection pipes (2).

(When reassembling)

• Sent compressed air into the pipes to blowout dust. Then, reassemble the pipes in the reverse order.

Tightening torque

24.5 to 34.3 N'm

Injection pipe retaining nut 2.5 to 3.5 kgf-m

18.1 to 25.3 ft-Ibs

(1) Pipe Clamp (2) Injection Pipe

Wl028640

1-525

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAD1 P026A

-'--_-(1)

3EEABAB 1 P061 A

(2)

(3)

(4)

ENGINE

Nozzle Holder Assembly and Glow Plug

1. Remove the overflow pipe (1).

2. Remove the nozzle holder assemblies (2).

3. Remove the copper gasket (5) and heat seal (6).

4. Remove the lead (3) from the glow plugs (4).

5. Remove the glow plugs (4).

(When reassembling)

• Replace the copper gasket and heat seal with new one.

Tightening torque

19.6 to 24.5 N'm

Overflow pipe retaining nut 2.0 to 2.5 kgf'm

14.5 to 18.1 ft-Ibs

Nozzle holder assembly

49.0 to 68.6 N'm

5.0 to 7.0 kgf·m

36.2 to 50.6 ft-Ibs

Glow plug

7.8 to 14.7 N'm

0.8 to 1.5 kgf·m

5.8 to 10.8 ft-Ibs

(1) Overflow Pipe

(2) Nozzle Holder Assembly

(3) Lead

(4) Glow Plug

(5) Copper Gasket

(6) Heat Seal

W1024604

Nozzle Heat Seal Removal Procedure

• IMPORTANT

• Use a plus (phillips head) screw driver (1) that has a diameter which is bigger than the heat seal hole (Approx. 6 mm (1/4 in.)).

1. Drive screw driver (1) lightly into the heat seal hole.

2. Turn screw driver three or four times each way.

3. While turning the screw driver, slowly pull the heat seal (4) out together with the injection nozzle gasket (3).

4. If the heat seal drops, repeat the above procedure.

(When reassembling)

• Heat seal and injection nozzle gasket must be changed when the injection nozzle is removed for cleaning or for service.

(1) Plus Screw Driver

(2) Injection Nozzle

(3) Injection Nozzle Gasket

(4) Heat Seal

W1021255

1-S26

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM

(3)

(4)

ENGINE

Rocker Arm and Push Rod

1. Remove the rocker arm bracket screws (1).

2. Detach the rocker arm assembly (2).

3. Remove the push rods (3).

(When reassembling)

• When putting the push rods (3) onto the tappets (4), check to see if their ends are property engaged with the dimples .

• IMPORTANT

• After installing the rocker arm, be sure to adjust the valve clearance.

Tightening torque

9.8 to 11.3 N'm

Rocker arm bracket screw 1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m

7.2 to 8,3 ft-Ibs

(1) Rocker Arm Bracket Screws

(2) Rocker Arm Assembly

(3) Push Rod

(4) Tappet

W1021437

3EEABAB1 P062B

O(n)

00>

O(f}

O(b) o

(c)

O(g)

0 k)

00 00 00

A

am)?

e 0 Q(d)O

Oft)

- UO(I} UO(a)UO(h)

Cylinder Head

1. Loosen the pipe clamps (1), and remove the water return pipe

(2).

2. Remove the cylinder head screw in the order of (n) to (a).

3. Lift up the cylinder head to detach.

4. Remove the cylinder head gasket and O-ring (3).

(When reassembling)

• Replace the cylinder head gasket with a new one.

• Securely fit the O-ring (3) to the pipe pin.

• Tighten the cylinder head screws after applying sufficient oil.

• Tighten the cylinder head screws in order of (a) to (n).

• Tighten them uniformly, or the head may deform in the long run.

• Retighten the cylinder head screws after running the engine for

30 minutes,

Tightening torque Cylinder head screw

37.3 to 42.2 N'm

3.8 to 4.3 kgf·m

27,5 to 31.1 ft-Ibs

(1) Pipe Clamp

(2) Water Return Pipe

(3) O-ring

A : Gear Case Side

(n) to (a) : To Loosen

(a) to (n) : To Tighten

W1025645

1-S27

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3GFABAB1 P020A

(1)

(1)

ENGINE

Thermostat Assembly

1. Remove the thermostat cover mounting screws (1), and remove the thermostat cover (2).

2. Remove the thermostat assembly (4).

(When reassembling)

• Apply a liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) only at the thermostat cover side of the gasket (3).

(1) Thermostat Cover Mounting Screw (3) Thermostat Cover Gasket

(2) Thermostat Cover (4) Thenmostat Assembly

Wi 0363950

Tappets

1. Remove the tappets (1) from the crankcase.

(When reassembling)

• Visually check the contact between tappets and cams for proper rotation. If defect is found, replace tappets.

• Before installing the tappets, apply engine oil thinly around them .

• IMPORTANT

• Do not change the combination of tappet and tappet guide.

(1) Tappet

W10209700

Valves

1. Remove the valve caps (2).

2. Remove the valve spring collet (3), pushing the valve spring retainer (4) by valve spring replacer (1 ).

3. Remove the valve spring retainer (4). valve spring (5) and valve stem seal (6).

4. Remove the valve (7).

(When reassembling)

• Wash the valve stem and valve guide hole, and apply engine oil sufficiently.

• After installing the valve spring collets, lightly tap the stem to assure proper fit with a plastic hammer .

• IMPORTANT

• Don't change the combination of valve and valve guide.

(1) Valve Spring Replacer

(2) Valve Cap

(3) Valve Spring Collet

(4) Valve Spring Retainer

(5) Valve Spring

(6) Valve Stem Seal

(7) Valve

W10211070

1-528

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(4)

ENGINE

~151

Oil Pan and Oil Strainer

1. Remove the oil pan mounting screws (1).

2. Remove the oil pan (2) by lightly tapping the rim of the pan with a wooden hammer.

3. Remove the oil strainer (3).

(When reassembling)

• After cleaning the oil strainer, check to see that the filter mesh in clean, and install it.

• Visually check the O-ring (4), apply engine oil, and install it.

• Securely fit the O-ring to the oil strainer.

• To avoid uneven tightening. tighten oil pan mounting screws in diagonal order form the center.

• Using the hole (6) numbered "3", install the oil strainer by mounting screw

• IMPORTANT

• Scrape off the old adhesive completely. Wipe the sealing surface clean using waste cloth soaked with gasoline. Now apply new adhesive 3 to 5 mm (0.12 to 0.20 in.) thick all over the contact surface. Apply the adhesive also on the center of the flange as well as on the inner wall of each bolt hole.

• Cut the nozzle of the "liquid gasket" (Three Bond 12070 or equivalent) container at its second notch. Apply "liquid gasket" about 3 to 5 mm (0.12 to 0.20 in.) thick.

Within 20 minutes after the application of fluid sealant. reassemble the components. Wait then for about 30 minutes, and pour oil in the crankcase.

(1) on

Pan Mounting Screw

(2) Oil Pan

(3) Oil Strainer

(4) O-ring

(5) Hole Numbered "2"

(6) Hole Numbered "3"

W10236610

3TAAAAB1P056C

3TAAAAB1P057A

1-S29

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(4) Gear Case and Timing Gears

(1 )

3EEADAA 1 P014A

~

ENGINE

Injection Pump, Fuel Feed Pump and Speed Control Plate

(for Energize to Run Type Engine Stop Solenoid)

• NOTE

• Specific tool (1) :

1.2 mm diameter hard wire with its end hooked, overall length 200 mm (7.87 in.).

The tip of wire is bent like the hook to hang governor springs.

1. Remove the socket head screws (2). and remove the engine stop solenoid (4).

2. Remove the screws and separate the speed control plate (5), taking care not to damage the governor spring (6).

3. Disconnect the governor spring (6) and remove the speed control plate (5) using the specific tool (1).

4. Remove the fuel feed pump (3).

5. Disconnect the start spring (8) from the bracket (9) using the specific tool (1).

6. Remove the socket head screws and nuts, and remove the injection pump (7).

(1) Specific Tool

(2) Socket Head Screw

(3) Fuel Feed Pump

(4) Engine Stop Solenoid

(5) Speed Control Plate

(6) Governor Spring

(7) Injection Pump

(8) Start Spring

(9) Bracket

W1148604

1-S30

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Injection Pump, Fuel Feed Pump and Speed Control Plate

(for Energize to Run Type Engine Stop Solenoid) (Continued)

(When reassembling)

1. Move the fork lever (1) to the gear case side.

2. Hook the start spring (7) to the injection pump control rack pin (5).

3. Put the specific tool (8) through the fork lever hole of cylinder block (9) and hook the start spring (7).

4. Keep this spring slightly extended and install the injection pump

(4). Make sure the control rod (6) should be pushed by the idling adjusting spring (2) and the pin (5) on the rod engages with the fork lever (1).

5. Hook the start spring (7) to the bracket (3) using the specific tool

(8).

6. Hook the governor springs (small and large) (14) to the governor lever (13) using the specific tool (8) and install the speed control plate (11). Be sure to place the copper washers underneath two screws (12) in the upper of the speed control plate.

7. Install the engine stop solenoid rod (15) to the guide hole of cylinder block (10) and fix the engine stop solenoid (16) with socket head screws .

• NOTE

• Be careful not to stretch the start spring (7) too long.

Otherwise it may get deformed permanently.

• Make sure the start spring (7) is tight on the bracket (3).

• The sealant is applied to both sides of the soft metal gasket shim. The liquid gasket is not required for assembling.

• Addition or reduction of shim (0.05 mm, 0.0020 in.) delays or advances the injection timing by approx. 0.0087 rad (0.5 0).

• In disassembling and replacing, be sure to use the same number of new gasket shims with the same thickness.

(1) Fork Lever

(2) Idling Adjusting Spring

(3) Bracket

(4) Injection Pump

(5) Injection Pump Control Rack Pin

(6) Injection Pump Control Rod

(7) Start Spring

(8) Specific Tool

(9) Fork Lever Hole of Cylinder Block

(10) Guide Hole of Cylinder Block

(11) Speed Control Plate

(12) Screw and Copper Washer

(13) Governor Lever

(14) Governor Spring

(15) Engine Stop Solenoid Rod

(16) Engine Stop Solenoid

W1028534

1-S31

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAB 1 P045A

(1)

ENGINE

Fan Drive Pulley

1. Secure the flywheel to keep it from turning.

2. Remove the fan drive pulley screw.

3. Draw out the fan drive pulley with a puller.

(When reassembling)

• Install the pulley to crankshaft, aligning the mark (1) on them.

• Apply engine oil to the fan drive pulley retaining screws. And tighten them.

Tightening torque Fan drive pulley screw

117.7 to 127.5 N'm

12.0 to 13.0 kgf·m

86.8 to 94.0 ft-Ibs

(1) Alignment Mark

W10181950

1-532

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

~

(

1

'lc-'------""-_....

~

80

ENGINE

Gear Case

1. Remove the screw (1 ) of inside the gear case and outside screws

(6).

2. Disconnect the start spring (2) from the fork lever 1.

3. Remove the gear case (4).

(When reassembling)

• Apply a liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) to both sides of the gear case gasket (4).

• Be sure to set three O-rings (5) inside the gear case.

(1) Screw (Inside)

(2) Start Spring

(3) Gear Case

(4) Gear Case Gasket

(5) O-ring

(6) Screw

W1029858

1-533

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Idle Gear

1. Remove the external snap ring (3), the collar (2) and the idle gear

(1 ).

2. Remove the idle gear shaft mounting screws (4).

3. Remove the idle gear shaft (5).

(When reassembling)

• Apply engine oil to the idle gear shaft mounting screw (4). And tighten them.

• Install the idle gear, aligning the mark (6) on the gears referring to the photo.

Tightening torque

Idle gear shaft mounting screw

9.8 to 11.3 N'm

1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m

7.2 to 8.3 ft-Ibs

(1) Idle Gear

(2) Idle Gear Collar

(3) External Snap Ring

(4) Idle Gear Shaft Mounting Screw

(5) Idle Gear Shaft

(6) Alignment Mark

W1030437

Camshaft

1. Remove the camshaft mounting screws (1) and draw out the camshaft with gear (2) on it.

(When reassembling)

• When install the camshaft, apply engine oil to the camshaft journals.

• Apply engine oil to the camshaft mounting screws. And tighten them.

(1) Camshaft Mounting Screw (2) Camshaft Gear

W1030808

1-S34

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601. WSM ENGINE

Fuel Camshaft

1. Remove the retaining plate (1).

2. Remove the fork lever holder mounting screws (8), then draw out the injection pump gear (3) and fuel camshaft (2) with the governor fork assembly.

(When reassembling)

• Hook the governor spring (7) to the fork lever 2 (6) as shown in the figure before installing the fork lever assembly to the crankcase.

(1) Retaining Plate

(2) Fuel Camshaft

(3) Injection Pump Gear

(4) Governor Sleeve

(5) Fork Lever 1

(6) Fork Lever 2

(7) Governor Spring

(8) Fork Lever Holder Mounting Screw

W10178820

(5) Piston and Connecting Rod

_ _ _-,1)

Oil Pump and Crankshaft Gear

1. Remove the oil pump gear (6).

2. Remove the oil pump (5).

3. Remove the collar (4). O-ring (3) and crankshaft oil slinger (2).

4. Remove the crankshaft gear (1) with a puller.

(When reassembling)

• Install the collar (4) after aligning the marks on the gears. (See page 1-S34 "Idle Gear".)

(1) Crankshaft Gear

(2) Crankshaft Oil Slinger

(3) O-ring

(4) Crankshaft Collar

(5) Oil Pump

(6) Oil Pump Gear

W10180290

Connecting Rod Cap

1. Remove the connecting rod caps (1) using a bihexagonal 8 mm socket.

(When reassembling)

• Align the marks (a) with each other. (Face the marks toward the injection pump.)

• Apply engine oil to the connecting rod screws and lightly screw it in by hand. then tighten it to the specified torque.

If the connecting rod screw won't be screwed in smoothly. clean the threads.

If the connecting rod screw is still hard to screw in. replace it.

TIghtening torque Connecting rod screw

26.5 to 30.4 N'm

2.7 to 3.1 kgf'm

19.5 to 22.4 ft-Ibs

(1) Connecting Rod Cap (a) Mark

W10275480

3TAAAAD1 P043A

1-S35

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

I

Piston

1. Turn the flywheel and bring the piston to top dead center.

2. Draw out the piston upward by lightly tapping it from the bottom of the crankcase with the grip of a hammer.

3. Draw out the other pistons after the same method as above.

(When reassembling)

• Before inserting the piston into the cylinder, apply enough engine oil to the cylinder.

• When inserting the piston into the cylinder, face the mark on the connecting rod to the injection pump .

• IMPORTANT

• Do not change the combination of cylinder and piston. Make sure of the position of each piston by marking. For example, mark "1" on the No.1 piston.

• When installing the piston into the cylinder, place the gaps of all of the piston rings as shown in the figure.

• Carefully insert the piston using a piston ring compressor

(1). Otherwise, their chrome-plated section may be scratched, causing trouble inside the cylinder.

0902-E2-BX-2

Models Mark

2A

(1) Piston Ring Compressor

(A) Top Ring Gap

(8) Second Ring Gap

(e) 011 Ring Gap

(0) Piston Pin Hole

(a) 0.785 rad (45 0)

(b) 0.785 rad (45 0)

(c) 1.57 rad (90 0)

(d) Mark

W10277450

3TMABAB1 P046F

1-836

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, 8T601, WSM

3TMABAB1 P047A

ENGINE

Piston Ring and Connecting Rod

1. Remove the piston rings using a piston ring tool.

2. Remove the piston pin (7), and separate the connecting rod (6) from the piston (5).

(When reassembling)

When installing the ring, assemble the rings so that the manufacturer's mark (12) near the gap faces the top of the piston.

• When installing the oil ring onto the piston, place the expander joint (10) on the opposite side of the oil ring gap (11).

• Apply engine oil to the piston pin.

• When installing the connecting rod to the piston, immerse the piston in 80°C (176 OF) oil for 10 to 15 minutes and insert the piston pin to the piston.

• When installing the connecting rod to the piston, align the mark

(8) on the connecting rod to the fan-shaped concave (9) .

• IMPORTANT

• Mark the same number on the connecting rod and the piston so as not to change the combination.

(1) Top Ring

(2) Second Ring

(3) Oil Ring

(4) Piston Pin Snap Ring

(5) Piston

(6) Connecting Rod

(7) Piston Pin

(8) Mark

(9) Fan-Shaped Concave

(10) Expander Joint

(11) Oil Ring Gap

(12) Manufacturer's Mark

W10281670

3EEACAA 1 P089A

1101--0

/

" ' - - - - ( 1 1 )

3EEABAB1P100A

(12)

3EEABAB1P101A

1-837

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(6) Flywheel and Crankshaft

ENGINE

Flywheel

1. Secure the flywheel to keep it from turning using a flywheel stopper. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)

2. Remove all flywheel screws (1) and then remove the flywheel (2).

(When reassembling)

• Align the "1TC" mark (a) on the outer surface of the flywheel horizontally with the alignment mark (b) on the rear end plate.

Now fit the flywheel in position.

• Apply engine oil to the threads and the undercut surface of the flywheel screw and fit the screw.

Tightening torque Flywheel screw

53.9 to 58.8 N'm

5.5 to 6.0 kgf·m

39.8 to 43.4 ft-Ibs

(1) Flywheel Screw

(2) Flywheel

(a) 1TC Mark

(b) Alignment Mark

W1030810

(3)

~.G:'"

1\":<'"

-1.~)\

\)'

J

3GFABAB1 P047C

(b)

(6)

(5)

Bearing Case Cover

1. Remove the bearing case cover mounting screws. First, remove inside screws (1) and then outside screws (2).

2. Remove the bearing case cover (6).

(When reassembling)

• Fit the bearing case gasket (3) and the bearing case cover gasket

(4) with correct directions.

• Install the bearing case cover (6) to position the casting mark

"UP" (a) on it upward.

• Apply engine oil to the oil seal (5) lip and take care that it is not rolled when installing.

• Tighten the bearing case cover mounting screws with even force on the diagonal line.

Tightening torque

Bearing case cover mounting screw

9.8 to 11.3 N'm

1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m

7.2 to 8.3 ft-Ibs

(1) Bearing Case Cover Mounting Screw (5) Oil Seal

(Inside) (6) Bearing Case Cover

(2) Bearing Case Cover Mounting Screw

(Outside)

(3) Bearing Case Gasket

(4) Bearing Case Cover Gasket

(a) Top Mark "UP"

(b) Upside

W1031168

(4)

3TAAAAD1 P050A

(3)

1-S38

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1 )

ENGINE

Crankshaft Assembly

1. Remove the main bearing case screw 2 (1).

2. Turn the crankshaft to set the crankpin of the third cylinder to the bottom dead center. Then draw out the crankshaft until the crankpin of the second cylinder comes to the center of the third cylinder.

3. Turn the crankshaft by 2.09 rad (120 0) counterclockwise to set the crankpin of the second cylinder to the bottom dead center.

Draw out the crankshaft until the crankpin of the first cylinder comes to the center of the third cylinder.

4. Repeat the above steps to draw out all the crankshaft.

(When reassembling)

• Clean the oil passage of the crankshaft with compressed air.

• Install the crankshaft assembly, aligning the screw hole of main bearing case screw 2 with the screw hole of crankcase.

• When tightening the main bearing case 2, apply oil to the main bearing case screw 2 (1) and screw by hand before tightening the specific torque. If not smooth to screw by hand, align the screw holes between the crankcase and the main bearing case.

"Tightening torque

26.5 to 30.4 N·m

Main bearing case screw 2 2.7 to 3.1 kgf·m

19.5 to 22.4 ft-Ibs

(1) Main Bearing Case Screw 2 A: Cut place for removing and installing the crankshaft

W1031360

1-839

BX25. RCK54(P).23BX. RCK60B·23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

3EEACAA 1 P08l A

(9)

3EEACAA 1 P082A

3TAAAAD1 P054D

(5)

ENGINE

(3) (6)

(8)

(7)

Main Bearing Case Assembly

1. Remove the two main bearing case screws 1 (9), and remove the main bearing case assembly 1 (1), being careful with crankshaft bearing 3 (4) (5).

2. Remove the main bearing case assembly 2 (2) and the main bearing case assembly (3) as above. Keep in mind, however, that the thrust bearing (8) is installed in the main bearing case assembly (3).

(When reassembling)

• Clean the oil passage in the main bearing cases.

• Apply clean engine oil to the bearings.

• Install the main bearing case assemblies in original positions.

Since diameters of main bearing cases vary, install them in order of marking (b) from the gear case side. (Refer to the figure.).

• Be careful not to confuse the top and bottom of the crankshaft bearing 3 (4) (5). (Install the bearing with the oil groove (e) up.)

• Match the alignment numbers (a) on the main bearing case assembly 1.

• Do the same for the main bearing case assembly 2 (2) and the main bearing case assembly (3) too.

• When installing the main bearing case 1 and 2, face the mark

"FLYWHEEL" to the flywheel.

• Install the thrust bearing (8) with its oil groove facing outward.

• Confirm that the main bearing case moves smoothly after tightening the main bearing case screw 1 to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

12.7 to 15.7 N'm

Main bearing case screw 1 1.3 to 1.6 kgf·m

9.4 to 11.6 ft-Ibs

(a) Alignment Number

(b) Marking (1 or 2)

(e) 011 Groove

(1) Main Bearing Case Assembly 1

(2) Main Bearing Case Assembly 2

(3) Main Bearing Case Assembly

(4) Crankshaft Bearing 3

(Upper, with Oil Groove)

(5) Crankshaft Bearing 3 (Lower)

(6) Crankshaft Bearing 2

(Upper, with Oil Groove)

(7) Crankshaft Bearing 2 (Lower)

(8) Thrust Bearing

(9) Main Bearing Case Screw 1

W1034602

3TAAAAD1 P055D

(9)

1-540

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(7) Injection Nozzle

(1

3EEABAB1P171A

ENGINE

Nozzle Holder

1. Secure the nozzle retaining nut (7) with a vise.

2. Remove the nozzle holder (1), and take out parts inside.

(When reassembling)

• Assemble the nozzle in clean fuel oil.

• Install the push rod (4), noting its direction.

• After assembling the nozzle, be sure to adjust the fuel injection pressure.

Tightening torque

Nozzle holder

34.3 to 39.2 N'm

3.5 to 4.0 kgf·m

25.3 to 28.9 ft-Ibs

19.6 to 24.5 N'm

Overflow pipe retaining nul 2.0 to 2.5 kgf'm

14.5 to 18.1 ft-Ibs

Nozzle holder assembly

49.0 to 68.6 N'm

5.0 to 7.0 kgf·m

36.2 to 50.6 ft-Ibs

(1) Nozzle Holder

(2) Adjusting Washer

(3) Nozzle Spring

(4) Push Rod

(5) Distance Piece

(6) Nozzle Piece

(7) Nozzle Retaining Nut

1-541

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[3] SERVICING

(1) Cylinder Head and Valves

3TMABAB1 P056A

ENGINE

Cylinder Head Surface Flatness

1. Clean the cylinder head surface.

2. Place a straightedge on the cylinder head's four sides and two diagonal as shown in the figure.

3. Measure the clearance with a thickness gauge.

4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, correct it with a su rface grinder.

• IMPORTANT

• Do not place the straightedge on the combustion chamber.

• Be sure to check the valve recessing after correcting.

Cylinder head surface flatness

Allowable limit

0.05mm

0.0020 in.

W1027737

3EEABAB1P112B

Ae-AA

...

8

~

3TMABABOP059B

Cylinder Head Flaw

1. Prepare an air spray red check.

2. Clean the surface of the cylinder head with detergent (2).

3. Spray the cylinder head surface with the red permeative liquid

(1). Leave it five to ten minutes after spraying.

4. Wash away the read permeative liquid on the cylinder head surface with the detergent (2).

5. Spray the cylinder head surface with white developer (3).

6. If flawed, it can be identified as red marks.

(1) Red Permeative Liquid

(2) Detergent

(3) White Developer

W1076542

1-S42

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM fi~

3TMABAB1 P057A

(1 )

I

(1 )

ENGINE

Valve Recessing

1. Clean the cylinder head surface, valve face and valve seat.

2. Insert the valve into the valve guide.

3. Measure the valve recessing with a depth gauge.

4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valve.

5. If it still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing the valve, replace the cylinder head.

Valve recessing

(Intake and exhaust)

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.10 (protrusion) to

0.10 (recessing) mm

0.0039 (protrusion) to

0.0039 (recessing) in.

0.30 (recessing) mm

0.0118 (recessing) in.

(1) Cylinder Head Surface (A) Recessing

(8) Protrusion

Wi 0768800

3EEACAA 1 P084A

+

3EEABAB1P115A

Clearance between Valve Stem and Valve Guide

1. Remove carbon from the valve guide section.

2. Measure the valve stem O.D. with an outside micrometer.

3. Measure the valve guide I.D. with a small hole gauge, and calculate the clearance.

4. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valves.

If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valve guide.

Clearance between valve stem and valve guide

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.030 to 0.057 mm

0.00118 to 0.00224 in.

0.10mm

0.0039 in.

Valve stem 0.0.

Valve guide 1.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

5.968 to 5.980 mm

0.23496 to 0.23543 in.

6.010 to 6.025 mm

0.23661 to 0.23720 in.

W10311740

3EEABAB1 P116A

1-543

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(A)

3EEABAB1P117A

(8)

ENGINE

Replacing Valve Guide

(When removing)

1. Press out the used valve guide using a valve guide replacing tool.

(Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)

(When installing)

1. Clean a new valve guide and valve guide bore, and apply engine oil to them.

2. Press in a new valve guide using a valve guide replacing tool.

3. Ream precisely the 1.0. of the valve guide to the specified dimension.

Valve guide 1.0.

(Intake and exhaust)

Factory spec.

6.010 to 6.025 mm

0.23661 to 0.23720 in.

• IMPORTANT

• Do not hit the valve guide with a hammer during replacement.

(A) When Removing (8) When Installing

W10314690

3TMABAB1 P059A

Valve Seating

1. Coat the valve face lightly with prussian blue and put the valve on its seat to check the contact.

2. If the valve does not seat all the way around the valve seat or the valve contact is less than 70 %, correct the valve seating as follows.

3. If the valve contact does not comply with the reference value, replace the valve or correct the contact of valve seating.

Valve seat width Factory spec.

2.12 mm

0.0835 in.

(1) Correct

(2) Incorrect

(3) Incorrect

W10282190 o

(1 ) (2) (3)

3TMABAB1 P060A

1-S44

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Correcting Valve and Valve Seat

• NOTE

• Before correcting the valve and seat, check the valve stem and the I.D. of valve guide section, and repair them if necessary.

• After correcting the valve seat, be sure to check the valve recessing.

1) Correcting Valve

1. Correct the valve with a valve seat cutter.

3EEABAB 1 P118A

Valve face angle Factory spec.

0.785 rad

45 0

3EEABAB 1 P119B

(A)

(C)

(C)t~~u

3EEACAA 1 P088A

2) Correcting Valve Seat

1. Slightly correct the seat surface with a 0.785 rad (45°) valve seat cutter.

2. Fitting the valve, check the contact position of the valve face and seat surface with prussian blue. (Visual check) [If the valve has been used for a long period, the seat tends to come in contact with the upper side of the valve face.]

3. Grind the upper surface of the seat with a 0.262 rad (15°) valve seat cutter until the valve seat touches to the center of the valve face (so that (a) equals (b) as shown in the figure.)

4. Grind the seat with a 0.785 rad (45 0) valve seat cutter again, and

(8)

".:">.,~

...

,

.•..

......

"\

\ visually recheck the contact between the valve and seat. r---~

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the correct contact is achieved.

6. Continue lapping until the seated rate becomes more than 70 %

(D)

~(a)

(b(ftt\~ of the total contact area.

I

Valve seat angle Factory spec.

I

0.785 rad

45 0

(1) Valve Seat Cutter (a) Identical Dimensions

(b) Valve Seat Width

(A) Check Contact

(8) Correct Seat Width

(C) Check Seat Surface

(D) Check Contact

(c) 0.262 rad (15')

(d) 0.785 rad (45·)

W10283500

Valve Lapping

1. Apply compound evenly to the valve lapping surface.

2. Insert the valve into the valve guide. Lap the valve onto its seat with a valve flapper or screwdriver.

3. After lapping the valve, wash the compound away and apply oil, then repeat valve lapping with oil.

4. Apply prussian blue to the contact surface to check the seated rate. If it is less than 70 %, repeat valve lapping again .

• IMPORTANT

• When valve lapping is performed, be sure to check the valve recessing and adjust the valve clearance after assembling the valve.

W10288140

1-S45

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3EEABAB1P121B

3EEABAB1P122A

3EEABAB1P123A

(B) e1

ENGINE

Free Length and Tilt of Valve Spring

1. Measure the free length (A) of valve spring with vernier calipers.

If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.

2. Put the valve spring on a surface plate, place a square on the side of the valve spring.

3. Check to see if the entire side is in contact with the square.

Rotate the valve spring and measure the maximum tilt (8).

If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.

4. Check the entire surface of the valve spring for scratches.

If there is any defect, replace it.

Free length (A)

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

31.3 to 31.8 mm

1.232 to 1.252 in.

28.4 mm

1.118 in.

I

Tilt (8)

I

Allowable limit

1.2mm

1

0.047 in.

(A) Free length (8) Tilt

W11157830

Valve Spring Setting Load

1. Place the valve spring on a tester and compress it to the same length it is actually compressed the engine.

2. Read the compression load on the gauge.

3. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.

Setting load /

Setting length

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

64.7 N /27.0 mm

6.6 kgf /27.0 mm

14.6 Ibs /1.063 in.

54.9 N /27.0 mm

5.6 kgf 127.0 mm

12.3 Ibs 11.063 in.

W11177330

Oil Clearance between Rocker Arm and Rocker Arm Shaft

1. Measure the rocker arm shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the rocker arm I.D. with an inside micrometer, and then calculate the oil clearance.

3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the rocker arm and measure the oil clearance again. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace also the rocker arm shaft.

Oil clearance between rocker arm and rocker arm shaft

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.016 to 0.045 mm

0.00063 to 0.00177 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Rocker arm shaft 0.0.

Rocker arm 1.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

10.473 to 10.484 mm

0.41232 to 0.41276 in.

10.500 to 10.518 mm

0.41339 to 0.41410 in.

W11199710

1-S46

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Push Rod Alignment

1. Place the push rod on V blocks.

2. Measure the push rod alignment.

3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the push rod.

Push rod alignment Allowable limit

0.25mm

0.0098 in.

W11220210 i

3TMABAB1 P062A

3EEABAB1P124A

Oil Clearance between Tappet and Tappet Guide Bore

1. Measure the tappet 0.0. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the 1.0. of the tappet guide bore with a cylinder gauge, and calculate the oil clearance.

3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit or the tappet is damaged. replace the tappet.

Oil clearance between tappet and tappet guide bore

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.016 to 0.052 mm

0.00063 to 0.00205 in.

0.10 mm

0.0039 in.

Tappet 0.0.

Tappet guide bore 1.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

17.966 to 17.984 mm

0.70732 to 0.70803 in.

18.000 to 18.018 mm

0.70866 to 0.70937 in.

W11231410

(2) Timing Gears

Timing Gear Backlash

1. Set a dial indicator (lever type) with its tip on the gear tooth.

2. Move the gear to measure the backlash. holding its mating gear.

3. If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, check the oil clearance of the shaft and the gear.

4. If the oil clearance is not proper. replace the gear.

Backlash between idle gear and crank gear

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.043 to 0.124 mm

0.00169 to 0.00488 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Backlash between idle gear and cam gear

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.047 to 0.123 mm

0.00185 to 0.00484 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Backlash between idle gear and injection pump gear

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

Backlash between oil pump drive gear and crank gear

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.046 to 0.124 mm

0.00181 to 0.00488 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

0.041 to 0.123 mm

0.00161 to 0.00484 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

W11264830

1-547

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TMABAB1 P064A

3EEABAB1P128A

3EEABAB1 P129A

ENGINE

Idle Gear Side Clearance

1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the idle gear.

2. Measure the side clearance by moving the idle gear to the front and rear.

3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the idle gear collar.

Idle gear side clearance

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.20 to 0.51 mm

0.0079 to 0.0201 in.

0.80mm

0.0315 in.

W11286770

Camshaft Side Clearance

1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the camshaft

2. Measure the side clearance by moving the cam gear to the font and rear.

3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the camshaft stopper.

Camshaft side clearance

Factory spec.

0.15toO.31 mm

0.0059 to 0.0122 in.

Allowable limit

0.50mm

0.0197 in.

W11299720

Camshaft Alignment

1. Support the camshaft with V blocks on the surface plate at both end journals.

2. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate journal.

3. Measure the camshaft alignment.

4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit. replace the camshaft.

Camshaft alignment Allowable limit

0.01 mm

0.0004 in.

W11312720

Cam Height

1. Measure the height of the cam at its highest point with an outside micrometer.

2. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace the camshaft.

Cam height of intake and exhaust

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

26.88 mm

1.0583 in.

26.83mm

1.0563 in.

W11324040

1-S48

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM ENGINE

Oil Clearance of Camshaft Journal

1. Measure the camshaft journal 0.0. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the cylinder block bore 1.0. for camshaft with a inside micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.

3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the camshaft.

Oil clearance of camshaft journal

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.050 to 0.091 mm

0.00197 to 0.00358 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Camshaft journal 0.0.

Camshaft Bearing 1.0.

(Cylinder block bore

1.0.)

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

32.934 to 32.950 mm

1.29661 to 1.29724 in.

33.000 to 33.025 mm

1.29921 to 1.30020 in.

W11335580

3TMABAB1 P071A

3TMABAB1 P069A

(A) (B)

Oil Clearance between Idle Gear Shaft and Idle Gear Bushing

1. Measure the idle gear shaft 0.0. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the idle gear bushing 1.0. with an inside micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.

3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the bushing.

4. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the idle gear shaft.

Oil clearance between idle gear shaft and idle gear bushing

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.020 to 0.084 mm

0.00079 to 0.00331 in.

0.10 mm

0.0039 in.

Idle gear shaft 0.0.

Idle gear bushing 1.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

19.967 to 19.980 mm

0.78610 to 0.78661 in.

20.000 to 20.051 mm

0.78740 to 0.78941 in.

W11356150

Replacing Idle Gear Bushing

(When removing)

1. Press out the used idle gear bushing using an idle gear bushing replacing tool. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)

(When installing)

1. Clean a new idle gear bushing and idle gear bore, and apply engine oil to them.

2. Press in a new brushing using an idle gear bushing replacing tool, until it is flush with the end of the idle gear.

(A) When Removing (8) When Installing

W11373220

1-S49

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3) Piston and Connecting Rod

3EEABAB1P138A

3EEABAB1 P139A

..

3EEABABl P140A

(1)

(2)

3GFABABl P053A

..

ENGINE

Piston Pin Bore 1.0.

1. Measure the piston pin bore 1.0. in both the horizontal and vertical directions with a cylinder gauge.

2. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston.

Piston pin bore 1.0.

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

20.000 to 20.013 mm

0.78740 to 0.78791 in.

20.05mm

0.7894 in.

Wl1406200

Oil Clearance between Piton Pin and Small End Bushing

1. Measure the piston pin 0.0. where it contacts the bushing with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the small end bushing 1.0. with an inside micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.

3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the bushing. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston pin.

Oil clearance between piston pin and small end bushing

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.014 to 0.038 mm

0.00055 to 0.00150 in.

0.10 mm

0.0039 in.

Piston pin 0.0.

Small end bushing I.D.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

20.002 to 20.011 mm

0.78748 to 0.78783 in.

20.025 to 20.040 mm

0.78839 to 0.78897 in.

W11420110

Replacing Small End Bushing

(When removing)

1. Press out the used bushing using a small end bushing replacing tool. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS")

(When installing)

1. Clean a new small end bushing and small end hole, and apply engine oil to them.

2. Using a small end bushing replacing tool, press in a new bushing

(service parts) taking care to see that the position of the connecting rod oil hole matches the bushing hole.

[Servicing parts dimension]

Oil clearance between piston pin and small end bushing (Spare parts)

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.015 to 0.075 mm

0.00059 to 0.00295 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Small end bushing I.D.

(Spare parts)

(1) Seam

(2) Oil Hole

Factory spec.

20.026 to 20.077 mm

0.78843 to 0.79043 in.

(A) When Removing

(8) When Installing

(a) 0.185 rad (45°)

W11437590

1-S50

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TMABABOP056A

~

3EEABAB 1 P 144A

3TMABAB1 P072A

ENGINE

Connecting Rod Alignment

• NOTE

• Since checking of the I.D. of the connecting rod small end bushing is the basis of this check, check bushing for wear beforehand.

1. Install the piston pin into the connecting rod.

2. Install the connecting rod on the connecting rod alignment tool.

3. Put a gauge over the piston pin, and move it against the face plate.

4. If the gauge does not fit squarely against the face plate, measure the space between the pin of the gauge and the face plate.

5. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the connecting rod.

Connecting rod alignment

Allowable limit

0.05mm

0.0020 in.

W10314620

Piston Ring Gap

1. Insert the piston ring into the lower part of the cylinder (the least worn out part) with a piston ring compressor and piston.

2. Measure the ring gap with a feeler gauge.

3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston ring.

Top ring

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

0.20 to 0.35 mm

0.0079 to 0.0138 in.

Allowable 1.25 mm limit 0.0492 in.

0.35 to 0.50 mm

0.0138 to 0.0197 in.

Piston ring gap Second ring

Oil ring

Allowable 1.25 mm limit 0.0492 in.

Factory spec.

0.20 to 0.35 mm

0.0079 to 0.0138 in.

Allowable 1.25 mm limit 0.0492 in.

W11466710

Clearance between Piston Ring and Piston Ring Groove

1. Clean the rings and the ring grooves, and install each ring in its groove.

2. Measure the clearance between the ring and the groove with a feeler gauge.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston ring.

4. If the clearance still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing the ring, replace the piston.

Clearance between piston ring and piston ring groove

Second ring

Oil ring

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.090 to 0.120 mm

0.00354 to 0.00472 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Factory spec.

0.04 to 0.08 mm

0.0016 to 0.0031 in.

Allowable 0.15 mm limit 0.0059 in.

W11485500

1-851

BX25. RCK54{P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX.lA240. BT601. W8M

(4) Crankshaft

3GFABAB1 P054A o

3TMABABl P074A

ENGINE

Crankshaft Side Clearance

1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the end of the crankshaft.

2. Measure the side clearance by moving the crankshaft to the front and rear.

3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the thrust bearings.

4. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankshaft journal wear, replace it with an oversize one referring to the table and figure.

Crankshaft side clearance

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.15100.31 mm

0.0059 to 0.0122 in.

0.50mm

0.0197 in.

(Reference)

• Oversize thrust bearing

Oversize

0.2mm

0.008 in.

0.4mm

0.016 in.

Bearing

Thrust bearing 1 02

Thrust bearing 2 02

Thrust bearing 1 04

Code Number Marking

15261-23950

15261-23970

02008

02008

15261-23960

Thrust bearing 2 04 15261-23980

• Oversize dimensions of crankshaft journal

04008

04008

Oversize

Dimension A

Dimension B

Dimension C

-

0.2mm

0.008 in.

23.40 to 23.45 mm

0.9213 to 0.9232 in.

46.1 to 46.3 mm

1.815 to 1.823 in.

1.8 to 2.2 mm radius

0.071 to 0.087 in. radius

0.4mm

0.016 in.

23.80 to 23.85 mm

0.9370 to 0.9390 in.

46.3 to 46.5 mm

1.823 to 1.831 in.

1.8 to 2.2 mm radius

0.071 to 0.087 in. radius

(0.88)

The crankshaft journal must be fine-finished to higher than vvvv.

W11586190

Crankshaft Alignment

1. Support the crankshaft with V blocks on the surface plate at both end journals.

2. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate journal.

3. Measure the crankshaft alignment.

4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the crankshaft.

Crankshaft alignment Allowable limit

0.02 mm

0.0008 in.

W11613530

3EEABAB1P147A

1-S52

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT60l, WSM d

I

~

B

3TMABAB1P0748

ENGINE

Oil Clearance between Crankpin and Crankpin Bearing

1. Clean the crankpin and crankpin bearing.

2. Put a strip of plastigage on the center of the crankpin.

3. Install the connecting rod cap and tighten the connecting rod screws to the specified torque, and remove the cap again.

4. Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale, and get the oil clearance.

5. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the crankpin bearing.

6. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankpin wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the table and figure .

• NOTE

• Never insert the plastigage into the crankpin oil hole.

• Be sure not to move the crankshaft while the connecting rod screws are tightened.

Oil clearance between crankpin and crankpin bearing

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.020 to 0.051mm

0.00079 to 0.00201 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Crankpin O.D.

Crankpin bearing I.D.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

33.959 to 33.975 mm

1.33697 to 1.33760 in.

33.995 to 34.010 mm

1.33839 to 1.33898 in.

(Reference)

• Undersize crankpin bearing

Undersize

0.2mm

0.008 in.

Bearing

Crankpin bearing 02

Code Number

15861-22970

0.4mm

0.016 in.

Crankpin bearing 04

• Undersize dimensions of crankpin

15861-20980

Marking

020 US

040 US

Undersize

Dimension A

'Dimension B

0.2mm

0.008 in.

2.3 to 2.7 mm radius

0.091 to 0.106 in.radius

1.0 to 1.5 mm relief

0.0394 to 0.0591 in. relief

0.4mm

0.016 in.

2.3 to 2.7 mm radius

0.091 to 0.106 in.radius

1.0 to 1.5 mm relief

0.0394 to 0.0591 in. relief

Dimension C

33.759 to 33.775 mm dia.

1.32910 to 1.32973 in. dia.

33.559 to 33.575 mm dia.

1.32122 to 1.32185 in. dia.

(0.8S)

The crankshaft journal must be fine-finished to higher than VVVV.

'Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with 1.0 to 1.5 mm

(0.0394 to 0.0591 in.) relief.

Wl1625390

1-853

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Oil Clearance between Crankshaft Journal and Crankshaft

Bearing 1

1. Measure the 0.0. of the crankshaft front journal with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the 1.0. of the crankshaft bearing 1 with an inside micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.

3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the crankshaft bearing 1.

4. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankshaft journal wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the table and the figure.

Oil Clearance between crankshaft journal and crankshaft bearing 1

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.034 to 0.106 mm

0.00134 to 0.00417 in.

0.20mm

0.0079 in.

Crankshaft journal 0.0.

Crankshaft bearing 1 1.0.

Factory spec.

43.934 to 43.950 mm

1.72968 to 1.73031 in.

43.984 to 44.040 mm

1.73165 to 1.73386 in.

W10323470

1-S54

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

B

3TMABAB1 P079A

3EBAAAB1 P051C

(A)

(2)

ENGINE

Oil Clearance between Crankshaft Journal and Crankshaft

Bearing 1 (Continued)

(Reference)

• Undersize crankshaft bearing 1

Marking Undersize

0.2mm

0.008 in.

Bearing

Crankshaft bearing 1 02

0.4mm

0.016 in.

!

Crankshaft bearing 1 04

Code Number

1G460-23910

1 G460-23920

• Undersize dimensions of crankshaft journal

020 US

040 US

Undersize

Dimension A

"Dimension 8

Dimension C

0.2mm

0.008 in.

1.8 to 2.2 mm radius

0.071 to 0.087 in. radius

1.0 to 1.5 mm relief

0.0394 to 0.0591 in. relief

43.734 to 43.750 mm dia.

1.72181 to 1.72244 in. dia.

0.4 mm

0.016 in.

1.8 to 2.2 mm radius

0.071 to 0.087 in.radius

1.0 to 1.5 mm relief

0.0394 to 0.0591 in. relief

43.534 to 43.550 mm dia.

1.71394 to 1.71457 in. dia.

(0.8S)

The crankshaft journal must be fine-finished to higher than VVVV.

'Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with 1.0 to 1.5 mm

(0.0394 to 0.0591 in.) relief.

W1044484

Replacing Crankshaft Bearing 1

(When removing)

1. Press out the used crankshaft bearing 1 using a crankshaft bearing 1 replacing tool. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)

(When installing)

1. Clean a new crankshaft bearing 1 and crankshaft joumal bore, and apply engine oil to them.

2. USing a crankshaft bearing 1 replacing tool, press in a new bearing 1 (2) so that its seam (1) directs toward the exhaust manifold side. (See figure.)

Dimension (A) Factory spec.

0.0 to 0.3 mm

0.0 to 0.0118 in.

(1) Seam

(2) Crankshaft Bearing 1

(3) Cylinder Block

(A) Dimension

(8) 0.366 rad (21 .)

W10342000

1-S55

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TMABAB1 P081A

ENGINE

Oil Clearance between Crankshaft Journal and Crankshaft

Bearing 2 and Crankshaft Bearing 3

1. Put a strip of plastigage on the center of the journal.

2. Install the bearing case and tighten the bearing case screws 1 to the specified torque, and remove the bearing case again.

3. Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale, and get the oil clearance.

4. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the crankshaft bearing 2 (crankshaft bearing 3).

5. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankshaft journal wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the table and figure .

• NOTE

• Be sure not to move the crankshaft while the bearing case screws are tightened.

Oil clearance between crankshaft journal and crankshaft bearing 2

(crankshaft bearing 3)

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.028 to 0.059 mm

0.00110 to 0.00232 in.

0.20mm

0.0079 in.

I

Crankshaft Journal 0.0.

(Flywheel side)

Crankshaft bearing 2

1.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

Crankshaft journal 0.0.

(Intermediate)

Factory spec.

Crankshaft bearing 3 1.0. Factory spec.

43.934 to 43.950 mm

1.72968 to 1.73031 in.

43.978 to 43.993 mm

1.73142 to 1.73201 in.

43.934 to 43.950 mm

1.72968 to 1.73031 in.

43.978 to 43.993 mm

1.73142 to 1.73201 in.

W10344030

1-856

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

B

3EEABAB 1 P 152B

A

ENGINE

Oil Clearance between Crankshaft Journal and Crankshaft

Bearing 2 and Crankshaft Bearing 3 (Continued)

(Reference)

• Undersize crankshaft bearing 2 and 3 (0.2 mm (0.008 in.))

Bearing

Crankshaft bearing 2 02

Crankshaft bearing 3 02

Code Number

1 G460-23930

1 G460-23940

Marking

020 US

• Undersize crankshaft bearing 2 and 3 (0.4 mm (0.016 in.))

Bearing

Crankshaft bearing 2 04

Crankshaft bearing 3 04

Code Number

1 G460-23950

1 G460-23960

• Undersize dimensions of crankshaft journal

Marking

040 US

Undersize

Dimension A

'Dimension B

Dimension C

0.2mm

0.008 in.

1.8 to 2.2 mm radius

0.071 to 0.087 in.radius

0.4mm

0.016 in.

1.8 to 2.2 mm radius

0.071 to 0.087 in.radius

1.0 to 1.5 mm relief

0.0394 to 0.0591 in. relief

1.0 to 1.5 mm relief

0.0394 to 0.0591 in. relief

43.734 to 43.750 mm dia.

1.72181 to

1.72244 in. dia.

43.534 to 43.550 mm dia.

1.71394 to

1.71457 in. dia.

Dimension 0

43.734 to 43.750 mm dia.

1.72181 to

1.72244 in. dia.

43.534 to 43.550 mm dia.

1.71394 to

1.71457 in. dia.

(0.8S)

The crankshaft journal must be fine-finished to higher than VVVV.

'Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with 1.0 to 1.5 mm

(0.0394 to 0.0591 in.) relief.

Wi 047088

1-S57

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(5) Cylinder

3EEABAB1P1 tAl

(B)

ENGINE

Cylinder Wear

1. Measure the cylinder liner 1.0. at the six positions (see figure) with a cylinder gauge to find the maximum and minimum 1.0:s.

2. Get the difference (Maximum wear) between the maximum and the minimum 1.0.'s.

3. If the wear exceeds the allowable limit, bore and hone to the oversize dimension. (Refer to "Correcting Cylinder".)

4. Visually check the cylinder wall for scratches. If deep scratches are found, the cylinder should be bored. (Refer to "Correcting

Cylinder".)

Factory spec. to 72.019 mm to 2.83539 in.

Cylinder liner 1.0.

Allowable limit

(A) Top

(B) Middle

(e) Bottom (Skirt)

(a) Right-angled to Piston Pin

(b) Piston Pin Direction

W10360060

(el

-

3EEABAB1 P155A r-­

-

I

3EEABAB1 P156A

I

I r-

I

I

I

I

I

'..,

, •

,

I

I

,

I

I

,

•

I

I

,,

:

,

..

(1)

(2)

..'

,,

,

,

I

I

·

I

I

•

I

,

I

•

·

....

·

....... r­

I - ­

Correcting Cylinder

1. When the cylinder is worn beyond the allowable limit, bore and hone it to the specified dimension.

Cylinder liner 1.0.

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

72.250 to 72.269 mm

2.84449 to 2.84524 in.

72.400 mm

2.85040 in.

Finishing

Hone to 2.2 to 3.0 IlmRz.

(0.000087 to 0.00012 in.Rz)

VVV

2. Replace the piston and piston rings with oversize ones.

Oversize: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.)

Marking : 025

• NOTE

• When the oversize cylinder is worn beyond the allowable limit, replace the cylinder block with a new one.

(1) Cylinder I. O. (Before Correction) (2) Cylinder 1.0. [Oversize]

W10367470

(6) Oil Pump

Rotor Lobe Clearance

1. Measure the clearance between lobes of the inner rotor and the outer rotor with a thickness gauge.

2. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace the oil pump rotor assembly.

Rotor lobe clearance Factory spec.

0.03 to 0.14 mm

0.0012 to 0.0055 in.

W10378950

1-S58

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ENGINE

Clearance between Outer Rotor and Pump Body

1. Measure the clearance between the outer rotor and the pump body with a thickness gauge.

2. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace the oil pump rotor assembly.

Clearance between outer rotor and pump body

Factory spec.

0.07 to 0.15 mm

0.0028 to 0.0059 in.

W10381420

3TMABAB1 P088A

Clearance between Rotor and Cover

1. Put a strip of plastigage onto the rotor face with grease.

2. Install the cover and tighten the screws.

3. Remove the cover carefully, and measure the amount of the flattening with the scale and get the clearance.

4. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace oil pump rotor assembly.

Clearance between rotor and cover

Factory spec.

0.075 to 0.135 mm

0.00295 to 0.00531 in.

W10382660

1-S59

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. STRUCTURE ................................................................................................. 2-M1

2. TRAVELLING SYSTEM ................................................................................ 2-M2

[1] HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION .......................................................... 2-M2

(1) Structure ............................................................................................ 2-M2

(2) Oil Flow .............................................................................................. 2-M3

(3) HST Control Linkage .......................................................................... 2-M8

(4) Speed Set Linkage ............................................................................. 2-M9

[2] RANGE GEAR SH IFT SECTION ........................................................ 2-M 11

[3] FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SECTION ..................................................... 2-M11

[4] DIFFERENTIAL GEAR SECTION ....................................................... 2-M12

(1) Differential Gears ............................................................................. 2-M 12

(2) Differential Lock ............................................................................... 2-M13

[5) BRAKE SECTIOI\I ................................................................................. 2-M14

3. PTO SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 2-M15

[1] PTO CLUTCH AND VALVE ................................................................ 2-M 15

[2] MID AND REAR PTO SECTION ........................................................ 2-M18

4. OTHERS ...................................................................................................... 2-M19

[1) HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVE GEAR SECTION ................................... 2-M19

BX25, RCK54{P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. STRUCTURE

(1

A+­

TRANSAXLE

-+B

3TAAAAFKP001 A

(1) Hydrostatic Transmission

(2) PTO Clutch Section

(3) Range Gear Shift Section

(4) Front Wheel Drive Gear

Section

(5) Mld-PTO Section

(6) PTO Gear Shift Section

(7) Rear PTO Section

(8) Differential Gear Section

(9) Brake Section

A: Front Side

B: Rear Side

2-M1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2. TRAVELLING SYSTEM

[1] HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION

(1) Structure

TRANSAXLE

3TAAAAFKP040A

(1) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve

(2) Trunnion Arm

(3) Center Section

(4) Piston Spring

(5) Piston

(6) Thrust Ball Bearing

(7) Swash plate

(8) Cradle Bearing

(9) Spring

(10) Cir-Clip

(11) Spring

(12) Clr-Clip

(13) Thrust Ball Bearing

(14) Cylinder Block (Motor)

(15) Plug

(16) Motor Shaft

(17) Needle Bearing

(18) Ball Bearing

(19) Pump Shaft

(20) Cylinder Block (Pump)

(21) Charge Relief Valve

The hydrostatic transmission consists of variable displacement piston pump, fixed displacement piston motor and valve system.

2-M2

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Oil Flow

A

TRANSAXLE

(7) (8) (9)

(11)

(13) (15)

(17)

(16)

(18)

3TAAAAFKP002A

(1) Cylinder Block (Pump)

(2) Swash plate

(3) Piston

(4) Cylinder Block (Motor)

(5) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Forward)

(6) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Reverse)

(7) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Forward)

(8) Charge Relief Valve

(9) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Reverse)

(10) PTO Clutch Valve

(11) PTO Relief Valve

(12) Oil Filter Cartridge

(13) Power Steering Controller

(14) Hydraulic Pump

(15) Flow Priority Valve (Hydraulic

Control Valve)

(16) Position Control Valve

(17) Oil Strainer

(18) Transmission Case

A: A Port

B: B Port

C: C Port

D: D Port

The pump and motor are joined in a closed hydraulic loop and most of oil circulates within the main oil circuit. A little oil lubricates and oozes out from the clearance between the moving parts of the case. Then oil in the main oil circuit of the HST needs to be supplied a want.

The oil from the power steering circuit flows into the HST for charging.

The charge oil aids smooth operation of pistons for pump and motor. The charge oil passes through the oil filter cartridge to charge relief valve port. The rest of oil passes through the charge relief valve into the HST housing. And overflow oil from HST housing return to the transmission case.

2-M3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Neutral

TRANSAXLE

(8) (9)

12)

.......

. . :x

,,:Y

:Z

3TAAAAFKP003A

(1) Cylinder Block (Pump)

(2) Swashplate

(3) Piston

(4) Cylinder Block (Motor)

(5) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Forward)

(6) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Reverse)

(7) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Forward)

(8) Charge Relief Valve

(9) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Reverse)

(10) PTO Clutch Valve

(11) PTO Relief Valve

(12) Oil Filter Cartridge

(13) Power Steering Controller

(14) Hydraulic Pump

(15) Flow Priority Valve (Hydraulic

Control Valve)

(16) Position Control Valve

(17) Oil Strainer

(18) Transmission Case

A: A Port

B: B Port

C: C Port

0: 0 Port

X: High Pressure

Y: Low Pressure

Z: FreeOil

When the speed control pedal is in neutral, the variable swash plate is not tilted as shown in figure above. The pump pistons only rotate with cylinder block without reCiprocating. Since the oil is not being pumped to the motor, the cylinder block in the motor is stationary and the output shaft does not move.

2-M4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Forward

TRANSAXLE

.....•

,,:X ,,:V

:Z

3TAAAAFKP004A

(1) Cylinder Block (Pump)

(2) Swashplate

(3) Piston

(4) Cylinder Block (Motor)

(5) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Forward)

(6) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Reverse)

(7) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Forward)

(8) Charge Relief Valve

(9) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Reverse)

(10) PTO Clutch Valve

(11) PTO Relief Valve

(12) Oil Filter Cartridge

(13) Power Steering Controller

(14) Hydraulic Pump

(15) Flow Priority Valve (Hydraulic

Control Valve)

(16) Position Control Valve

(17) Oil Strainer

(18) Transmission Case

A: A Port

B:BPort

C: C Port

D: D Port

X: High Pressure

Y: Low Pressure

Z: FreeOil

When the speed control pedal is stepped on and in forward, the variable swash plate is tilted as shown in figure above.

As the pump cylinder block rotates with the input shaft, oil is forced out of pump port B at high pressure. As pressure oil enters motor port D, the pistons, which align with port D, are pushed against the swashplate and slide down the inclined surface.

Then the output shaft rotates with the motor cylinder block. This drives the machine forward and the angle of pump swash plate determines the output shaft speed.

As the motor cylinder block continues to rotate, oil is forced out of motor port C at low pressure and returns to the pump.

2-M5

TRANSAXLE BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Reverse

A

(4)

(7) (8) (9)

(12)

(14

..

·

···

.

....•

. . : X . . : Y I;::%;::;,;:]::H : Z

3TAAAAFKP005A

(1) Cylinder Block (Pump)

(2) Swash plate

(3) Piston

(4) Cylinder Block (Motor)

(5) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Forward)

(6) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Reverse)

(7) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Forward)

(8) Charge Relief Valve

(9) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Reverse)

(10) PTa Clutch Valve

(11) PTa Relief Valve

(12) Oil Filter Cartridge

(13) Power Steering Controller

(14) Hydraulic Pump

A: A Port

B: B Port

(15) Flow Priority Valve (Hydraulic C: C Port

Control Valve)

(16) Position Control Valve

D: D Port

X: High Pressure

(17) Oil Strainer Y: Low Pressure

(18) Transmission Case Z: Free Oil

When the speed control pedal is stepped on and in reverse, the variable swash plate is tilted as shown in figure above.

As the pump cylinder block rotates with the input shaft, oil is forced out of pump port A at high pressure. As pressure oil enters motor port C, the pistons, which align with port C, are pushed against the swashplate and slide down the inclined surface.

Then the output shaft rotates with the motor cylinder block. This drives the machine rearward and the angle of pump swashplate determines the output shaft speed.

As the motor cylinder block continues to rotate, oil is forced out of motor port D at low pressure and returns to the pump.

2-M6

TRANSAXLE BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Relief (Reverse)

:

.

..

• •••••

2)

(1

....

~

..

,,:X

III:Y

:Z

3TAAAAFKP006A

(1) Cylinder Block (Pump)

(2) Swash plate

(3) Piston

(4) Cylinder Block (Motor)

(5) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Forward)

(6) Check and High Pressure

Relief Valve (Reverse)

(7) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Forward)

(8) Charge Relief Valve

(9) High Pressure Relief Port

Plug (Reverse)

(10) PTO Clutch Valve

(11) PTO Relief Valve

(12) Oil Filter Cartridge

(13) Power Steering Controller

(14) Hydraulic Pump

(15) Flow Priority Valve (Hydraulic

Control Valve)

(16) Position Control Valve

(17) Oil Strainer

(18) Transmission Case

A: A Port

B: B Port

C: C Port

D: D Port

X: High Pressure

Y: Low Pressure

Z: Free 011

When the speed control pedal is in reverse, the variable swashplate is tilted as shown in figure above.

As the pump cylinder block rotates with the input shaft, oil is forced out of pump port A at high pressure. As pressure oil enters motor port C, the pistons, which align with port C, are pushed against the swash plate and slide down the inclined surface. Since the oil pressure in the check and high pressure relief valve (Reverse) increase, the high oil pressure opens the check and high pressure relief valve (Reverse) and the flows through the charge relief valve to the transmission case.

Then the output shaft rotates with the motor cylinder block. This drives the machine rearward and the angle of pump swash plate determines the output shaft speed.

As the motor cylinder block continues to rotate, oil is forced out of motor port 0 at low pressure and returns to the pump.

2-M?

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601. WSM

(3) HST Control Linkage

(3)

TRANSAXLE

1)

(2)

The speed control pedal (5) and the trunnion arm are linked with the HST pedal link (10) and the speed change rod (11). As the front of the pedal is depressed. the swashplate connected to the trunnion arm (2) rotates and forward travelling speed increases. Depressing the rear end increases reverse speed.

The trunnion arm (2) is returned to neutral position by the neutral arm and the tension of neutral spring. At the same time. the swashplate is returned to neutral, when the pedal is released. The damper (12) connected to the

HST pedal link (10) restricts the movement ofthe linkage to prevent abrupt operation or reversing.

Moreover, the feeling of the dynamic braking can be adjusted by changing the arm (13) position of damper

(12).

(Reference)

[A] : Force of the damper is large.

[8] : Force of the damper is small.

(1) Neutral Spring

(2) Trunnion Arm

(3) Cruise Rod

(4) Brake Pedal

(5) Speed Control Pedal

(6) Parking Plate

(7) Cruise Arm

(8) Cruise Lock

(9) Cruise Lock

(10) HST Pedal Link

(11) Speed Change Rod

(12) Damper

(13) Arm

W1020319

3TAAAAIKP001A

[A]

3TAAAAIKP002A

(13)

2-M8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(4) Speed Set Linkage

• Speed Set

(1 )

(7) (8) (9) (10)

(12) (3)

(11 )

TRANSAXLE

(1) Speed Set Rod

(2) Brake Pedal

(3) Speed Control Pedal

(4) Parking Brake Lock Pedal

(5) Cruise Lock

(6) Cruise Lock

(7) Cruise Arm

(8) HST Pedal Link

(9) Speed Change Rod

(10) Damper

(11) Trunnion Arm

(12) Release Plate

(13) Brake Rod

A : Speed Set Rod "OFF"

B : Speed Set Rod "ON"

C : Speed Control Pedal

"Forward" o :

Cruise Lock "Locked"

W1020771

3TAAAAIKP003A

When pushing and holding the speed set rod (1) and depressing the speed control pedal (3), the desired speed is set.

When pushing the speed set rod (1), the cruise arm (7) is rotated counter clockwise.

When depressing the speed control pedal (3) forward, the HST pedal link clockwise.

Since both the cruise lock (5) of the cruise arm (7) and the cruise lock (6) of HST pedal link (8) are locked, the speed control pedal (3) is held at a selected position.

2-M9

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

• When the Brake Pedal is Depressed

(4)

(1 ) o o o 0 o o 0 o o

0 o o o o o o o o

TRANSAXLE

(1) Brake Rod

(2) Speed Control Pedal

(3) Parking Brake Lock Pedal

(4) Brake Pedal

(5) Release Plate

(6) Speed Set Rod

(7) Cruise Arm

(8) Cruise Lock

(9) Cruise Lock

(10) HST Pedal Link

(11) Speed Change Rod

(12) Trunnion Arm

A : Brake Pedal "Depressed"

B : Release Plate "Pushed

Down"

C : Cruise Rod "Pushed Up"

D: Cruise Arm Rotates

"Clockwise"

E : HST Pedal Link "Pushed

Up"

W1022896

(6)

3TAAAAIKP004A

When the brake pedal (1) is depressed, the release plate (5) located under the brake pedal (1) is pushed down.

Since the release plate (5) rotates, the HST pedal link (10) is pushed up.

The lock between the cruise lock (9) of the HST pedal link (10) and the cruise lock (8) of the cruise arm (7) is released.

The speed control pedal (2) is not held at a selected position.

Since the spring pulls the speed set rod (6) upward, the speed set rod (6) is pushed up.

2-M10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[2] RANGE GEAR SHIFT SECTION

(3) l~r~~$~'i3"L

IH.!;:::=#::t:~~~H

TRANSAXLE

Two kinds of power flow are selected by operating the range gear shift lever to shift the 16T-24T shiftier gear (4) on the spiral bevel gear shaft (3).

• Low Range

17T Gear Shaft (2) ~ Shiftier Gear (24T) (4) ~ Spiral

Bevel Pinion Shaft (3).

• High Range

25T Gear (1 ) ~ Shiftier Gear (16T) (4) ~ Spiral Bevel

Pinion Shaft (3).

(1) 25T Gear

(2) 17T Gear

(3) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft

(4) 16T-24T Shifter Gear

L: LowRange

H : High Range

W1014705

3TAAAAFKP007 A

[3] FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SECTION

(1 )

3TAAAAFKP007B

2-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive is selected by changing the position of 19T shiftier gear (2) with the front wheel drive lever.

• Front Wheel Drive "Disengaged"

When the front wheel drive lever is set to

"Disengaged" position, the 19T shiftier gear (2) is neutral and power is not transmitted to the front wheel drive shaft (1).

• Front Wheel Drive "Engaged"

When the front wheel drive lever is set to "Engaged" position, the 19T shiftier gear (2) slides to the right to engage with 13T-25T gear shaft (5). Therefore, the power from spiral bevel pinion shaft (3) is transmitted to the front wheel drive shaft (1) through the gears.

(1) Front Wheel Drive Shaft

(2) 19T Shifter Gear

(3) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft

(4) 12T Gear

(5) 13T-25T Gear Shaft

A: Front Wheel Drive

"Engaged"

W1014843

2-M11

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[4] DIFFERENTIAL GEAR SECTION

(1) Differential Gears

TRANSAXLE

(1) Differential Case

(2) Differential Pinion

(3) 37T Spiral Bevel Gear

(4) 10T Final Gear Shaft

(5) Differential Side Gear

(6) Differential Pinion Shaft

(7) 66T Final Gear

(8) Differential Pinion

(9) Differential Side Gear

W1018746

(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

3TAAAAFKP008A

1. During Straight Running

Rotation of the spiral bevel pinion is transmitted to the 37T spiral bevel gear (3), 10T final gear shaft (4), 66T final gear (7) and differential case (1).

When road resistance to the right and left wheels are equal. differential pinions (2), (8) and differential side gears

(5), (9) all rotate as a unit. Both rear axles received equal input, and both wheels turn at the same speed, allowing the tractor to go straight ahead.

At this time. differential pinions (2), (8) do not rotate around the differential pinion shaft (6).

2. During Turning

When the tractor turns. the road resistance to the inside tire increases. In other words, if one of tires slows down, revolution difference is generated in the differential side gears (5). (9). When rotation of one differential side gear becomes lower than the other, differential pinions (2), (8) begin rotating around differential pinion shaft (6). The other differential side gear is increased in speed by the speed increment of differential pinion shaft (6). This means that rotation of one rear axle is slowed down and that of the other rear axle is increased. Thus, the tractor turn smoothly without power loss.

The combined number of revolutions of the right and left differential side gears is always twice that of the spiral bevel gear (3). When spiral bevel gear revolution is 100 min-

1

(rpm), and if one of the differential side gears stops moving, the revolution ofthe other differential side gear becomes 200 min-

1

(rpm) and if one rotates at 50 min-

1

(rpm), the other rotates at 150 min-

1

(rpm).

2-M12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Differential Lock

(4)

TRANSAXLE

(5)

(1) Rear Axle

(2) Differential Lock Shifter

(3) Differential Case

(4) Differential Pinion

(5) Rear Axle

(6) Differential Lock Arm

(7) Differential Lock Shaft

(8) Differential Lock Shift Fork

(9) Differential Side Gear

(10) Differential Pinion Shaft

(11) Differential Pinion

W1015160

(7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

3TAAAAFKP008B

When resistance to the right and left tires are greatly different due to ground conditions or type of work, the tire with less resistance slips and prevents the tractor from moving ahead. To compensate for this drawback, the differential lock restricts the differential action and causes both rear axles to rotate as a unit.

When the differential lock pedal is stepped on, it causes the differential lock arm (6) and differential lock shaft (7) to rotate, which will move the differential lock shift fork (8) and the differential lock shiftier (2) toward the differential side gear (9). The pins on the differential lock shiftier (2) go into the holes in the differential case (3) to cause the differential case (3), differential lock shiftier (2) and differential side gear (9) to rotate as a unit.

Therefore. differential pinions (4), (11) are unable to rotate around differential pinion shaft (10) and identical revolutions are transmitted to the right and left rear axle (1). (5).

2-M13

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[5] BRAKE SECTION

(2) (3) (4) (5)(6) (7)

(1 )

TRANSAXLE

(9)

(10)

(1) Rear Axle LH

(2) Final Gear Shaft

(3) Shim

(4) Bearing Holder

(5) Friction Plate

(6) Actuator

(7) Steel Ball

(8) Cam Lever

(9) O-ring

(10) Rear Axle RH

(11) Brake Disc

(12) Internal Cir-Clip

(13) Brake Pedal

(14) Brake Rod

(15) Parking Brake Lock Pedal

A : Connects with Brake Cam

Lever and Brake Rod

W1019428

(12)(11) o o o o o

0

(15)

3TAAAAIKP005A

The mechanical wet disc brakes are used for the travelling brake. The brake is operated by the brake pedal (13) through the mechanical linkages and provide stable braking and require little adjustment.

The brake body is incorporated in the transmission case and axle cover filled with transmission oil.

For greater braking force, four brake discs (11) are provided at the brake shaft, and the friction plates (5) fixed to the transmission case is arranged between the brake discs (11) .

• Travelling Brake

When the brake pedal (13) is depressed, the brake rod pulls the brake cam lever (8).

Therefore, the cam plates also moves and rides on the steel balls set in the grooves of the transmission case to press the brake disc, the final gear shaft is braked by the frictional force generated by the cam plate and brake disc .

• Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied, the brake pedal (13) is locked by the parking brake lock pedal (15).

2-M14

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. PTO SYSTEM

[1] PTO CLUTCH AND VALVE

TRANSAXLE

______(5)

H----r----c

( 6 ) - ­ (7)

3TAAAAFKP011 A

D

(1) PTO Select Gear

(2) PTO Clutch Pack

(3) Rear PTO Shaft

(4) Transmission Case

(5) PTO Clutch Valve

(6) PTO Clutch Relief Valve

(7) Oil Filter Cartridge

A: From HST Pump Shaft

B : To Mid-PTO

C: From Power Steering

Controller

0: To Hydrostatic Transmission

The BX25 equipped with hydraulic independent PTa clutch (wet multi-plates type). Therefore, the engine power engages or disengages to the PTa shafts without stopping the tractor movement.

The PTa clutch pack (2) has four clutch discs, four drive plates, pressure plate, clutch piston and so on.

The clutch piston is actuated by hydraulic oil flow from the power steering controller.

The PTO clutch valve (5) controls the hydraulic oil flow from power steering controller to the PTa clutch pack (2) by operating the PTa clutch lever through the linkage.

2-M15

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1)_~,

(1)_

(a) (6) (b)

~' (1)_:~)_(7)

--­ ~ --..

(7)

(2) (3) (4) (2) (3) (8)

TRANSAXLE

• PTO Clutch Relief Valve

The PTO clutch relief valve is provided to control the

PTO operating pressure. When the oil pressure exceed the relief valve setting pressure, relief valve opens and the oil flows into PTO clutch and hydrostatic transmission.

(Reference)

• Relief valve setting pressure: 490 kPa

5.0 kgf/cm

2

71.2 psi

(1) Plug

(2) O-ring

(3) Spring

(4) Steel Ball

(5) PTO Clutch Valve

(6) HST Charge Relief Valve

(7) PTO Clutch Relief Valve

(8) Poppet

A : From Power Steering

Controller

B : To Hydrostatic

Transmission

C : To PTa Clutch Valve

(a) aid Type

(b) New Type

W1015382

3TAAAAFKP009A

(11 )

C--:

,

,,

3TAAAAFKP012A

• PTO Clutch "Engaged"

The oil from power steering controller flows into the

PTO clutch valve.

When the PTO clutch lever is set at the "Engaged" position, the PTO clutch valve rotates. Oil flows from the oil line through transmission case to the PTO clutch pack.

Oil entering the clutch pack pushes the clutch piston

(4) to engage the clutch pack. Power is transmitted from the HST pump shaft (1) through the PTO clutch to the clutch gear (2) and the PTO shafts.

(1) HST Pump Shaft

(2) Clutch Gear

(3) Clutch Case

(4) Clutch Piston

(5) Clutch Plate

(6) Clutch Disc

(7) Spring

(8) Spline Boss

(9) O-ring

(10) Transaxle Case

(11) Brake Disc

A : From PTa Clutch Valve

B : Power to PTa Shaft

C : PTa Clutch "Engaged"

W1015610

2-M16

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

,

,,

,

C--.j

3TAAAAFKP012B

TRANSAXLE

• PTa Clutch "Disengaged"

When the PTe clutch lever is set at the

"Disengaged" position, the PTe clutch valve closes the oil passage to the PTe clutch pack. The oil in the PTe clutch pack drain into the transaxle case (10). Thus the clutch piston (4) is pushed back by the spring (7).

When the clutch piston (4) is pushed back by the spring (7), the brake plate (11) is also moved to contract the brake disc (12) so as to stop the rotation and drag of the PTe shafts.

(1) HST Pump Shaft

(2) Clutch Gear

(3) Clutch Case

(4) Clutch Piston

(5) Clutch Plate

(6) Clutch Disc

(7) Spring

(8) Spline Boss

(9) O-ring

(10) Transaxle Case

(11) Brake Plate

(12) Brake Disc

C : PTO Clutch "Disengaged"

W1015793

2-M17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601. WSM

[2] MID AND REAR PTO SECTION

TRANSAXLE

(7)

3TAAAAFKP013A

(1) HST Pump Shaft

(2) 12T Clutch Gear

(3) PTO Clutch Pack

(4) Rear PTO Shaft

(5) 23T Mid PTO Gear

(6) 24T Mid PTO Idle Gear

(7) Mid-PTO Shaft

(8) 2ST PTO Select Gear

(9) 11T Gear Shaft

Three kinds of power flow are selected by operating the PTO select lever to shift the PTO select gear (8) on the

11T gear shaft (9).

• Mid-PTO Position (A)

PTO Clutch Pack (3) -4 12T Gear Clutch (2) -4 PTO Select Gear (8) -4 23T Mid PTO Gear (5) -4 24T Mid PTO

Idle Gear (6)

-4

Mid-PTO Shaft (7).

• Rear PTO Position (8)

PTO Clutch Pack (3) -4 12T Gear Clutch (2) -4 PTO Select Gear (8) -4 11T Gear Shaft (9) -4 Rear PTO Shaft (4).

• Mid and Rear PTO Position

A and 8 at the same time.

2-M18

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM

4. OTHERS

[1] HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVE GEAR SECTION

TRANSAXLE

(1) HST Pump Shaft

(2) Spline Boss

(3) Idle Gear

(4) Hydraulic Pump Drive Gear

Shaft

(5) Hydraulic Pump Drive Gear

(6) Hydraulic Pump Drive Gear

Shaft

(7) Hydraulic Pump

(8) Flow Priority Valve

(9) Relief Valve (3P Hitch)

(10) Transmission Case

W1016433

3TAAAAFKP014A

The hydraulic pump (7) is mounted to the transmission case (10) and driven by the hydraulic pump drive gear (5).

The spline boss (2) mounted on the HST pump shaft drives the hydraulic pump drive gear (5) mounted on the hydraulic pump drive gear shaft (4) through the idle gear (3).

2-M19

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................... 2-S1

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 2-S5

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES .............................................................................. 2-S7

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING ...................................... 2-S8

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ............................................................... 2-S8

[2] PREPARATION ...................................................................................... 2-S16

(1) Separating Transaxle ........................................................................ 2-S 16

[3] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ................................................ 2-S23

(1) Hydrostatic Transmission .................................................................. 2-S23

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder ............................................................................. 2-S29

(3) Transaxle Shafts ............................................................................... 2-S30

(4) Assembling Shafts ............................................................................ 2-S38

[4J SERVICING ............................................................................................ 2-S40

(1) Hydrostatic Transmission .................................................................. 2-S40

(2) Transaxle Case ................................................................................. 2-S42

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION

Symptom

System Will Not

Operate in Either

Direction

Oil level is low

Probable Cause

Speed control pedal linkage defective

Charge pressure is too low

Check and high pressure relief valve does not move smoothly

Component parts defective

Vibration and Noise Oil level is too low

Speed control pedal linkage defective

Charge pressure is too low

Check and high pressure relief valve does not move smoothly

Component part is defective

TRANSAXLE

Solution

Check oil level or fill oil to proper level

Repair linkage

Solution order

1. Replace oil filter cartridge

2. Check charge pressure

3. Inspect or flush charge relief valve

Inspect or replace check and high pressure relief valve

Replace hydrostatic transmission assembly

Check oil level or fill oil to proper level

Repair linkage

Solution order

1. Replace oil filter cartridge

2. Check charge pressure

3. Inspect or flush charge relief valve

Inspect or replace check and high pressure relief valve

Replace hydrostatic transmission assembly

I

Reference

Page

G-13

2-S22

G-13

2-S12

2-S40

2-S40

2-S23

G-13

2-S20

G-13

2-S12

2-S40

2-S40

2-S23

W1022927

I

2-S1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRAN5AXLE

HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION (Continued)

Symptom Probable Cause

Loss of Power Oil level is low

Transmission Oil

Over Heats

Machine Will Not

Stop in Neutral

Position

System Operates in

One Direction Only

5peed control pedal linkage defective

Charge pressure is too low

Check and high pressure relief valve does not move smoothly

Component parts defective

Low transmission oil level

Radiator net clogged

Excessive machine load

Improper charge pressure

5peed control linkage is out of adjustment or sticking

5peed control linkage defective

Check and high pressure relief valve defective

Solution

Check oil level or fill oil to proper level

Repair linkage

1. Replace oil filter cartridge

2. Check charge pressure

3. Inspect or flush charge relief valve

Inspect or replace check and high pressure relief valve

Replace hydrostatic transmission assembly

Fill transmission oil level up to proper level

Clean radiator net

Reduce machine load

1 . Check high relief pressure

2. Replace transmission oil filter cartridge

3. Replace check and high pressure relief valve

4. Inspect and replace charge relief valve

Repair or replace linkage

Adjust neutral position

Repair or replace linkage

Replace check and high pressure relief valve

Reference

Page

G-13

2-520,522

G-13

2-512

2-540

2-540

2-540

G-13

-

-

G-13

G-13

2-540

2-540

2-520,522

2-510

2-520,522

2-540 i

W1026435

2-52

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601. WSM

TRAVELLING GEAR SHIFT SECTION

Symptom Probable Cause

Noise from

Transmission

Gear Slip Out of

Mesh

Transmission oil insufficient

Gear worn or broken

Bearings worn

Shift fork spring tension insufficient

Shift fork or shifter worn

Shift fork bent

Solution

Refill

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

TRANSAXLE

Reference

Page

G-7,2-S16

2-S39

2-S39

2-S39

W1013580

DIFFERENTIAL GEAR SECTION

Excessive or

Unusual Noise at All

Time

Improper backlash between spiral bevel pinion and bevel gear

Improper backlash between differential pinion and differential side gear

Adjust

Adjust

2-S45

2-S44

Bearing worn

Insufficient or improper type of transmission fluid used

Noise while Turning Differential pinions or differential side gears worn or damaged

Differential lock binding (does not disengaged)

Differential Lock Can

Not Be Set

Bearing wom

Differential lock shift fork damaged

Differential Lock

Pedal Does Not

Return

Differential lock shifter mounting pin damaged

Differential lock pin damaged

Differential lock pedal return spring weaken or damaged

Differential lock fork shaft rusted

Replace -

Replenish or change G-7,2-S16

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair

2-S34,

2-S39

2-S35

-

2-S35

2-S35

2-S35

2-S21

2-S35

W1013718

BRAKE SECTION

Brake Drags

Poor Braking Force

Brake pedal free travel too small

Ball holes of actuator for uneven wear

Brake pedal return spring weaken or broken

Brake cam rusted

Brake pedal free travel excessive

Brake disc worn

Actuator warped

Brake cam or lever damaged

Transmission fluid improper

Adjust

Replace

Replace

Repair

Adjust

Replace

Replace i

Replace

Change

G-22

2-S46

2-S21

2-S36

G-22

2-S36

2-S36

2-S36

G-7,2-S16

W1010878

2-S3

6X25, RCK54(P)-236X, RCK606-23BX, LA240, B1601, WSM

PTO SECTION

Symptom

PTO Clutch Slip

PTO Shaft Does Not

Rotate

PTO Clutch

Operating Pressure is Low

PTO Clutch Drags

Probable Cause

Operating pressure is low

PTO clutch valve malfunctioning

Clutch disc or drive plate excessively wom

Deformation of clutch piston

PTO clutch malfunctioning

Transmission oil improper or insufficient

Relief valve malfunctioning

Brake plate excessive worn

Clutch spring weaken or broken

Deformation of pressure plate or steel plate

TRANSAXLE

Solution

Check

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Reference

Page

2-515

2-523

2-537

2-537

2-537

Replenish or change

Check or replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

G-7,2-516

2-M16

2-537

2-537

2-537

W1011002

2-54

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Charge Relief Valve

[Oil temperature at 50 °C , 122 OF]

Setting Pressure

High Pressure Relief Valve

(Forward and Reverse)

[Oil temperature at 50 °C, 122 OF]

PTO Clutch

PTO Clutch Disc

Separate Plate

Back Plate

Setting Pressure

Operating

Pressure

Thickness

Thickness

Thickness

Factory Specification

0.55 to 0.75 kPa

5.6 to 7.7 kgf/cm

2

79.8 to 108.8 psi

19 to 22 MPa

193.8 to 224.4 kgf/cm

2

2775 to 3190 psi

1.0 to 1.3 MPa

10.2 to 13.3 kgf/cm

2

145.0 to 188.5 psi

1.50 to 1.70 mm

0.060 to 0.066 in.

0.945 to 1.055 mm

0.0373 to 0.0413 in.

1.9 to 2.1 mm

0.075 to 0.082 in.

Clutch Piston Flatness

TRANSAXLE

Allowable Limit

-

I

Pressure Plate and Steel Plate

Clutch Spring

PTO Brake Disc

PTO Brake Plate

Differential Case

Differential Side Gear

Differential Pinion Shaft to Differential

Pinion

Differential Pinion

Differential Pinion Shaft

Flatness

Free Length

Thickness

Thickness

Differential Case to Differential Side Gear Clearance

I.D.

O.D.

Clearance

Differential Pinion

(I.D. )

Differential Pinion

Shaft

(O.D.)

-

38.5 mm

1.52 in.

2.9 to 3.1 mm

0.115 to 0.122 in.

1.9t02.1 mm

0.075 to 0.082 in.

0.050 to 0.151 mm

0.0020 to 0.0059 in.

38.000 to 38.062 mm

1.4961 to 1.4985 in.

37.911 to 37.950 mm

1.4926 to 1.4941 in.

0.080 to 0.122 mm

0.0031 to 0.0048 in.

20.060 to 20.081 mm

0.7898 to 0.7906 in.

19.959 to 19.980 mm

0.7858 to 0.7866 in.

1.35 mm

0.053 in.

0.80 mm

0.0310 in.

1.85 mm

0.073 in.

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

0.20 mm

0.0079 in.

34.5mm

1.36 in.

2.70 mm

0.106 in.

1.85 mm

0.073 in.

0.30 mm

0.0118 in.

-

0.30 mm

0.0118 in.

-

!

W1013874

2-S5

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

(Continued)

Item

Differential Pinion to Differential Side Gear Backlash

Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft to Spiral Bevel

Gear

Actuator and Bearing Holder

Backlash

I Flatness

Cam Plate and Ball Height

Brake Disc

Friction Plate

Thickness

Thickness

TRANSAXLE

Factory Specification

0.15 to 0.30 mm

0.0059 to 0.0118 in.

0.10 to 0.30 mm

0.0039 to 0.0118 in.

-

I

~~~9 to 22.99 mm

. 12 to 0.9051 in.

3.3 to 3.5 mm

0.130 to 0.138 in.

1.92 to 2.08 mm

0.0756 to 0.0819 in.

Allowable Limit

0.40 mm

0.0157 in.

-

0.30 mm

0.0118 in.

22.40 mm

0.8819 in.

3.0mm

0.118in.

1.52 mm

0.0598 in.

W1033005

2-S6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES

Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.

(For general use screws, bolts and nuts: See page G-B.)

Item

Charge relief valve checking plug (R 1/4)

Hexagon socket head plug (R 1/4)

Check and high pressure valve screw

PTa clutch operating pressure plug (R 1IB)

RaPS mounting nut

Fuel tank stay mounting bolt

Fender bracket mounting bolt

Rear wheel mounting bolt

Sub frame mounting bolt and nut (M14)

Sub frame mounting bolt and nut (M16)

Hitch plate mounting bolt and nut (M14)

Fender bracket mounting bolt and nut (M 14)

Transaxle assembly mounting bolt (M12)

Transaxle assembly mounting bolt (M 14)

Rear coupling mounting bolt

Front coupling mounting bolt (MB)

HST fan mounting bolt (MB)

Hydraulic control lever mounting bolt and nut

HST front cover mounting bolt and nut

Check and high pressure relief valve plug (G 1/2)

Hydraulic cylinder mounting bolt

Transaxle case front cover mounting bolt (MB)

Hydraulic pump assembly mounting bolt (M6)

Hydraulic pump assembly mounting bolt (M8)

Rear PTa cover mounting bolt (MB)

Rear axle case (RH) mounting bolt (MB)

66T final gear mounting bolt

N'm

29 to 44

29 to 44

2.5 to 3.0

13 to 22

124 to 147

4B.1 to 55.9

124 to 147

10B.5 to 130.2

147

196

124 to 147

124 to 147

62.B to 72.6

124 to 147

23.6 to 27.4

23.6 to 27.4

9.B to 11.3

17.7 to 20.6

1B.0 to 21.0

59.0 to 7B.0

39.2 to 44.1

29 to 34

B.O to 9.0

18.0 to 21.0

1B.0 to 21.0

1B.0 to 21.0

60.8 to 70.6 kgf'm

3.0 to 4.5

3.0 to 4.5

0.26 to 0.31

1.3 to 2.2

12.6 to 15.0

4.9 to 5.7

12.6 to 15.0

11.1 to 13.3

15.0

20.0

12.6 to 15.0

12.6 to 15.0

6.4 to 7.4

12.6 to 15.0

2.4 to 2.B

2.4 to 2.B

1.0 to 1.2

1.B to 2.1

1.B to 2.1

6.0 to B.O

4.0 to 4.5

3.0 to 3.5

0.8 to 0.9

1.8 to 2.1

1.8 to 2.

1.B to 2.1

6.2 to 7.2

TRANSAXLE ft·lbs

21.4 to 32.5

21.4 to 32.5

1.Bt02.2

9.6 to 16.2

91.2 to 10B

35.4 to 41.2

91.2 to 10B

BO to 96

10B.5

147

91.2 to 10B

91.2 to 10B

46.3 to 53.5

91.2 to 10B

17.4 to 20.2

17.4 to 20.2

7.2 to B.3

13.0 to 15.2

13.3 to 15.5

43.5 to 57.5

2B.9 to 32.5

21.4 to 25.1

5.9 to 6.6

13.3 to 15.5

13.3 to 15.5

13.3 to 15.5

44.B to 52.1

W1012736

2-S7

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

Adjusting Maximum Speed

• Forward

1. Depress the speed control pedal (1) all the way and lengthen the stopper bolt (2) until it touches the speed control pedal (2).

2. Adjust the stopper bolt (2) length A to 17.0 mm (0.67 in.) and lock it securely .

• Reverse

1. Adjust the stopper bolt (3) length B to 17.5 mm (0.69 in.) and lock it securely.

(Reference)

Stopper bolt length Reference

Forward

Reverse

17.0mm

0.67 in.

17.5mm

0.69 in.

Maximum speed

(1) Speed Control Pedal

(2) Stopper Bolt (Forward)

(3) Stopper Bolt (Reverse)

Reference

Forward

Reverse

13.0 to 14.0 km/h

8.1 to B.B mph

10.0 to 11.0 km/h

6.3 to 6.9 mph

A: Stopper Bolt Length (Forward)

B : Stopper Bolt Length (Reverse)

W1012590

2-S8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Preparation before HST Adjustment

A

CAUTION

• Park the machine on a firm and level ground.

1. Place the wooden blocks at the front and the rear side of the wheels not to move the tractor.

2. Lift up the rear wheels (1) safely by the rigid jacks.

3. Shift the front wheel drive lever (2) to "OFF" position (A).

4. Remove the rear right wheel from the tractor.

(A) "OFF" Position (1) Rear Wheel

(2) Front Wheel Drive Lever

(3) Neutral Adjuster

(4) Lock Screw

W1047776

3TAAAAFKP0498

2-S9

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Adjustment of HST Neutral Position

1. Start the engine.

2. Keep the engine at the maximum revolution.

3. Shift the range shift lever (1) to "Hi" position (8).

4. Loosen the locking screw (5).

• NOTE

• When adjusting the HST neutral position, loosen the locking screw approximately 2 turns counterclockwise not to drop the nut inside.

• Make sure 4WD lever is 2WD before making adjustment.

(Forward to Neutral Position)

5. Depress the speed control pedal (3) to "Forward" speed position, and release the foot from the speed control pedal (3). Check that the rear axle (or the wheel) stops rotating.

If the rear axle (or the wheel) does not stop rotating, move the position of the locking screw (5) to the machine front side to stop rotating.

(Reverse to Neutral Position)

6. Depress the speed control pedal (3) to "Reverse" speed position, and release the foot from the speed control pedal (3). Check the rear axle (or the wheel) stops rotating. If the rear axle (or the wheel) does not stop rotating, adjust the locking screw (5) to stop rotating.

7. After adjusting the neutral position, tighten the lock screw (5) securely.

(1) Range Gear Shift Lever

(2) Front Wheel Drive

(3) Speed Control Pedal

(4) Neutral Adjust Lever

(5) Locking Screw

(6) Screw Driver

(A) 4WD "OFF" Position

(8) "Hi" Position

(e) FORWARD

(D) REVERSE

W1012819

2-S10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601! WSM

3TAAAAFKP049A

3TAAAAIKP006A

(6)

TRANSAXLE

Checking and Adjusting HST Neutral Spring (for Dynamic

Braking)

A

WARNING

• Do not operate if tractor move on level ground with foot off speed control pedal.

• If tractor moves on level ground with foot off the pedal, or, if the pedal is too slow in returning to "Neutral" position when removing the foot from the pedal, adjust the HST neutral spring.

The HST neutral spring located under the front right side of the fender can adjust returning speed of speed control pedal.

Since the HST neutral spring tension is weakened, the HST tension should be checked and adjusted every 100 hours.

1. Checking the HST neutral spring tension: Dynamic braking

- Start the engine and hold the maximum engine speeds.

- Operate the machine on the concrete level ground.

- Shift the range gear shift lever to "High" position.

- Depress the speed control pedal to "Forward".

- Release the foot from the speed control pedal.

- Check the distance between the foot releasing point and the machine stopping point.

- If the distance is more than approximately 3 m (10 feet), strengthen the HST neutral spring tension so that the machine will stop in approximately 3 m (10 feet) after releasing the foot from the speed control pedal.

(Reference)

Distance (L) between the foot releasing point and the machine stopping point

Reference

Approximately 3 m (10 feet)

2. Remove the step from the machine.

- Loosen the lock nut (2).

- Turn the adjusting nut (3) halfturn to pull the HST neutral spring

(1 ).

- Tighten and lock the lock nut (2).

Start the engine and check dynamic brake as mentioned former.

- If the machine will not stop with dynamic brake in approximately

3 m (10 feet). adjust the neutral spring again.

(Reference)

• The feeling of dynamic braking can be adjusted by changing the arm (6) position of damper (5). length (M) of adjusting rod at shipping the machine from the factory

Reference

10mm

0.39 in.

(1) HST Neutral Spring

(2) lock Nut

(3) Adjusting Nut

(4) Adjusting Rod

(5) Damper

(6) Arm

(A) Foot Releasing Point

(8) Machine Stopping Point

L: Distance between Foot Releasing

Point and the Machine Stopping

Point

M : Length of Adjusting Rod from

Stay

W1079634

2-S11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Charge Relief Pressure

A

CAUTION

• When checking, park the tractor on flat ground, and apply the parking brake.

1. Remove the plug (R 1/4) (1) from the front cover, then install the adaptor (R 1/4) and pressure gauge.

2. Set the range gear shift lever to "Neutral" position.

3. Start the engine and run it at the maximum speed.

4. Read the pressure gauge to measure the charge relief pressure.

5. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, check the charge relief valve and related hydraulic components .

• NOTE

• When reinstalling the hexagon socket head plug, apply liquid lock (Three Bond 1324 or its equivalent) to the plug.

Charge relief pressure

Factory spec. (Oil temperature at 50 ·C,

122 OF)

0.55 to 0.75 MPa

5.6 to 7.7 kgf/cm

2

79.8 to 108.8 psi

TIghtening torque

Charge relief pressure port plug (R 1/4)

29 to 44 N'm

3.0 to 4.5 kgf·m

21.4 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Plug

W1013009

High Relief Pressure (Forward)

A

CAUTION

• When checking, park the tractor on flat ground, and apply the parking brake.

1. Remove the hexagon socket head plug (R 1/4) from P2 (2), then install the adaptor, cable and pressure gauge.

2. Start the engine and run it at maximum speed.

3. Set the range gear shift lever to "Hi" position.

4. Depress the speed control pedal to "Forward", and read the pressure gauge to measure the high relief pressure.

5. If the measurement is not same as factory specification, check the high pressure relief valve and related hydraulic components.

High relief pressure

(Forward)

Factory spec. (Oil temperature at 50 ·C,

122 OF)

19 to 22 MPa

193.8 to 224.4 kgf/cm

2

2755 to 3190 psi

TIghtening torque

Hexagon socket head plug

(P1 and P2 port)

29 to 44 N'm

3.0 to 4.5 kgf·m

21.4 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

• IMPORTANT

• Measure quickly so that the high pressure relief valve may not be in operation more than 10 seconds.

• NOTE

• When reinstalling the hexagon socket head plug, apply liquid lock (Three Bond 1324 or its equivalent) to the plug.

(1) P1 Port (Reverse) (2) P2 Port (Forward)

W1013275

2-S12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

High Relief Pressure (Reverse)

A

CAUTION

• When checking, park the tractor on flat ground, and apply the parking brake.

1. Remove the hexagon socket head plug (R 1/4) from P1 (1), then install the adaptor, cable and pressure gauge.

2. Start the engine and run it at maximum speed.

3. Set the range gear shift lever to "Hi" position.

4. Depress the speed control pedal to "Reverse", and read the pressure gauge to measure the high relief pressure.

5. If the measurement is not same as factory specification, check the high pressure relief valve and related hydraulic components.

High relief pressure

(Reverse)

Factory spec. (Oil temperature at 50 ·C,

122 OF)

19 to 22 MPa

193.8 to 224.4 kgflcm

2

2755 to 3190 psi

Tightening torque

Hexagon socket head plug

(P1 and P2 port)

29 to 44 N'm

3.0 to 4.5 kgf.m

21.4 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

• IMPORTANT

• Measure quickly so that the high pressure relief valve may not be in operation more than 10 seconds .

• NOTE

• When reinstalling the hexagon socket head plug, apply liquid lock (Three Bond 1324 or its equivalent) to the plug.

(1) P1 Port (Reverse) (2) P2 Port (Forward)

W1040164

2-S13

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAFKP051A

(3)

3XVAAAB3P140A

(4)

--",~~:::=T

(5)

(1)

TRANSAXLE

Readjustment of Relief Valve (When the HST does not Work

Due to its Loose Hexagon Socket Head Screw)

• IMPORTANT

• KUBOTA does not recommend the readjustment of relief valve. KUBOTA recommends with genuine parts.

• As the HST may be damaged ifthe pressure is setto high by mistake, be careful when adjusting it.

• NOTE

• The relief pressure is set in between 20.1 to 21.1 MPa (205 to

215 kgf/cm

2

, 2920 to 3060 psi) when shipped from the factory. But, for the purpose of after-sales services, as it is impossible to reset the pressure precisely as set in the factory, its setting range is defined as a slightly wider range between 15.0 to 20.0 MPa (153 to 203 kgf/cm

2,

2180 to 2900 psi).

1. Measure the pre-adjustment distance A.

2. Compress the spring of the relief valve with a relief valve assembling tool (3).

3. Then, find the distance A by turning the poppet (4) with a screwdriver.

Reference: The distance A changes by about 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) per one tu rn of the poppet (4).

4. Repeat the same operation a few times to find the distance A as it is difficult to acquire at the first time.

5. After finding the distance A, hold the setscrew (6) to a vice and fasten the hexagon socket head screw (2) with specified torque.

On this occasion, use a copper plate, etc. for the vice jaws not to damage the setscrew (6).

6. Install the relief valve in the HST.

7. Check the relief pressure as indicated in page 2-S12 and 2-S13.

The distance A is for refresh only. Make sure to check the relief pressure after readjustment.

8. If the relief pressure does not fall within the readjustment pressure range, repeat the processes of the above.

Reference: The pressure changes by 1.5 MPa (15 kgf/cm

2

, 210 psi) per 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) in distance A nghtening torque

Hexagon socket head screw

25 to 29 N'm

2.5 to 3.0 kgf·m

18 to 211bHt

Relief valve readjusting pressure

Factory spec.

15.0 to 20.0 MPa

153 to 203 kgf/cm

2

2180 to 2900 psi

Distance A of relief valve (Forward)

Distance A of relief valve (Reverse, $1.5 mm orifice)

Reference value

Reference value

(1) Relief Valve Assembly

(2) Hexagon Socket Head Screw

(3) Relief Valve Assembling Tool

(4) Poppet

39.10 to 39.20 mm

1.540 to 1.543 in.

38.60 to 38.70 mm

1.520 to 1.523 in.

(5) Valve Seat

(6) Setscrew

A: Distance

W1082809

2-S14

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3UBAAABNP060C

(a)

TRANSAXlE

PTO Clutch Operating Pressure

A

CAUTION

• When checking, park the tractor on flat ground, apply the parking brake.

1. Remove the under panel.

2. Connect the adaptor of A between the power steering return hose (1), then connect the adaptor B and the pressure gauge with adaptor A.

3. Start the engine and set at maximum speed.

4. Measure the pressure.

5. If the measurement is not same as factory speCifications, check the PTO relief valve and related hydraulic components .

• IMPORTANT

• Do not engage PTO while measuring it.

PTO clutch operating pressure

Factory spec.

1.0 to 1.3 MPa

10.2 to 13.3 kgf/cm

2

145.0 to 188.5 psi

Tightening torque

PTO clutch valve plug

(R 1/8)

13 to 22 N'm

1.3 to 2.2 kgf·m

9.6 to 16.2 ft-Ibs

Condition

• Engine speed : Maximum

• Oil temperature: 45 to 55°C

113t0131°F

(1) Power Steering Return Hose A: Adaptor Tee, Swivel (9/16-18)

B: AdaptorB

(a) Connect Pressure Gauge

(b) Connect Power Steering Hose

Return

W1013552

Brake Pedal Free Travel

1. See page G-22.

W1013715

2-S15

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

[2] PREPARATION

• Before proceeding this section, disassembling the loader assembling and backhoe. (Refer to section 8 and 9.)

(1) Separating Transaxle

Draining Transmission Fluid

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop the engine before checking and changing the transmission fluid.

1. Place oil pan under the tractor.

2. Remove the drain plug (1) at the bottom of the transmission case.

3. Drain the transmission fluid and reinstall the drain plug.

(When refilling)

• Fill new oil from filling port after removing the filling plug (2) up to the upper notch on the dipstick (3).

• After running the engine for few minutes, stop it and check the oil level again, if low, add oil to prescribed level.

• IMPORTANT

• Use only multi-grade transmission oil. Use of other oils may damage the transmission or hydraulic system.

Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT". (See page

G-7.)

• Never work the tractor immediately after changing the transmission oil. Keeping the engine at medium speed for a few minutes to prevents damage to the transmission.

• Do not mix different brands oil together.

Transmission fluid capacity

11.6 L

3.1 U.S.gals

2.6 Imp.gals

(1) Drain Plug

(2) Filling Plug

(3) Dipstick

(A) Oil level is acceptable within this range

W1014039

Battery

A

CAUTION

• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. When connecting, connect the positive cable to the battery first.

1. Remove the under panel.

2. Disconnect the negative cable (2) from the battery.

3. Disconnect the positive cable (3) form the battery (1) and remove the battery (1 ).

(3) Positive Cable (1) Battery

(2) Negative Cable

W1032888

2-S16

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

RolI·Over Protective Structures (ROPS) and Seat

1. Disconnect the lead wires from the hazard lights (2), (4) and turn signal lights (3), (5).

2. Remove the ROPS mounting nuts, and remove the ROPS (1).

3. Disconnect the seat switch connectors.

4. Remove the snap pin (7) and remove the seat (6).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque ROPS mounting nut

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

(1) ROPS

(2) Hazard Light LH

(3) Turn Signal Light LH

(4) Hazard Light RH

(5) Turn Signal Light RH

(6) Seat

(7) Snap Pin

Wi 027220

Speed Control Pedal and Step

1. Remove the valve covers (3).

2. Remove the speed control pedals (1) and step (2).

(1) Speed Control Pedal

(2) Step

(3) Valve Cover

W1025389

Lever Grips and Fender

1. Disconnect the electric outlet connector (6).

2. Remove the lowering speed adjusting knob (5) and cutting height adjusting dial knob (4).

3. Remove the lever grips (2).

4. Remove the fender (1) with lever guide (3).

(1) Fender

(2) Lever Grip

(3) Lever Guide

(4) Cutting Height Adjusting Dial Knob

(5) Lowering Speed Adjusting Knob

(6) Electric Outlet

W1014865

Fuel Tank

1. Drain the fuel.

2. Disconnect the lead wire from fuel level sensor and fuel hoses from the fuel tank (1).

3. Remove the fuel tank stays (2), (3) and cushions, then remove the fuel tank (1).

4. Remove the PTO cover (4).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque

Fuel tank stay mounting bolt and nut

48.1 to 55.9 N'm

4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m

35.4 to 41.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Fuel Tank

(2) Fuel Tank Stay LH

(3) Fuel Tank Stay RH

(4) PTO Cover

Wi 027629

2-517

BX25, RCK54{P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Fender Center Stay

1. Remove the fender bracket (2).

2. Remove the fender center stay (1).

(When reassembling)

TIghtening torque

(1) Fender Center Stay

Fender bracket mounting bolt

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 Kgf·m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

(2) Fender Bracket

W1026166

Connecting Bar and Wire harness

1. Remove the wireharness clamps and move the wireharness (1) forward.

2. Remove the connecting bar (2) mounting screws.

3. Disconnect the rear lift link LH (4).

4. Remove the lift arm LH (3).

(1) Wireharness

(2) Connecting Bar

(3) Lift Arm LH

(4) Rear Lift Link LH

W1045749

Rear Wheel

1. Remove the rear wheels (1) and (2).

(When reassembling)

TIghtening torque

(1) Rear Wheel LH

Rear wheet mounting bolt

108.5 to 130,2 N·m

11,1 to 13.2 kgf-m

80 to 96 ft -Ibs

(2) Rear Wheel RH

W1014976

3TAAAAFKP020A

2-S18

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Sub Frame Fender Bracket and Hitch Plate

1. Remove the sub frame (3).

2. Remove the hitch plate (4).

3. Remove the fender brackets (1), (2).

(When reassembling)

• Do not firmly tighten all screws, bolts and nuts until most components are attached.

TIghtening torque

Sub frame mounting bolt and nut (M14)

Sub frame mounting bolt and nut (M16)

Hitch plate mounting bolt and nut (M14)

Fender bracket mounting bolt and nut (M14)

147 N'm

15.0 kgf·m

108.5 ft-Ibs

196 N'm

20.0 kgf·m

147 ft-Ibs

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

(1) Fender Bracket LH

(2) Fender Bracket RH

(3) Sub Frame

(4) Hitch Plate

W1024983

2-S19

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

TRANSAXLE

Transaxle Assembly

1. Remove the differential lock rod (1).

2. Remove the brake rod (3).

3. Disconnect the pipes (2).

4. Disconnect the connector (4).

5. Remove the rear coupling mounting bolt (7).

6. Disconnect the power steering pipes (8).

7. Remove the speed control rod (6).

8. Remove the wire harness clamps

9. Remove the frame brackets (10).

(When reassembling)

• Tighten the smaller bolt (M12) first.

• Before mounting the transaxle assembly on the tractor main frame, check the flatness of the frame brackets with a straight edge securely.

Tightening torque

Transaxle assembly mounting bolt (M12)

Transaxle assembly mounting bolt (M14)

Rear coupling mounting bolt (M8)

62.8 to 72.6 N'm

6.4 to 7.4 kgf·m

46.3 to 53.5 ft-Ibs

124 to 147 N·m

12.6 to 15.0 kgf'm

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

23.6 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m

17.4 to 20.2 ft-Ibs

(Reference)

• Speed control rod length (7) : 371 mm (14.6 in.)

(1) Differential Lock Rod

(2) Pipe

(3) Brake Rod

(4) Connector

(5) Front Wheel Drive Shaft

(6) Speed Control Rod

(7) Rear Coupling Mounting Bolt

(8) Power Steering Pipe

(9) Frame Bracket

(10) Frame Bracket

W1016000

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Brake Pedal and Propeller Shaft

1. Unhook the spring (3) and the parking plate (4).

2. Removing the spring pin (5) from the brake pedal (1). Disconnect the brake spring (2) and remove the brake pedal (1).

3. Disconnect the front coupling (6) from the engine.

4. Remove the propeller shaft assembly.

5. Remove the HST fan from the propeller shaft.

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to inside of the front coupling and the rear coupling.

Tightening torque

Front coupling mounting bolt (MB)

HST fan mounting bolt

(M8)

23.5 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.B kgf'm

17.4 to 20.3 ft-Ibs

9.B to 11.3 N'm

1.0 to 1.2 kgf·m

7.2 to 8.3 ft-Ibs

(1) Brake Pedal

(2) Brake Spring

(3) Spring

(4) Parking Plate

(5) Spring Pin

(6) Front Coupling

(7) Rear Coupling

(8) HST Fan

W1016476

3TAAAAFKP12SA"';;

Differential Lock Pedal

1. Remove the differential lock return spring (1).

2. Remove the rue ring cotter (3).

3. Turn and remove the differential lock pedal (2).

(1) Spring

(2) Differential Lock Pedal

(3) Rue Ring Cotter

(4) Differential Lock Rod

W1016728

(4)

( 3 ) - - - ­

3TAAAAFKP126A

2-S21

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1 )

TRANSAXLE

Speed Control Pedal, HST Damper and Cruise Rod

1. Remove the speed control pedal (1).

2. Remove the rue ring cotter (4).

3. Remove the HST dumper (2).

4. Remove the release arm (7).

5. Remove the spring (6) and the cruise rod (5).

6. Remove the cruise lock (8).

(1) Speed Control Pedal

(2) HST Dumper

(3) HST Rear Pedal

(4) Rue Ring Cotter

(5) Cruise Rod

(6) Spring

(7) Release Arm

(8) Cruise Lock

3TAAAAJKP003A

W1016858

(5)_-~1

2-S22

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

[3] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Hydrostatic Transmission

Levers and Mower Lift Arm

1. Tap out the spring pin from the range gear shift lever (1) and front wheel drive lever (3), then remove the both levers.

2. Remove the hydraulic control lever (2).

3. Remove the PTO select lever (4) and PTO clutch control lever

(5).

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to inside of the front coupling and rear mounting.

3TAAAAFKP027B nghtening torque

Hydraulic control lever mounting bolt and nut

17.7 to 20.6 N'm

1.8 to 2.1 kgf·m

13.0 to 15.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Range Gear Shift Lever

(2) Hydraulic Control Lever

(3) Front Wheel Drive Lever

(4) PTO Select Lever

(5) PTO Clutch Control Lever

W1017118

PTO Clutch Valve

1. Remove the stopper (1).

2. Draw out the PTO clutch valve (2) from the transaxle assembly.

(When reassembling)

1. Clean the oil passages (4).

2. Apply the transmission fluid to the O-rings (3).

(1) Stopper

(2) PTO Clutch Valve

(3) O-ring

(4) Oil Passage

W1086372

(4) (4)

3TAAAAFKP053A

(4)

2-523

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. lA240, 6T601, WSM

TRANSAXLE

HST Front Cover

1. Remove the internal cir-clip (4).

2. Remove the HST front cover.

3. Remove the HST front cover (1) not to damage the oil seal (5).

4. Remove the center section (6).

(When reassembling)

1. Do not damage the oil seal (5).

2. Tighten the HST mounting bolts and the nut to the factory specifications.

Tightening torque nghtening torque

HST front cover mounting bolt (MS)

HST front cover mounting nut (MS)

18.0 to 21.0 N'm

1.8 to 2.1 kgf·m

13.3 to 15.5 ft-Ibs

1S.0 to 21.0 N'm

1.S to 2.1 kgf·m

13.3 to 15.5 ft-Ibs

(1) HST Front Cover

(2) Transaxle Assembly

(3) Bolt

(4) Internal Cir-clip

(5) Oil Seal

(6) Center Section

W10S6612

Center Section and Valve Plates

1. Remove the valve plates (2).

(When reassembling)

1. Check the direction of the groove (3).

2. Install the valve plates (2) to the anchor pins (4) securely.

3. Install the groove of the valve plate (pump plate) to the engine side.

(1) Center Section

(2) Valve Plate

(3) Groove

(4) Anchor Pin

W10S6956

2-S24

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

(1

TRANSAXLE

Check and High Pressure Relief Valve Plug

1. Remove the check and high pressure relief plug (G 1/2).

(When reassembling) lightening torque

Check and high pressure relief valve plug (G 1/2)

59 to 78 N'm

6.0 to 8.0 kgf'm

44 to 571bHt

(1) Center Section

(2) Plug

(3) Plug

W1087469

(2)

(1) \ ~\~,

.

(3)

3TAAAAIKPOO7A

.

(4)

Check and High Pressure Relief Valve

1. After removing the plug (1), draw out the spring (3) and the check and high pressure relief valve assembly (4) (5).

(When reassembling)

• Take care not to damage the O-ring (2) on the plug (1).

• Since there is an orifice (1.5 mm, 0.059 in.) in the check and relief valve body (reverse) (5), re-install the check and relief valve (4)

(5) to their original positions.

(1) Plug

(2) O-ring

(3) Spring

(4) Check and Relief Valve (Forward)

(5) Check and Relief Valve (Reverse)

W1087625

2-S25

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Cylinder Block

1. Remove the gasket (1).

2. Remove the O-ring (2).

3. Remove the cylinder block assembly (4) (5) from the transaxle.

(When reassembling)

• Turn the disassembling and the assembling stand vertically.

• Install the cylinder block assembly (4) (5) to the shafts not to drop the pistons from the cylinder block assembly (4) (5) carefully.

(1) Gasket

(2) O-ring

(3) Pump Shaft

(4) Cylinder Block Assembly (Pump

Side)

(5) Cylinder Block Assembly (Pump

Side)

(6) Cylinder Block Assembly (Motor

Side)

W1087850

3TAAAAFKP066A

(1)

(3)

Cylinder Block and Piston

1. Remove the piston (3) and the spring (2) from the cylinder block

(1 ).

(When reassembling)

• Apply clean transmission oil to the cylinder block and the piston.

• NOTE

• Take care not to damage the surface of the cylinder block and the piston.

(1) Cylinder Block

(2) Spring

(3) Piston

W1088078

2-S26

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Swashplate and Trust Roller Bearing

1. Remove the cir-clip (6) from the pump shaft (3) and the motor shaft (1).

2. Remove the thrust bearing (2).

3. Remove the swash plate (5) and the thrust roller bearing (4).

(When reassembling)

• Apply clean transmission oil to the cradle bearing and the trunnion arm.

• Hold the slot guide with a minus screw driver.

• Apply clean transmission oil to the thrust roller bearing.

(1) Motor Shaft

(2) Thrust Roller Bearing

(3) Pump Shaft

(4) Thrust Roller Bearing

(5) Swash plate

(6) Cir-Clip

(7) Slot Guide

(8) Cradle Bearing

W1088366

3TAAAAFKP070A

2-827

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

4WD Detent Ball

1. Remove the 4WD detent bolt (1), the detent spring (2) and the detent ball (3) before removing the transaxle front case, not to drop the detent ball (3) into the trans axle case.

(1) 4WD Detent Bolt

(2) Detent Spring

(3) Detent Ball

(4) Transaxle Front Case

W1102203

Neutral Arm and Trunnion Arm

1. Disconnect the neutral spring(2) from the H5T front cover.

2. Loosen the neutral adjuster (5).

3. Remove the external cir-clip (7).

4. Remove the bolts (1).

5. Remove the neutral adjuster (5) and the neutral arm (3).

6. Remove the trunnion arm (6).

(When reassembling)

• Adjust the H5T neutral position. Refer to "Checking and

Adjusting" section.

(1) Bolt

(2) Neutral Spring

(3) Neutral Arm

(4) Lock Screw

(5) Neutral Adjuster

(6) Trunnion Arm

(7) External Cir-clip

W1088807

2-528

BX25 , RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

TRANSAXLE

Hydraulic Cylinder

1. Disconnect the delivery pipe (1).

2. Remove the hydraulic cylinder mounting bolts (3).

3. Remove the hydraulic cylinder (2).

(When reassembling)

• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 12080 or equivalent) to the joint surface of the transaxle case to the hydraulic cylinder.

TIghtening torque

Hydraulic cylinder mounting bolt

39.2 to 44.1 N'm

4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m

28.9 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Delivery Pipe

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

(3) Bolt

W1089147

2-829

8X25, RCK54(P)-238X, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3) Transaxle Shafts

3TAAAAFKP1188

TRANSAXLE

Transaxle Case Front Cover

• NOTE

• Before removing the transaxle case front cover (4), remove the 4WD detent bolt (1), the detent spring (2) and the detent ball (3) from the transaxle case front cover (4).

• Remove the cir-clip (5) from the HST pump shaft (PTO shaft) from the HST pump shaft (5) and the HST motor shaft securely.

1. Remove the transaxle case front cover mounting bolts (2).

2. Remove the transaxle case front cover as an unit.

(When reassembling)

• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 12080 or equivalent) to the jOint surface of the transaxle case to the front cover.

TIghtening torque

Transaxle case front cover mounting bolt (M8)

29 to 34 N'm

3.0 to 3.5 kgf·m

21.4 to 2S.1 ft-Ibs

(1) Transaxle Case Front Cover

(2) Detent Spring

(3) Detent Ball

(4) Transaxle Case Front Cover

(S) HST Pump Shaft (PTO Shaft)

(6) Bolt

(7) 4WD Shaft

(8) Pinion Shaft

(9) HST Motor Shaft

(10) Mid-PTO Shaft

(11) Mid-PTO Idle Gear Shaft

(12) PTO Select Shaft

W1089420

2-S30

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Hydraulic Pump Assembly

1. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly mounting bolt (2), (3).

2. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly (1) as an unit from the transaxle case.

(When reassembling)

• Apply transmission oil to the O-rings.

• Since the mounting bolt (2) is installed through the hydraulic pump to the transaxle case, bind the sealing tape to the mounting bolt (2) securely. nghtening torque

Hydraulic pump assembly mounting bolt (M6)

Hydraulic pump assembly mounting bolt (M8)

8.0 to 9.0 N'm

0.8 to 0.9 kgf·m

5.9 to 6.6 ft-Ibs

18.0 to 21.0 N'm

1.8 to 2.1 kgf·m

13.3 to 15.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Hydraulic Pump

(2) Bolt (Through Bolt)

(3) Bolt

(4) O-ring

(5) O-ring

(6) O-ring

(7) O-ring

W1089827

2-531

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601. WSM TRANSAXLE

Rear PTa Cover Assembly

1. Remove the rear PTO cover mounting bolts (1).

2. Remove the rear PTO cover (2).

3. Remove the rear PTO shaft (5) from the rear PTO cover (2).

(When reassembling)

• Pull the 11T PTO select shaft with the bearing approximately the bearing thickness.

• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D or equivalent) to the joint surface of transaxle case to the rear PTO cover.

• Bind the vinyl tape to the rear PTO shaft not to damage the oil seal. lightening torque

Rear PTO cover mounting bolt (Ma)

18.0 to 21.0 N'm

1.8 to 2.1 kgf·m

13.3 to 15.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Bolt

(2) Rear PTO Cover

(3) Bearing

(4) 11T PTO Select Shaft

(5) Rear PTO Shaft

(6) Oil Seal

(7) Vinyl Tape

W1090219

3TAAAAFKP086A

2-832

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAFKP088A

TRANSAXLE

Rear Axle (LH)

• NOTE

• Prepare a specially bent snap ring plier.

1. Draw out the oil seal with a screw driver.

2. Remove the internal cir-clip from the rear axle case.

3. Draw out the rear axle from the rear axle case.

(When reassembling)

• Do not damage the oil seal.

(1) Rear Axle

(2) Oil Seal

(3) Internal Cir-clip

(4) Ball Bearing

(5) Rear Axle Case

W1090759

3TAAAAFKP089A

2-S33

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

TRANSAXLE

Rear Axle Case (RH)

1. Remove the rear axle case (RH) mounting bolts.

2. Remove the rear axle case (RH) (1) as an assembly from the transaxle case .

• NOTE

• Since the adjusting shims are installed behind the 37T spiral bevel gear, check the shims.

3. Remove the 37T spiral bevel gear (2).

4. Remove the 10T final gear shaft (3).

5. Remove the 66T final gear with the differential lock shift fork.

(When reassembling)

• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 12080 or equivalent) to the joint surface of transaxle case to the rear axle (RH) case.

Tightening torque

Rear axle case (RH) mounting bolt (MS)

1S.0 to 21.0 N·m

1.S to 2.1 kgf·m

13.3 to 15.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Rear Axle Case (RH)

(2) 37T Spiral Bevel Gear

(3) 10T Final Gear Shaft (Brake Shaft)

(4) 66T Final Gear

W1091120

2-S34

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAFKP095A

TRANSAXLE

66T Final Gear

1. Remove the bearing (2) with a puller.

2. Remove the bearing (4) with a puller.

3. Remove the differential lock shiftier (5) and 66T final gear (6).

4. Put parting marks on the differential pinions (12), (16) and the differential side gears (9), (14).

5. Tap out the differential pinion shaft (8).

6. Remove the differential pinions (12), (16), the differential pinion washers (13), (16), differential side gears (9), (14) and the differential side gear washers (10), (15).

(When reassembling)

• Install the differential pinion and differential gear, aligning the parting marks.

• Lock the differential pinion shaft (8) by setting the key (11 ).

Tightening torque

66T final gear mounting bolt

60.8 to 70.6 N'm

6.2 to 7.2 kgf·m

44.8 to 52.1 ft-Ibs

(1) 66T Final Gear

(2) Bearing

(3) Differential Lock Shift Folk

(4) Bearing

(5) Differential Lock Shifter

(6) 66T Final Gear

(7) Differential Case

(8) Differential Pinion Shaft

(9) Differential Side Gear

(10) Differential Side Gear Washer

(11) Key

(12) Differential Pinion

(13) Differential Pinion Washer

(14) Differential Side Gear

(15) Differential Side Gear Washer

(16) Differential Pinion

(17) Differential Pinion Washer

W1091475

3TAAAABKP081B

(7)

(8) (9) (10)

2-S35

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Rear Axle Case, RH and Brake

1. Remove the internal cir-clip (1).

2. Remove the shim (9), the bearing holder (8) and the other brake parts from the brake case.

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to the steel balls.

• Take care not to damage the O-ring on the brake cam lever.

• Check that the brake cam lever moves smoothly.

(1) Internal Clr-clip

(2) Brake Cam Lever

(3) External Cir-clip

(4) Steel Ball

(5) Actuator

(6) Brake Disc

(7) Friction Plate

(8) Bearing Holder

(9) Shim

W1091813

(3)--­ o

3TAAAAFKP098A

2-S36

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRAN8AXLE

PTO Clutch Assembly

1. Remove the bearing (2).

2. Remove the external cir-clip and the outlet gear (3).

3. Remove the seal rings (6).

4. Remove the bearing (5).

5. Remove the external cir-clip (18) using a clutch spring compressor.

6. Disassembling the clutch pack inner parts as show in the figure.

(When reassembling)

• Change the seal ring (6) with a new one.

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(14) \ : ~

~

(6

(3)

/

/

3TAAAAFKP102A

(1) Pump Shaft (PTO Clutch Shaft)

(2) Bearing

(3) Clutch Gear

(4) Clutch Pack

(5) Bearing

(6) Seal Ring

(7) Clutch Case

(8) O-ring

(9) Brake Disc

(10) Brake Plate

(11) Clutch Piston

(12) Separate Plate

(13) Disc Plate

(14) Backing Plate

(15) Internal Cir-clip

(16) Brake Spring

(17) Washer

(18) External Cir-clip

(19) Clutch Spring Compressor

W1092125

2-837

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(4) Assembling Shafts

TRANSAXLE

Assembling Select Arms and HST Pump Shaft (PTO Clutch

Shaft)

1. Install the PTa select arm (1).

2. Install the range shift arm (2) and the front wheel drive shaft arm

(3).

3. Install the idle gear shaft .

• NOTE

• Install the rear PTO cover and the PTO select gear shaft before installing HST pump shaft assembly.

4. After installing the rear PTa cover to the transaxle case, install the PTa select gear shaft (6). (Refer to page 2-S37.).

5. Install the HST pump shaft (PTa clutch shaft) (6).

(When reassembling)

• Take care not to damage the a-rings on the arms.

(1) PTO Select Arm

(2) Range Shift Arm

(3) Front Wheel Drive Shift Arm

(4) Mid-PTO Idle Gear Shaft

(5) HST Pump Shaft (PTO Clutch Shaft)

(6) PTO Select Gear Shaft

W1092555

2-S38

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601. WSM TRANSAXLE

Front Wheel Drive Shaft, Shiftier, Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft and

Mid-prO Shaft

1. Install the front drive shaft (1).

2. Install the shiftier (2) and the spiral bevel pinion shaft (3) together.

3. Install the mid-PTO idle gear shaft (5) and the mid-PTO shaft (6) and the HST motor shaft (4) together.

(1) Front Wheel Drive Shaft

(2) Shifter

(3) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft

(4) HST Motor Shaft

(5) Mid-PTO Idle Gear Shaft

(6) Mid-PTO Shaft

W1092968

2-S39

8X25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

[4] SERVICING

(1) Hydrostatic Transmission

TRANSAXLE

Center Section

1. Check the center section surface (1) for scratches or wear.

2. If deep scratch or excessive wear is found, replace the hydrostatic transmission assembly.

(1) Center Section Surface

W1093581

Charge Relief Valve

1. Check the charge relief cone (1) and the spring (2).

2. If defects are found, replace it.

(1) Charge Relief Valve

(2) Spring

(3) Plug

W1093691

3TAAAAFKP111A

(2)

(1) \ '

~'(3)

3TAAAAIKPOO7A

(4)

3TAAAAFKP0668

Check and High Pressure Relief Valve

1. Check the check and high pressure relief valve scratches and damage.

2. Check the spring (3) for breakage and wear.

(4). (5) for

3. If anything are unusual, replace the check and high pressure relief valve as complete assembly.

• NOTE

• Check and high pressure relief valve (reverse) has a pin hole

(1.5 mm, 0.059 in.).

(1) Plug

(2) O-ring

(3) Spring

(4) Check and High Pressure Relief

Valve (Forward)

(5) Check and High Pressure Relief

Valve (Reverse)

W1093783

Cylinder Block Assembly

1. Check the cylinder blocks (1) and the pistons (2) for scratches and wear.

2. If there are scratch or worn, replace the cylinder block assembly.

3. Check the pistons for their free movement in the cylinder block bores.

4. If the piston or the cylinder block is scored, replace the cylinder block assembly.

5. Check the polished face (4) of the cylinder block for scoring. If it is scored, replace the cylinder block assembly.

• IMPORTANT

• Do not interchange the pistons between the pump cylinder block and the motor cylinder block. Pistons and cylinder blocks are matched.

(1) Cylinder Block

(2) Piston

(3) Spring

(4) Polished Face

W1093936

2-840

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAFKP066B

(4)

TRANSAXLE

Cylinder Block Assembly

1. Check the cylinder blocks (1) and the pistons (2) for scratches and wear.

2. If there are scratch or worn, replace the cylinder block assembly.

3. Check the pistons for their free movement in the cylinder block bores.

4. If the piston or the cylinder block is scored, replace the cylinder block assembly.

5. Check the polished face (4) of the cylinder block for scoring. If it is scored, replace the cylinder block assembly.

•

IMPORTANT

• Do not interchange the pistons between the pump cylinder block and the motor cylinder block. Pistons and cylinder blocks are matched.

(1) Cylinder Block

(2) Piston

(3) Spring

(4) Polished Face

W1094117

Thrust Washer, Thrust Roller Bearing, Thrust Plate and Cradle

Bearing

1. Check the thrust bearing (3) for scratches and excessive wear.

2. If it is worn, replace it.

3. Check the thrust plate (4) for scratches and excessive wear. If it is worn or scored, replace it.

4. Check the cradle bearing (5) for excessive wear. If it is worn, replace it.

(1) Swashplate

(2) Thrust Washer

(3) Thrust Bearing

(4) Thrust Plate

(5) Cradle Bearing

W1094264

2-S41

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

TRANSAXLE

Pump Shaft (PTO Clutch Shaft)

1. Check the seal surface (1) and the bearing surface.

2. If the pump shaft is rough or grooved, replace it.

3. If the ball bearing or the needle bearing is worn, replace it.

(1) Seal Surface (2) Bearing Surface

W1094465

3TAAAAFKP110A

3TAAAAFKP059C

(2) Transaxle Case

3TMABAB3P015A

3TMABAB2P034A

Needle Bearing

1. Check the needle bearing (1) for wear.

2. If the needle bearing (1) are worn, replace them.

(1) Needle Bearing

W1094709

Bearing

1. Hold the inner race, and push and pull the outer race in all directions to check wear and roughness.

2. Apply the transmission oil to the bearing, and hold the inner race.

And turn the outer race to check rotation.

3. If there are any defect, replace the bearing.

W1094849

PTO Clutch Disc Wear

1. Measure the thickness of PTO clutch disc with vernier calipers.

2. If the thickness is less than the allowable limit, replace it.

Thickness of PTO clutch disc

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

1.50t01.70mm

0.0591 to 0.0669 in.

1.35 mm

0.0531 in.

W1024320

2-842

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

,rr

3TAAAAFKP115A

3TAAAAFKP116A

"

TRANSAXLE

Separate Plate and Back Plate Wear

1. Measure the thickness of pressure plate and steel back with vernier calipers.

2. If the thickness is less than the allowable limit, replace it.

Thickness of separate plate

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.9450 to 1.055 mm

0.03721 to 0.04153 in.

0.80mm

0.031 in.

Thickness of back plate

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

1.9to 2.1 mm

0.075 to 0.082 in.

1.85 mm

0.0728 in.

W1017226

Flatness of Clutch Piston, Pressure Plate and Steel Plate

1. Place the part on a surface plate.

2. Check the flatness by inserting a feeler gauge (allowable limit size) underneath it at least four points.

3. If the gauge can be inserted, replace it.

Flatness of clutch piston Allowable limit

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Flatness of pressure plate and steel plate

Allowable limit

0.20mm

0.0079 in.

W1017358

Clutch Spring Free Length

1. Measure the free length of spring with vernier calipers.

2. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit. replace it.

Clutch spring free length

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

38.5mm

1.52 in.

34.5mm

1.36 in.

W1017533

3TMABAB2P037 A

PTe Brake Disc Wear

1. Measure the PTa brake disc thickness with a vernier caliper.

2. If the thickness is less than allowable limit, replace it.

PTe brake disc thickness

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

2.90 to 3.10 mm

0.115 to 0.122 in.

2.70 mm

0.11 in.

W1029590

3TAAAAFKP117A

PTe Brake Plate

1. Measure the PTa brake plate thickness with a vernier caliper.

2. If the thickness is less than allowable limit, replace it.

PTe brake plate thickness

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

1.9 to 2.1 mm

0.075 to 0.082 in.

1.85 mm

0.0728 in.

W1095464

2-S43

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAABKP097 A

3TAAAABKP098A

3GFABAB3P098A

TRANSAXLE

Clearance between Differential Case and Differential Side Gear

1. Measure the differential side gear boss O.D. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the differential case I.D. with a cylinder gauge and calculate the clearance.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace faulty parts.

Clearance between differential case and differential side gear

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.0500 to 0.151 mm

0.00197 to 0.00594 in.

0.30 mm

0.012 in.

Differential case 1.0.

Differential side gear

0.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

38.000 to 38.062 mm

1.4961 to 1.4985 in.

37.911 to 37.950 mm

1.4926 to 1.4940 in.

W1029693

Clearance between Differential Pinion Shaft and Differential

Pinion

1. Measure the differential pinion shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the differential pinion I.D. with a cylinder gauge, and calculate the clearance.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace faulty parts.

Clearance between differential pinion shaft and differential pinion

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.0800 to 0.122 mm

0.00315 to 0.00480 in.

0.30mm

0.012 in. erential pinion shaft

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

20.060 to 20.081 mm

0.78977 to 0.79059 in.

19.959 to 19.980 mm

0.78579 to 0.78661 in.

W1029832

Backlash between Differential Pinion and Differential Side Gear

1. Secure the differential case with a vise.

2. Set the dial indicator (lever type) with its finger on the tooth of the differential side gear.

3. Press differential pinion and side gear against the differential case.

4. Hold the differential pinion and move the differential side gear to measure the backlash.

5. If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, adjust with differential side gear shims.

Backlash between differential pinion and differential side gear

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.15toO.30mm

0.0059 to 0.011 in.

0.40 mm

0.016 in.

(Reference)

• Thickness of shims:

1.5 mm (0.059 in.), 1.6 mm (0.063 in.), 1.7 mm (0.067 in.)

W1029971

2-S44

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM TRANSAXLE

Backlash between Spiral Bevel Pinion Gear and Bevel Gear

1. Temporarily assemble the spiral bevel pinion gear (2) and the bevel gear (1) in the transaxle case.

2. Prepare the fuse bent already three to four times.

3. Hold the fuse on the bevel gear teeth upper surface (A).

4. Turn the front drive shaft one turn clockwise by hands.

5. Measure the thickness of the fuse as a backlash between the spiral bevel pinion gear and the bevel gear.

6. If the backlash exceeds the factory specifications, adjust the shims (3), (4).

Backlash between spiral bevel pinion and bevel gear

Factory spec.

O.10toO.30mm

0.0040 to 0.011 in.

(2)

3TAAAAFKP113A

\ A

3GFABAB5P012A

3TAAAAFKP114A

(1) Bevel Gear

(2) Spiral Bevel Pinion Gear

(3) Shim

(4) Shim

(5) Final Gear Shaft (Brake Shaft)

(A) Bevel Gear Teeth Upper Surface

W1095931

Brake Cam Lever Movement

1. Move the brake cam lever by hand to check its movement.

2. If its movement is heavy, refine the brake cam with a emery paper.

W1096217

Flatness of Actuator and Bearing Holder

1. Place a straightedge of 150 mm (5.91 in.) or more in length on the contacting surface of the actuator and the bearing holder.

2. Inspect the friction surface ofthe actuator and the bearing holder with the straightedge, and determine if a 0.30 mm (0.0118 in.) feeler gauge will fit on the part of wear.

3. If it will fit, resurface.

Flatness of actuator and bearing holder

Allowable limit

0.30mm

0.0118 in.

W1030671

2-S45

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

\

3GFABAB5P013A

3TAAAAFKP122A

TRANSAXLE

Height of Cam Plate and Ball

1. Measure the height of the cam plate with the ball installed.

2. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace the cam plate and balls.

3. Inspect the ball holes of cam plate for uneven wear.

4. If the uneven wear is found, replace it.

Height of cam plate and ball

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

22.89 to 22.99 mm

0.9012 to 0.9051 in.

22.40 mm

0.8819 in.

W1030769

Brake Disc and Friction Plate Wear

1. Measure the brake disc thickness and the friction plate thickness with an outside micrometer.

2. If the thickness is less than the allowable limit, replace it.

Brake disc thickness

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

3.30 to 3.50 mm

0.130 to 0.137 in.

3.0mm

0.12 in.

Friction plate thickness

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

1.92 to 2.08 mm

0.0756 to 0.0818 in.

1.52 mm

0.0598 in.

W1030890

2-S46

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. STRUCTURE ................................................................................................. 3-M1

2. FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT ..................................................................... 3-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. STRUCTURE

(8)

FRONT AXLE

3TAAAAF6P001A

(1) Axle

(2) Axle Flange

(3) Bevel Gear

(4) Bevel Gear

(5) Bevel Gear Case

(6) Bevel Gear

(7) Differential Yoke Shaft, RH

(8) Front Axle Case

(9) Bevel Pinion Shaft

(10) Differential Gear Assembly

(11) Differential Pinion Shaft

(12) Differential Yoke Shaft, LH

(13) Differential Side Gear

(14) Differential Pinion Gear

(15) Bevel Gear

(16) Bevel Gear Shaft

(17) Front Gear Case

(18) Bevel Gear

(19) Collar

The front axle of the 4WD is constructed as shown above. Power is transmitted from the transmission through the propeller shaft to the bevel pinion shaft (9), then to the bevel gear (15) and to the differential side gear (13).

The power through the differential side gear is transmitted to the differential yoke shaft (7), (12), and to the bevel gear shaft (16) through the bevel gears (4), (6) in the bevel gear case (5).

The revolution is greatly reduced by the bevel gears (18), (3), then the power is transmitted to the axle (1).

The differential system allows each wheel to rotate at a different speed to make turning easier.

3-M1

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM FRONT AXLE

2. FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

To assure smooth mobility or maneuverability and enhance stable and straight running, the front wheels are mounted at an angle to the right, left and forward directions. This arrangement is referred to as the Front Wheel

Alignment.

• Camber

The front wheels are tilted from the vertical as viewed from the front, upper wheels are spreader than lower ones.

This inclination is called camber (a). Camber reduces bending or twisting of the front axle caused by vertical load or running resistance, and also maintains the stability in running.

I

Camber

W1012811

3TAAAAB6P002A i 1 \ a

I~~,,*"----'

\:'.0u..-_ _

\

,

.

\

,

\

.

\ .

\L.--~

\

• Kingpin Angle

The Kingpin is titled from the vertical as viewed from the front.

This angle is called kingpin angle (a). As with the camber, kingpin angle reduces rolling resistance of the wheels, and prevents any shimmy motion of the steering wheel.

It also reduces steering effort.

Kingpin angle

0.209 rad

12 0

W1013073

3TAAAAB6P003A

F

3TMABAB6POO4A

(a)

f­

(b)

R

• Caster

The kingpin is titled forward as viewed from the side.

The point (b) of the wheel center line is behind the point

(a) of the kingpin shaft center line.

This inclination is called caster (c). Caster helps provide steering stability.

As with the kingpin inclination, caster reduces steering effort.

Camber

Orad

0 0

F: Front R: Rear

W1013142

3-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

I·

F t

..

\

3TAAAAB6P004A

R

FRONT AXLE

• Toe-in

Viewing the front wheels from above reveals that the distance between the toes of the front wheels is smaller than that between the heels.

It is called toe-in. The front wheels tend to roll outward due to the camber, but toe-in offsets it and ensures parallel rOiling of the front wheels. Another purpose of toe-in is to prevent excessive and uneven wear of tires.

I

Toe-in

I Ota5 mm

?toO.19tn.

R: Rear F: Front

W1013242

3-M3

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................3-S1

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 3-S2

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES ..............................................................................3-S3

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING ...................................... 3-S4

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ............................................................... 3-S4

[2] PREPARATION ........................................................................................3-S5

(1) Separating Front Axle Assembly ......................................................... 3-S5

[3] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ..................................................3-S8

(1) Front Axle Assembly ... ........................................................................3-S8

[4] SERVICING ............................................................................................3-S12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom

Front Wheels

Wander to Right or

Left

Front Wheels Can

Not Be Driven

Probable Cause Solution

Tire pressure uneven Adjust

Improper toe-in adjustment (improper alignment) Adjust

Clearance between center pin and pin support bushing excessive

Replace

Front axle rocking force too small

Tie-rod end loose

Air sucked in power steering circuit

Front wheel driving gears in front axle gear case broken

Universal jOint broken

Front wheel drive gears in transmission broken

Adjust

Tighten

Bleed

Replace

Replace

Replace

Noise

Front differential gear broken

Gear backlash excessive

Oil insufficient

Bearings damaged or broken

Replace

Adjust or replace

Replenish

Replace

Gears damaged or broken Replace

8piral bevel pinion shaft turning force improper Adjust

FRONT AXLE

Reference

Page

G-41

G-23,3-84

3-814

I

3-84

3-88

3-810

3-87

-

3-811

3-812,813

3-85

-

-

3-813

W1014322 i i

I

3-81

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT AXLE

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Front Wheel Alignment Toe-in

Front Axle

Differential Case to Differential Side Gear

Rocking Force

Clearance

Factory Specification Allowable Limit o to 5 mm o to 0.19 in.

-

49.0 to 117.7 N

5.0 to 12.0 kgf

11.0 to 26.5 Ibs

-

0.040 to 0.082 mm

0.00157 to 0.00323 in.

0.17 mm

0.0067 in.

Differential Case to.

26.000 to 26.021 mm

1.02362 to 1.02445 in.

-

Differential Side Gear 0.0. -

Differential Pinion Shaft to Differential

Pinion

Clearance

25.939 to 25.960 mm

1.02122 to 1.02205 in.

0.025 to 0.055 mm

0.00098 to 0.00217 in.

0.25 mm

0.0096 in.

Differential Pinion Shaft 0.0.

Differential Pinion

Bevel Pinion Shaft

Bevel Pinion Shaft to Bevel Gear

12T Bevel Gear to 15T Bevel Gear

Center Pin to Pin Support Bushing

Center Pin

Bushing

1.0.

Differential Pinion to Differential Side Gear Backlash

Turning Torque

Backlash

Backlash

Clearance

O.D. to.

9.960 to 9.975 mm

0.39212 to 0.39272 in.

10.000 to 10.015 mm

0.39370 to 0.39429 in.

0.1 to 0.3 mm

0.004 to 0.012 in.

0.8 to 1.0 N'm

0.08 to 0.10 kgf·m

0.59 to 0.73 ft-Ibs

0.1 to 0.3 mm

0.004 to 0.012 in.

0.1 to 0.3 mm

0.004 to 0.012 in. o to 0.231 mm o to 0.00909 in.

19.850 to 20.000 mm

0.78149 to 0.78740 in.

20.000 to 20.081 mm

0.78740 to 0.79059 in.

-

-

-

0.70 mm

0.0276 in.

-

-

W1016639

3-S2

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES

Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.

(For general use screws, bolts and nuts: See page G-B.)

Item

Front wheel mounting screw

Power steering cylinder hose

TIe-rod slotted nut

Power steering cylinder mounting screw

Bevel gear case mounting screw (M12)

Front gear case cover mounting screw

N'm

149.2 to 179.0

23.6 to 27.4

17.7 to 34.3

48.1 to 55.8

77.5 to 90.2

48.1 to 55.8 kgf'm

15.3 to 1B.2

2.4 to 2.8

1.8 to 3.5

4.9 to 5.7

7.9 to 9.2

4.9 to 5.7

FRONT AXLE ft-Ibs

110 to 132

17.4 to 20.2

13.0 to 25.3

35.5 to 41.2

57.2 to 66.5

35.5 to 41.2

W1012736

3-S3

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM FRONT AXLE

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

(A) t

(e)

(8)

Toe-in

1. Inflate the tires to the specified pressure.

2. Turn the front wheels straight ahead.

3. Measure the toe-in ((B)-(A».

4. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, adjust the tie-rod length.

Toe-in «B)-(A») Factory spec. o to 5 mm o to 0.19 in .

• Adjusting procedure

1. Loosen the lock nuts and turn the tie-rod to adjust the rod length until the proper toe-in measurement is obtained.

2. Retighten the lock nuts.

(1) Tie-rod

(2) Lock Nut

(A) Wheel to Wheel Distance at Front

(B) Wheel to Wheel Distance at Rear

(C) Front

W1011333

(1 )

Front Axle Rocking Force

1. Jack up the front side of tractor and remove the front wheels.

2. Set a spring balance to the front gear case cover.

3. Measure the front axle rocking force.

4. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, adjust as following .

• Adjusting procedure

1. Remove the cotter pin (1).

2. Tighten or loosen the adjusting nut (2) so that the measurement of rocking force comes to factory specifications.

3. If the slot and pin hole do not meet, align the nut until they do meet within factory specifications.

4. Install the new cotter pin.

(When reassembling)

• Be sure to split the cotter pin like an anchor.

(Reference)

• Tightening torque of adjusting nut:

19.6 N'm (2.0 kgf·m, 14.5 ft-Ibs)

Front axle rocking force Factory spec.

49.0 to 177.7 N

5.0 to 12.0 kgf

11.0 to 26.5 Ibs

(1) Cotter Pin (2) Adjusting Nut

W1011602

3-S4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT AXLE

Front Wheel Steering Angle

1. Inflate the tires to the specified pressure.

2. Loosen the lock nut and shorten the length of stopper bolt LH (1).

3. Steer the wheels to the extreme left.

4. Lengthen the length of stopper bolt (1) until the stopper bolt contacts with the bevel gear case (3).

5. Return the steering wheel to straight ahead and lengthen the stopper bolt four turn from above position further.

6. Lock the stopper bolt by lock nut (2).

7. For adjusting the right steering angle. perform the same procedure as mentioned in left steering angle.

(Reference)

Steering angle

Right side

Left side

0.84 to 0.87 rad

48 to 50 °

0.92 to 0.96 rad

53t055°

Length of adjusting bolt

(L)

Right side

Left side

26mm

1.02 in.

21 mm

0.83 in.

(3) Bevel Gear Case (1) Stopper Bolt LH

(2) Lock Nut

(1) Breather Plug

(2) Filling Plug with Dipstick

(3) Drain Plug

W1011846

[2] PREPARATION

• Before proceeding this section, disassembling the loader assembling and backhoe. (Refer to section 8 and 9.)

(1) Separating Front Axle Assembly

Draining Front Axle Case Oil

1. Place the oil pans underneath the front axle case.

2. Remove both right and left hand side drain plugs (3) and filling plug (2) to drain the oil.

3. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs (3).

(When reassembling)

• When re-filling, remove the right and left breather plugs (1) .

• IMPORTANT

• After ten minutes, check the oil level again, add oil to prescribed level.

• Use KUBOTA SUPER UDT fluid or SAE80, 90 gear oil.

Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT". (See page

G-7.)

147l

U.S.qts

4.1Imp.qts

(A) Oil level is acceptable within this range.

W1012192

3-S5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT AXLE

Battery

A

CAUTION

• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. When connecting, connect the positive cable to the battery first.

1. Remove the under panel (1).

2. Disconnect the negative cable (2) from the battery.

(1) Under Panel

(2) Battery

(3) Negative Cable

W1012394

Bonnet and Under Cover

1. Remove the front guard (1).

2. Open the bonnet (2), disconnect the connectors (4) for the head lights, then remove the bonnet with the bonnet bracket (5).

3. Remove the under cover (3).

(1) Front Guard

(2) Bonnet

(3) Under Cover

(4) Connector

(5) Bonnet Bracket

W1012507

3TAAAAG6P004A

Front Wheel and Propeller Shaft Cover

1. Lift up the front of tractor and place the disassembling stand under the front axle frame.

2. Remove the front wheels.

3. Remove the propeller shaft cover mounting bolt and slide the propeller shaft cover (1).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque

Front wheel mounting screw

149.2 to 179.0 N'm

15.3 to 18.2 kgf·m

110 to 132 ft-Ibs

(1) Propeller Shaft Cover

W1012838

3-S6

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM FRONT AXLE

Disconnecting Propeller Shaft

1. Tap out the spring pins (2) and disconnect the universal joint (1) and spiral bevel pinion shaft.

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to the splines of the propeller shaft and universal joint.

(1) Universal Joint (2) Spring Pin

W1013075

Front Axle Assembly

1. Remove the power steering hose cramp (1).

2. Place the garage jack under the front axle.

3. Remove the cotter pin (1).

4. Remove the slotted nut (2) of center pin and separate the front axle from the frame.

5. Disconnect the power steering cylinder hoses (4).

(When reassembling)

• After mounting the front axle assembly to the frame. be sure to adjust the front axle rocking force. (See page 3-S4.)

• Installing the cotter pin. be sure to split the cotter pin like an anchor

Tightening torque

Power steering cylinder hose

23.6 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.8 kgf'm

17.4 to 20.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Hose Cramp

(2) Cotter Pin

(3) Slotted Nut (Adjusting Nut for Front

Axle Rocking Force)

(4) Power Steering Hose

W1023380

3-S7

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT AXLE

[3]

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Front Axle Assembly

Power Steering Cylinder

1. Remove the cotter pin and remove the slotted nut for tie-rod (1).

2. Remove the power steering cylinder mounting screws and remove the power steering cylinder (2) with tie-rod.

(When reassembling)

• NOTE

• Tighten the slotted nut to 17.7 N'm (1.8 kgf·m, 13 ft-Ibs). If the slot and pin hole do not meet, tighten the nut until they do meet, and install the cotter pin.

• Be sure to split the cotter pin like an anchor.

3TAAAAF6P011A lightening torque

Tie-rod slotted nut

Power steering cylinder mounting screw

17.7 to 34.3 N'm

1.8 to 3.5 kgf-m

13.0 to 25.3 ft-Ibs

48.1 to 55.8 N'm

4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m

35.5 to 41.2 ft-Ibs

3TAAAAF6P012A

(1) lie-rod (2) Power Steering Cylinder

W1013368

Bevel Gear Case and Front Gear Case

1. Remove the bevel gear case mounting screws.

2. Remove the bevel gear case (2) and front gear case (1) as a unit from the front axle case (3).

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to the O-ring and take care not to damage it.

• Do not interchange right and left bevel gear case assemblies and right and left gear case assemblies.

Tightening torque

Bevel gear case mounting screw (M12)

77.51090.1 N'm

7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m

57.1 to 66.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Front Gear Case

(2) Bevel Gear Case

(3) Front Axle Case

W1013787

Front Gear Case Cover

1. Remove the front gear case mounting screws and remove the front gear case cover (1) with bevel gear (2).

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to the O-ring and take care not to damage it.

Tightening torque

Front gear case cover mounting screw

48.1 to 55.8 N'm

4.9 to 5.7 kgf-m

35.5 to 41.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Front Gear Case Cover

(2) Bevel Gear

(3) Front Gear Case

3TAAAAF6P013A

W1013952

3TAAAAF6P014A

3-58

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601 , WSM

3TAAAAF6P015A

(5) l

FRONT AXLE

36T Bevel Gear and Front Axle Shaft

1. Remove the bearing (5).

2. Take out the 36T bevel gear (4).

3. Take out the collar (3).

4. Tap out the axle shaft (2).

(When reassembling)

• Install the oil seal (6) of front gear case cover (1), noting its direction as shown in the figure.

(1) Front Gear Case Cover

(2) Axle Shaft

(3) Collar

(4) 36T Bevel Gear

(5) Ball Bearing

(6) Oil Seal

W1014087

(2)

(6)

3TAAAAD6P014A

3-59

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(4)-----' . _ -(3)

.. -(2)

0 - ( 1 )

3TAAAAF6P016A

FRONT AXLE

Front Gear Case and Bevel Gear Case

1. Remove the internal snap ring (1).

2. Remove the bevel gear with ball bearing (3) and shim (2).

3. Remove the bevel gear (4).

4. Remove the external snap ring (7).

5. Remove the bevel gear case (5) from front gear case (6).

6. Remove the oil seal (12) and the ball bearing (11).

7. Remove the internal snap ring (10) and remove the ball bearing

(9).

8. Remove the bevel gear shaft (8) with ball bearing.

(When reassembling)

• Install the oil seal (12) of bevel gear case, noting its direction as shown in the figure.

• Install the adjusting shims (2) to their original position.

(1) Internal Snap Ring

(2) Shim

(3) Ball Bearing

(4) Bevel Gear

(5) Bevel Gear Case

(6) Front Gear Case

(7) External Snap Ring

(8) Bevel Gear Shaft

(9) Ball Bearing

(10) Internal Snap Ring

(11) Ball Bearing

(12) Oil Seal

(13) Ball Bearing

Wl014354

3TAAAAF6P017 A

1\

;(8) (9) (10) (6)~~ il

/(11)

~ Oil

1121

(13)

'v,

I

3TAAAAF6P018A

(12)

3-S10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3)

(5)

\ OJ (4)

(2)

(1),,\~ ~~

\~ tQ(10) y

(9)

3TAAAAB6P025A

(8) (9) (2) (10) (11)

FRONT AXLE

Bevel Pinion Shaft and Differential Gear Assembly

1. Take out the differential yoke shaft (4). (7).

2. Remove the oil seal (11).

3. Remove the internal snap ring (1).

4. Pull out the bevel pinion shaft (3).

5. Take out the differential gear assembly (5). from right side of front axle case (6).

6. Remove the stake of lock nut (10). and then remove the lock nut

(10).

7. Remove the taper roller bearing (9).

(When reassembling)

• Apply gear oil to the taper roller bearings (9) and install them correctly. noting their direction.

• Replace the lock nut (10) and oil seal (11) with new ones. o

After tighten the lock nut (10) to the specified torque, stake it o firmly.

Install the adjusting collars (2). (8) to their original position.

(1) Internal Snap Ring

(2) Adjusting Collar

(3) Bevel Pinion Shaft

(4) Differential Yoke Shaft LH

(5) Differential Gear Assembly

(6) Front Axle Case

(7) Differential Yoke Shaft RH

(8) Adjusting Collar

(9) Taper Roller Bearing

(10) Lock Nut

(11) Oil Seal

(12) Collar

W12345678

Differential Gear

1. Remove the bevel gear (5) with bearing (6) and bearing (9) by puller.

2. Remove the spring pin (10).

3. Remove the differential pinion shaft (8).

4. Remove the differential pinions (2). differential side gears (4) and shims (1). (3).

• NOTE

• Arrange the parts to know their original position.

(When reassembling) o

Apply molybdenum disulfide (Three Bond 1901 or equivalent) to the inner circumferential surface of the differential side gears. differential pinions and shims.

(1) Shim

(2) Differential Pinion

(3) Shim

(4) Differential Side Gear

(5) Bevel Gear

(6) Bearing

(7) Differential Gear Case

(8) Differential Pinion Shaft

(9) Ball Bearing

(10) Spring Pin

W1028857

3-S11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[4] SERVICING

•

3TAAAAD6P023A

3TAAAAD6P024A

3TAAAAD6P025A

FRONT AXLE

Clearance between Differential Case and Differential Side Gear

1. Measure the differential side gear boss O.D ..

2. Measure the differential case bore I.D., and calculate the clearance .

3. Measure the differential case cover bore I.D., and calculate the clearance.

4. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace faulty parts.

Clearance between differential case and differential side gear

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.040 to 0.082 mm

0.00157 to 0.00323 in.

O.17mm

0.0067 in.

Differential case bore

1.0.

Differential side gear

0.0.

Factory spec.

26.000 to 26.021 mm

1.02362 to 1.02445 in.

25.939 to 25.960 mm

1.02122 to 1.02205 in.

W1015523

Clearance between Differential Pinion Shaft and Differential

- - -

1. Measure the differential pinion shaft O.D ..

2. Measure the differential pinion I.D., and calculate the clearance.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit. replace faulty parts.

Clearance between differential pinion shaft and differential pinion

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.025 to 0.055 mm

0.00098 to 0.00217 in.

0.25 mm

0.0096 in.

Differential pinion shaft

0.0.

Factory spec.

Differential side gear 1.0. Factory spec.

9.960 to 9.975 mm

0.39212 to 0.39272 in.

10.000 to 10.015 mm

0.39370 to 0.39429 in.

W1015675

Backlash between Differential Pinion and Differential Side Gear

1. Set a dial gauge (lever type) on a tooth of the differential pinion.

2. Fix the differential side gear, and move the differential pinion to measure the backlash.

3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specifications, adjust with the differential side gears shims.

Backlash between differential pinion and differential side gear

Factory spec.

0.1 to 0.3 mm

0.004 to 0.012 in.

(Reference)

• Thickness of adjusting shims:

For side gear: 0.8 mm (0.031 in.), 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

1.2 mm (0.047 in.)

For pinion: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.), 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)

3.7 mm (0.146 in.), 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)

W1015817

3-S12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAF6P022A

(2)

FRONT AXLE

Turning Torque of Bevel Pinion Shaft

1. Cramp the spiral bevel pinion shaft assembly to the vise and tighten the staking nut.

2. Measure the tuming torque of bevel pinion shaft.

3. If the turning torque is not within the factory specifications, adjust with the lock nut.

Turning torque Factory spec.

O.S to 1.0 N'm

O.OS to 0.10 kgf·m

0.59 to 0.73 ft-Ibs

• NOTE

• After turning force adjustment, be sure to stake the lock nut.

W10206520

Backlash between Bevel Pinion Shaft and Bevel Gear

1. Lay the solder (0.5 mm (0.020 in.) thickness) on the position where the tooth proper contact bevel pinion shaft.

2. Fix the bevel gear and rotate the bevel pinon shaft carefully.

3. Measure the backlash by thickness of the point where solder is the thinnest.

4. If the backlash is not within the factory specifications, change the adjusting collars (3), shims (4). For example change the adjusting shim (4) to 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) smaller size, and change the adjusting collar (3) to 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) larger size.

5. Adjust the backlash properly by repeating the above procedures.

Backlash between bevel pinion shaft and bevel gear

(1) Bevel Gear

(2) Bevel Pinion Shaft

Factory spec.

0.1 to 0.3 mm

0.004 to 0.012 in.

(Reference)

• Above factory specification should be measured on the tooth of bevel pinion. When measuring the backlash on the spline of its shaft, factory specification will be 0.0571 to 0.1714 mm (0.00225 to 0.00675 in.).

• Thickness of adjusting collars (3), (4) :

3.4 mm (0.134 in.)

3.6 mm (0.142 in.)

4.1 mm (0.161 in.)

4.2 mm (0.165 in.)

3.8 mm (0.150 in.)

3.9 mm (0.154 in.)

4.0 mm (0.157 in.)

4.4 mm (0.173 in.)

4.5 mm (0.177 in.)

4.6 mm (0.181 in.)

(3) Adjusting Collar

(4) Adjusting Collar

W10301S00

3-813

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAF6P023A

(1 ) (2) (3)

FRONT AXLE

Backlash between 12T Bevel Gear and 1ST Bevel Gear

1. Stick a strip of fuse to three spots on the 1ST bevel gear (1 ) with grease.

2. Fix the front axle case, bevel gear case and front gear case.

3. Tum the axle.

4. Remove the bevel gear case from front axle case and measure the thickness of the fuses with an outside micrometer.

5. If the backlash is not within the factory specifications, adjust with shim (3).

Backlash between 12T bevel gear and 15T bevel gear

Factory spec.

0.1 to 0.3 mm

0.004 to 0.012 in.

(Reference)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (3) :

0.8 mm (0.031 in.)

1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

1.2 mm (0.047 in.)

1.4 mm (0.055 in.)

• Tooth contact: More than 35 %

(1) 15T Bevel Gear

(2) 12T Bevel Gear

(3) Shim

W10211780

Clearance between Center Pin and Pin Support Bushing

1. Measure the center pin 0.0. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the pin support bush 1.0. of the front axle with a cylinder gauge.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.

Clearance between center pin and pin support bush

Factory spec.

Allowable limit o to 0.231 mm o to 0.00909 in.

0.70 mm

0.0276 in.

Center pin 0.0.

Bush I.D.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

19.850 to 20.000 mm

0.78149 to 0.78740 in.

20.000 to 20.081 mm

0.78740 to 0.79059 in.

W1016540

3-S14

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT .................................................................................. 4-M1

2. STEERING CONTROLLER .......................................................................... 4-M2

3. STEERING CYLINDER. ................................................................................ 4-M3

STEERING BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

(2)

(3) 0 E c

)( l

(1) Steering Controller

(2) Steering Cylinder

(3) Flow Priority Valve

(4) Hydraulic Control Valve

Assembly

(5) Hydraulic Pump

(6) Oil Strainer

A: To PTO Clutch Valve

B: To HST

C : To Hydraulic Cylinder

D : To Implement

E : From Implement

W1012655

(6)

B (5) (4)

3TAAAG7POO1A

This model is provided with a full hydrostatic power steering.

In the full hydrostatic power steering, the steering controller is connected to the steering cylinder with only the hydraulic piping. Accordingly, it does not have mechanical transmitting parts such as steering gear, pitman arm, drag link, etc .. Therefore, it is simple in construction. This steering system consists of the oil strainer (6), hydraulic pump

(5), flow priority valve (3), steering controller (1), steering cylinder (2), etc ..

Flow priority valve (3) which located in the hydraulic control valve assembly (4) divides the oil into two direction.

One is the control flow to power steering (constantly 8.0 Llmin., 2.1 U.S.gals.lmin., 1.8 Imp.gals.lmin.), and the other is excessive flow to control valve of implement lift control.

By operating the power steering body, the required amount of oil is fed to the steering cylinder (2).

4-M1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM STEERING

2. STEERING CONTROLLER

3TAAAAB7P002A

=~§i]§~~_(5)

3TAAAAF7P002A

A

3TAAAAB7P004B

B

(3) _ _ +-1--....1'

(6)

(10)

~~

(4)

(7)

(3)

(11 )

(2)

(4)

The steering controller consists of a control valve (4) and a metering device (3).

• Control Valve

The control valve is a rotating spool type.

When the steering wheel is not turned, the position of the spool (7) and sleeve (9) is kept neutral by the centering spring (8). This causes the forming of a

"Neutral" oil circuit.

When the steering wheel is turned either clockwise or counterclockwise. the position of the spool and sleeve changes in relation to the centering spring. This allows the forming of a "Right Turning" or "Left Turning" oil circuit. At the same time. the gear pump (Metering device) rotates with the spool and sends the oil to the cylinder corresponding to the rotation of the steering wheel.

• Metering Device

Oil sent from the hydraulic pump to the steering cylinder. passes through the metering device (3).

Namely, when the rotor is driven. two chambers suck in oil due to volumetric change in the pump chambers formed between the rotor (12) and the stator (13). while oil is discharged from other two chambers. On the other hand, rotation of the steering wheel is directly transmitted to the rotor through the spool (7), drive shaft (10), etc.

Accordingly, the metering device serves to supply the steering cylinder with oil, amount of which corresponds to the rotation of the steering wheel. The wheels are thus turned by the angle corresponding to the rotation of the steering wheel.

When the engine stops or the hydraulic pump malfunctions, the metering device functions as a manual trochoid pump, which makes manual steering possible.

• Relief Valve

The relief valve (1) is located in the steering controller. It controls the maximum pressure of the power steering system.

Its setting pressure is as follows.

8.33 to 8.83 MPa

85 to 90 kgf/cm

2

1209 to 1280 psi

(1) Relief Valve

(2) Steering Controller

(3) Metering Device

(4) Control Valve

(5) Steering Cylinder

(6) Check Valve

(7) Spool

(8) Centering Spring

(9) Sleeve

(10) Drive Shaft

(11) Distributor Plate

(12) Rotor

(13) Stator

A : Control Valve

B : Matering Divice

P : P Port (From flow priority valve)

T : T Port (To PTO clutch valve and HST circuit)

W1012783

3TAAAAB7P005B

4-M2

BX25, RCK54(P).23BX, RCK60B·23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. STEERING CYLINDER

(1 ) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

STEERING

(9) (11)

3TAAAAB7POO6A

(1) Rod

(2) Wiper Seal

(3) Internal Snap Ring

(4) Guide

(5) O-ring

(6) Seal Ring

(7) Center Piston

(8) Piston O-ring

(9) External Snap Ring

(10) Cylinder Tube

(11) Rod O-ring

The steering cylinder is single piston both rod double-acting type. This steering cylinder is installed parallel to the front axle and connected to tie-rods.

The tie-rods connected to both knuckle arm guarantees equal steering movement to both front wheels.

The steering cylinder provide force in both directions. Depending upon direction the steering wheel is turned pressure oil enters at one end of the cylinder to extend, or the other end to retract it, thereby turning front wheel of the tractor.

4-M3

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................... .4-S1

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... .4-S2

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................................. .4-S3

4. CHECKING. DISASSEMBLING AND SERViCiNG ..................................... .4-S4

[1] CHECKING ............................................................................................... 4-S4

(1) Relief Valve ......................................................................................... 4-S4

[2] PREPARATION ........................................................................................ 4-S4

(1) Separating Power Steering Controller .............................................. ..4-S4

(2) Separating Power Steering Cylinder ................................................... 4-S6

[3] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ................................................. .4-S8

(1) Power Steering Cylinder .................................................................... .4-S8

[4] SERVICING .............................................................................................. 4-S9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom

Cannot Be Steered

Hard Steering

Probable Cause

Steering controller malfunctioning

Power steering oil improper

Hydraulic pump malfunctioning

Flow priority valve malfunctioning

Steering controller malfunctioning

Steering controller malfunctioning Steering Force

Fluctuates

Flow priority valve malfunctioning

Air sucked in pump due to lack of oil

Air sucked in pump from suction circuit

Steering Wheel Turns Steering controller malfunctioning

Spontaneously When

Released

Front Wheels

Wander to Right and

Left

Steering controller malfunctioning

Air sucked in pump due to lack of oil

Air sucked in pump from suction circuit

Insufficient bleeding

Cylinder malfunctioning

Improper toe-in adjustment

Tire pressure uneven

Cylinder piping connected in reverse Wheels Are Turned to a Direction

Opposite to Steering

Direction

Steering Wheel Turns Insufficient bleeding

Idle in Manual

Air sucked in due to lack of oil

Steering

Noise Air sucked in pump due to lack of oil

Air sucked in pump from suction circuit

Oil Temperature

Increases Rapidly

Pipe deformed

Steering controller (relief valve) malfunctioning

Solution

Replace

Change with specified oil

Replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replenish

Repair

Replace

Replace

Replenish

Repair

Bleed

Repair or replace

Adjust

Inflate

Repair

Bleed

Replenish

Replenish

Repair

Replace

Replace

STEERING

Reference

Page

4-S5

G-13

5-S12

5-M6

I

4-S5

4-S5

5-M6

G-13

-

4-S5

4-S5

G-13

-

4-S7

G-23

G-41

4-S5, S6

-

G-13

G-13

-

-

4-S5

W1Q14322

4-S1

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

POWER STEERING BODY

Item

Relief Valve Operating

Pressure

Factory Specification

8.33 to 8.83 MPa

85.0 to 90.0 kgf/cm

2

1209 to 1280 psi

STEERING

Allowable Limit

-

W1013874

STEERING CYLINDER

Steering Cylinder I.D.

Piston Rod to Guide Clearance

40.000 to 40.062 mm

1.57480 to 1.57724 in.

0.020 to 0.070 mm

0.00079 to 0.00276 in.

40.100 mm

1.57874 in.

0.200 mm

0.00787 in.

W1013973

4-S2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES

Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.

(For general use screws, bolts and nuts: See page G-8.)

Item

Steering wheel mounting nut

Power steering hose mounting nut

Power steering cylinder hose

Tie-rod slotted nut

Power steering cylinder mounting screw

Tie-rod screw

N'm

20 to 25

28.4 to 30.0

23.6 to 27.4

17.7 to 34.3

48.1 to 55.8

74 to 84 kgf·m

2.0 to 2.6

2.9 to 3.1

2.4 to 2.8

1.8 to 3.5

4.9 to 5.7

7.5 to 8.6

STEERING

I ft-Ibs

14.8 to 18.4

20.9 to 22.1

17.4 to 20.2

13.0 to 25.3

35.5 to 41.2

54.6 to 61.9

W1012736

4-S3

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM STEERING

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING

(1) Relief Valve

Relief Valve Operating Pressure

1. Disconnect the power steering hose L (or R) from steering controller, and set a pressure gauge and hose.

(Reference)

• Hose and adaptor size : 9/16-18UNF, 37

0 flare

2. Start the engine and set at maximum speed.

3. Fully turn the steering wheel to the left (or right) to check the feeling which the steering wheel lightly locks. Read the relief valve operating pressure when the steering wheel to the above­ mentioned lock position by operation force at approximately 9.8

N (1 kgf, 2.2 Ibs) of outer .

• NOTE

• After set a pressure gauge, be sure to bleed air.

• Note that the pressure value changes by the pump action of the power steering controller when the steering operation is continued after the steering wheel is lightly locked and accurate relief valve pressure cannot be measured.

Relief valve operating pressure

Factory spec.

8.33 to 8.83 MPa

85 to 90 kgf/cm

2

1209 to 1280 psi

W1011481

[2] PREPARATION

(1) Separating Power Steering Controller

Battery

A

CAUTION

• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. When connecting, connect the positive cable to the battery first.

1. Remove the under panel (1).

2. Disconnect the negative cable (2) from the battery.

(1) Under Panel

(2) Battery

(3) Negative Cable

W1014990

4-S4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM STEERING

Steering Wheel

1. Remove the steering wheel cap (1).

2. Remove the steering wheel mounting nut and remove the steering wheel.

(When reassembling)

TIghtening torque

Steering wheel mounting nut

20 to 25 N'm

2.0 to 2.6 kgf·m

14.8 to 18.4 ft-Ibs

(1) Steering Wheel Cap

W1011793

Meter Panel

1. Disconnect the main switch connector and combination switch connector (7).

2. Remove the hand accelerator lever grip and cruise control lever knob.

3. Disconnect the hand accelerator wire (3) and then turn the hand accelerator lever (2) to the operator seat side.

4. Open the bonnet, remove the panel mounting screws and dismount the meter panel.

(1) Meter panel

(2) Hand Accelerator Lever

(3) hand Accelerator Wire

(4) Cruise Control Lever

(5) Main Switch

(6) Combination Switch

(7) Connector for Combination Switch

W1011901

3TAAAAB7P012A

Steering Controller

1. Disconnect the power steering hoses (1). (2). (3), (4).

2. Remove the steering controller mounting screws and remove the steering controller (5).

(When reassembling)

• Be sure to connect the power steering hoses to their original position, and tighten them to the specified torque.

TIghtening torque

Power steering hose mounting nut

28.4 to 30.0 N'm

2.9 to 3.1 kgf·m

20.9 to 22.1 ft-Ibs

(1) Cylinder Hose RH

(2) Cylinder Hose LH

(3) Delivery Hose

(4) Retum Hose

(5) Steering Controller

A: Bottom View

P: Pump Port

(Connect to Delivery Hose)

T: Tank Port

(Connect to Return Hose)

L: L Port

(Connect to Cylinder LH Hose)

R: R Port

(Connect to Cylinder RH Hose) a: Right b: Front

W1012133

4-S5

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM STEERING

(2) Separating Power Steering Cylinder

Bonnet and Under Cover

1. Remove the front guard (1).

2. Open the bonnet (2), and then loosen the knob bolts and pull forward to remove the under cover (3).

3. Disconnect the connectors (4) for head light and remove the bonnet bracket (5) with bonnet.

(1) Front Guard

(2) Bonnet

(3) Under Cover

(4) Connector

(5) Bonnet Bracket

W1013603

Front Axle Assembly

1. Remove the power steering hose cramp (1).

2. Place the garage jack under the front axle.

3. Remove the cotter pin (1).

4. Remove the slotted nut (2) of center pin and separate the front axle from the frame.

5. Disconnect the power steering cylinder hoses (4).

(When reassembling)

• After mounting the front axle assembly to the frame, be sure to adjust the front axle rocking force. (See page 3-S4)

• Installing the cotter pin and be sure to split the cotter pin like an anchor

Tightening torque

Power steering cylinder hose

23.6 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m

17.4 to 20.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Hose Cramp

(2) Cotter Pin

(3) Slotted Nut (Adjusting Nut for Front

Axle Rocking Force)

(4) Power Steering Hose

W1013885

4-S6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAF6P011A

STEERING

Power Steering Cylinder

1. Remove the cotter pin and remove the slotted nut for tie-rod (1).

2. Remove the power steering cylinder mounting screws and remove the power steering cylinder (2) with tie-rod.

(When reassembling)

• NOTE

• Tighten the slotted nut to 17.7 N'm (1.8 kgf'm, 13 ft-Ibs). If the slot and pin hole do not meet, tighten the nut until they do meet, and install the cotter pin.

• Be sure to split the cotter pin like an anchor.

Tightening torque

Tie-rod slotted nut

Power steering cylinder mounting screw

17.7 to 34.3 N'm

1.8 to 3.5 kgf·m

13.0 to 25.3 ft-Ibs

48.1 to 55.8 N'm

4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m

35.5 to 41.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Tie-rod (2) Power Steering Cylinder

W1016645

4-87

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM STEERING

[3]

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Power Steering Cylinder

(2)

(3)

Adaptor and Tie-rod

1. Remove the cylinder hose adaptors (4), (6).

2. Remove the tie-rods (2), (8) from piston rod (7).

3. Remove the cylinder holder (1) and internal snap ring (3).

(When reassembling) a

Be sure to install the hose adaptors (4), (6) as shown figure left. a

After reassembling the tie-rod, be sure to adjust the toe-in.

(Refer to 3-S4.)

TIghtening torque Tie-rod screw

74 to 84 N'm

7.5 to 8.6 kgf·m

54.6 to 61.9 ft-Ibs

3TAAAAB7P013A

(4) (5) (6) A

(1) Cylinder Holder

(2) Tie-rod RH

(3) Internal Snap Ring

(4) Hose Adaptor RH

(5) Cylinder

(6) Hose Adaptor LH

(7) Piston Rod

(8) TIe-rod LH

A: 0.26 rad (15°)

B: Front

W1012941

3TAAAAB7P014A

A (2) e'l

B • i;-.:AIiI"l1):::II:::'I'III-----=-7/-­

\

(4)

=ut..a..~d=-!Jl.l.l--I

\

I

3TAAAAB7P015A t

3

- ­

(5) (6)

(7) (8)

~J

(4)

Steering Cylinder

1. Carefully clamp the cylinder in a vise.

2. Push one of the guide assembly (3) to inside of cylinder tube (2).

3. Drill a hole (2.5 mm dia., 0.1 in. dia.) on the cylinder tube (2) just over the snap ring (4) as shown figure left.

4. Take a little screwdriver and lift off the snap ring (4) from its groove. Simultaneousness support this action by pushing from the outside of the cylinder tube with another little screwdriver or another tool.

5. Push out the piston rod assembly (9) and take off the guide assembly (3).

(When reassembling)

• NOTE

• Seals must be exchanged after disassembling.

• Apply transmission fluid to the exchanged seals.

• Enter the piston rod and block the guide assemblies with the snap rings.

(1) Piston Rod

(2) Cylinder Tube

(3) Guide Assembly

(4) Snap Ring

(5) Guide

(6) Seal Ring

(7) Wiper Ring

(8) O-ring

(9) Piston Rod Assembly

(10) Center Piston

A: Drill a Hole

B : 5.25 mm (0.267 In.)

W1013441

3TAAAAB7P016A

4-S8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[4] SERVICING

/ '

STEERING

Steering Cylinder 1.0.

1. Measure the steering cylinder 1.0. with a cylinder gauge.

2. If the cylinder 1.0. exceed the allowable limit, replace the cylinder barrel.

Factory spec.

Steering cylinder 1.0.

Allowable limit

.100 mm

57874 in.

W1013872

3TAAAAB7P017A

3TAAAAB7P018A

Clearance between Rod and Guide

1. Measure the rod guide 1.0. with a cylinder gauge.

2. Measure the rod 0.0. with an outside micrometer, and calculate the clearance.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace as a unit.

Clearance between rod and guide

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.020 to 0.070 mm

0.00079 to 0.00276 in.

0.200mm

0.00787 in.

W1013777

4-59

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. HYDRAULIC CIRCU IT .................................................................................. 5-M 1

2. HYDRAULIC PUMP ...................................................................................... 5-M2

3. CONTROL VALVE ........................................................................................ 5-M3

4. FLOW PRIORITY VALVE ... ......................................................................... 5-M6

5. RELIEF VALVE ............................................................................................. 5-M7

6. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER .............................................................................. 5-M9

7. HYDRAULIC BLOCK TYPE OUTLET ....................................................... 5-M10

8. MOWER LINKAGE .................. ................................................................... 5-M 11

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

( 1 ) - - - - r ­ i i i i i

i

I

L._.

.-.-------'--1 i i i i i

_______J

I i

(3)

i

I

I i

I

I i i

L-_-_-_____

.-4-.______

+-

II

II

II

II

II

II

.---+--+--1------------.-1

I

(5)

3TAAAAG8P015A

(1) Power Steering Controller

(2) Front Loader Control Valve

(3) Hydraulic Cylinder

(4) Control Valve

(5) Backhoe Control Valve

(6) PTO Clutch

(7) PTO Clutch Valve

(8) PTO Clutch Relief Valve

(9) Flow Priority Valve

(10) Oil Filter

(11) Relief Valve

(12) Hydraulic Transmission

(13) Oil Strainer

(14) Hydraulic Pump

The hydraulic system of this tractor is composed of a hydraulic pump, control valve, hydraulic cylinder and other components.

This system has the following functions.

1. Oil is supplied by hydraulic pump which is driven by pump drive shaft in the transmission case. As the pump drive shaft is connected to the propeller shaft, hydraulic pump starts running when engine is started.

2. The hydraulic pump supplies the high pressured oil to control valve for 3 point hitch system, power steering controller, PTO clutch valve and hydrostatic transmission after dividing oil flow by flow priority valve.

3. Hydraulic power take off from the hydraulic block type outlet to operate the implements such as a front loader and soon.

5-M1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2. HYDRAULIC PUMP

( 1

3TAAAAF8P037 A

(3) (4)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

The hydraulic pump is composed of the casing (1), cover (4), side plate (3), and two spur gears (drive gear

(5) and driven gear (2)) that are in mesh.

Hydraulic pump is driven by the pump drive shaft in the transmission case.

Maximum displacement is as follows.

Engine speed Condition Displacement

23.5 Umin.

6.2 U.S.gals.lmin.

5.2 Imp.gals./min.

At 3200 min·

1

(rpm) at no load

(1) Casing

(2) Driven Gear

(3) Side Plate

(4) Cover

(5) Drive Gear

(6) Pin

(7) Oil Seal

W1013860

(7)

3TAAAAG8P016A

(6)

5-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

3. CONTROL VALVE

This position control valve is located under the hydraulic cylinder.

This control valve is mechanically connected to the position control lever.

Since the feedback rod is not equipped to the lift arm, the neutral position adjustment is adjusted by controlling the position control lever.

The control valve controls the oil flow forced from the hydraulic pump and the oil returned back from the hydraulic cylinder .

• Neutral

3TAAMF8P027A

(3)

3TMMF8P034A

When stopping the position control lever, the spool is stopped.

The spool closes the oil flow from passage between

P port and C port.

Since the oil in the hydraulic cylinder is not drained to

T2 port, "Neutral" position is kept.

(1) Lift Arm

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

(3) Control Valve

(4) Spool

(5) Lowering Adjusting Shaft

P: Pump Port

C: Cylinder Port

T1 :Tank Port

T2 :Tank Port

W1015913

5-M3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Lift

(1 )

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

3TAAAAF8P028A

(3)

3TAAAAF8P035A

T1

When the control lever is set to the "Lift" position, the spool (4) moves to the right.

The oil forced into the control valve flows through P port to C port and the hydraulic cylinder.

The oil pushes the hydraulic piston in the hydraulic cylinder to lift the implement.

Since the spool shape is step down structure, oil passes slowly through the gap between the control valve body (3) and the spool (4) to C port.

In this tractor, when setting the control lever to the

"Slow up", implement lifts up with ease in increments of approximately 1/4 inches at lower link end.

(1) Lift Arm

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

(3) Control Valve

(4) Spool

(5) lowering Adjusting Shaft

P: Pump Port

C : Cylinder Port

T1 :Tank Port

T2 :Tank Port

W1016112

5-M4

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM

• Down

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

3TAAAAF8P029A

\

(3)

3TAAAAF8P036A

When the control lever is set to the "Down" position, the spool (4) moves to the left.

The oil forced from the P port flows through the gap between the control valve body and the spool to the T1 port.

The oil in the hydraulic cylinder flows through the gap between the control valve body (3) and the spool (4) to the T2 port.

Since the oil in the hydraulic cylinder drains to the transmission case, the implement lowers.

Since the spool shape is step down structure, oil pass slowly from C port through the gap between the control valve body (3) and the spool (4) to T2 port.

In this tractor, when setting the control lever to the

"Slow down" position, implement lowers down with ease in increments of approximately 1/4 inches at lower link end.

(1) Lift Arm

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

(3) Control Valve

(4) Spool

(5) Lowering Adjusting Shaft

P: Pump Port

C : Cylinder Port

T1 :Tank Port

T2 :Tank Port

W1016319

S-MS

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

4. FLOW PRIORITY VALVE

(3) EF

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

(1) Hydraulic Pump Gear

(2) Hydraulic Pump Case

(3) Plug

(4) Flow Priority Valve

(5) Relief Valve

EF :EF Port (To 3 Points Hitch

Control Circuit)

PF :PF Port (To Power

Steering, PTO Clutch and

HST Circuit)

P: Pump Port (Suction)

T: Tank Port

W1014933

3TAAAAF8P030A

The flow priority valve is a flow divider that divides single hydraulic source (hydraulic pump) to actuates two circuits simultaneously.

This valve feeds fixedly controlled flow (8.0 Llmin., 2.1 U.S.gals.lmin., 1.8 Imp.gals./min.) to the PF port with priority and excessive flow to the EF port.

5-M6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

5. RELIEF VALVE

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

(1) Hydraulic Pump Gear

(2) Hydraulic Pump Case

(3) Plug

(4) Flow Priority Valve

(5) Relief Valve

EF :EF Port (To 3 Points Hitch

Control Circuit)

PF :PF Port (To Power

Steering, PTO Clutch and

HST Circuit)

D.C.:Damping Chamber

P: Pump Port (Suction)

T: Tank Ports

W1015272

3TAAAAF8P030B

D.C.

The implement control system circuit has a relief valve to restrict the maximum pressure in the circuit. The relief valve is located in the hydraulic control valve assembly.

The relief valve is a guide piston type with damping effect.

Among direct acting relief vales, this type is suited to higher pressure and has large capacity. Furthermore, this type is free from unstable operation, such as chattering, which occurs often in direct acting relief valves.

As shown in the figure, the guide is attached to the poppet (5) and a valve chamber D.C. (called the damping chamber) is formed at the top of the guide piston. The inlet of the valve leads to the chamber via a clearance between the sliding portion of the guide and the seat (6), minimizing valve vibration with the damping effect of the chamber.

5-M7

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Relief Valve Operating

(3)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

(1) Hydraulic Pump Gear

(2) Hydraulic Pump Case

(3) Plug

(4) Flow Priority Valve

(5) Relief Valve

EF :EF Port (To 3 Points Hitch

Control Circuit)

PF :PF Port (To Power

Steering, PTO Clutch and

HST Circuit)

D.C.:Damplng Chamber

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Ports

W1016573

D.C.

3TAAAAF8P031 A

When the oil pressure in the circuit is lower than the setting pressure of the relief valve, the relief valve is not operated and the oil fed to the relief valve from the hydraulic pump flows into the implement control valve.

As the oil pressure in the circuit increases, so does the pressure in the damping chamber D.C .. When the pressure rises above the valve setting and overcomes the spring force, the valve opens. Oil then flows out to the transmission case through T port, preventing any further rise in pressure. The valve closes again when enough oil is released to drop pressure below the valve setting.

(Reference)

• Relief valve setting pressure: 12.3 to 12.7 MPa

125 to 130 kgf/cm

2

1778 to 1849 psi

• Engine speed: Maximum

• Oil temperature : 40 to 50°C

104 to 122 OF

5-M8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

6. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

3TAAAAF8P027B

(1) Lift Arm

(2) Hydraulic Arm

(3) Hydraulic Arm Shaft

(4) Hydraulic Rod

(5) Piston

(6) Spring

(7) Ball

(8) Lowering Speed Adjusting

Shaft

(9) Back-up Ring

(10) O-ring

(11) Hydraulic Cylinder

(12) Control Valve

P: Pump Port

C : Cylinder Port

The main components of the hydraulic cylinder are shown in the figure above.

While the lift arm (1) is rising, oil from the hydraulic pump flows into the hydraulic cylinder through the hydraulic control valve (12) and cylinder port (C). Then oil pushes out the piston (5).

While the lift arm (1) is lowering, oil in the hydraulic cylinder is discharged to the transmission case through the hydraulic control valve by the weight of the implement. At this time, the lowering speed of the implement can be controlled by the ball (7) attached to the hydraulic cylinder (11). Turning the lowering speed adjusting knob clockwise decreases the lowering speed, and counterclockwise increases lowering speed. When the lowering speed adjusting valve is completely closed, the lift arm (1) is held at its position since oil in the hydraulic cylinder is sealed between the piston (5) and ball (7).

5-M9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

7. HYDRAULIC BLOCK TYPE OUTLET

A

(1) (2)

The hydraulic block type outlet is located on the hydraulic cylinder assembly.

This hydraulic block type outlet is provided to take power out from the tractor to operate the hydraulic cylinders on the implement, such as front end loader, front snow blade and so on,

(1) Block Cover

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

(3) Hydraulic Block

A : When Loader Valve is not

Attached

B : When Loader Valve is

Attached

P: P Port (Pump) C : To Transmission Case

P.B. :P.B. Port (Power Beyond) D: To Implement

E: From Implement

W1014064

B P

(2) (3) P.B.

3TAAAAF8P032A

5-M10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

8. MOWER LINKAGE

0 a

0 I

0

CJ a

41

0

0

0

0

0

0 o

0

0

0

0

(5) (6) (7) (4)

(-J

,

\.

(8) o

0 0 \

, o 0 o

0 0 0

/

\

I

,

/

/

3TAMAF8P033A

(1) Mower Rear Link RH

(2) Lift Pin

(3) Mower Rear Link LH

(4) Rear Lift Link LH (7) Lift Arm

(5) Cutting Height Adjusting Dial (8) Adjusting Bolt

(6) Rear Lift Link LH (9) Lift Upper Boss

(10) Lift Lower Boss

(11) Cam

The mower rear link (1), (3) and the lift arm (7) are linked with the rear lift link LH (4). the lift upper boss (9) and the lift lower boss (10).

As the hydraulic control lever moves to lift position. lift arm (7) is raised and the rear lift link LH (6) is pulled to pull the lift links to the rearward. As a result. mower rear link (1). (3) are lifted.

The cutting height adjusting dial (5) adjusts cutting height of mower by rotating the adjusting cam (11). The position of mower rear link (1). (3) are adjusted by changing the length of the adjusting bolt (8).

5-M11

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................... 5-S1

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 5-S2

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES .............................................................................. 5-S3

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERViCiNG ...................................... 5-S4

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ............................................................... 5-S4

(1) Relief Valve ......................................................................................... 5-S4

(2) Pump and Priority Valve ..................................................................... 5-S5

(3) Mower Lift Linkage .............................................................................. 5-S6

[21 PREPARATION ........................................................................................ 5-S7

(1) Separating Hydraulic Cylinder ............................................................ 5-S7

(2) Separating Hydraulic Pump ................................................................ 5-S9

[3] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLlNG ................................................ 5-S13

(1) Hydraulic Cylinder and Control Valve ............................................... 5-S13

(2) Mower Lift Linkage ............................................................................ 5-S15

[4] SERVICING ............................................................................................ 5-S16

(1) Hydraulic Pump ................................................................................. 5-S16

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder ............................................................................. 5-S17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Symptom Probable Cause

Implement Does Not

Rise (No Noise)

Implement Does Not

Rise (Noise)

Implement Does Not

Lower

Implement Drops by

Its Weight

Control valve broken

Control valve improperly assembled

Relief valve spring damaged

Spool sticks

Piston O-ring or cylinder damaged

Oil filter cartridge clogged

Suction pipe loosen or broken

Suction pipe connecting hose loosen or broken

Suction pipe O-ring broken

Insufficient transmission oil

Relief valve setting pressure too low

Hydraulic pump broken

Control valve malfunctioning

Hydraulic cylinder worn or damaged

Piston O-ring worn or damaged

Control valve malfunctioning

Solution

Replace

Repair

Replace

Repair

Replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Refill

Adjust or replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Reference

Page

5-513

5-513

5-54 i

5-S13

5-S14

G-13

-

I

-

G-13

5-S4

5-S12

5-S13 i

5-S13

5-514

5-S13

W1014322

5-S1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B·23BX, lA240. BT601, WSM

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Relief Valve Setting Pressure

Hydraulic Pump

Condition

1

• . Engine Speed: 1500 min-

Oil Temperature: 45 to 55°C

(rpm)

113 to 131°F

Mower Linkage

Power steering oil flow

Factory Specification

12.3 to 12.7 MPa

125 to 130 kgf/cm

2

1778 to 1849 psi

Above 8.0 Llmin.

2.1 U.S.gals/min.

1.8 Imp.gals/min .

Clearance L2 o to 0.5 mm o to 0.019 in.

[Hydraulic Pump]

Gear to Casing Clearance

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Allowable Limit

I

-

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Gear

Case

Gear Shaft to Bushing

Gear Shaft

Bushing

Side Plate

Hydraulic Cylinder

0.0.

1.0.

Clearance

0.0.

1.0.

Thickness

1.0.

33.520 to 33.530 mm

1.3197 to 1.3200 in.

33.570 to 33.577 mm

1.3217 to 1.3219

0.020 to 0.091 mm

0.0008 to 0.0036 in.

14.970 to 14.980 mm

0.5894 to 0.5898 in.

15.000 to 15.061 mm

0.5906 to 0.5930 in.

2.48 to 2.50 mm

0.0976 to 0.0984 in.

80.05 to 80.15 mm

3.1516 to 3.1555 in.

0.12mm

0.0047 in.

2.40 mm

0.0945 in.

80.2 mm

3.1575 in.

W1013874

5-S2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES

Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.

(For general use screws, bolts and nuts: See page G-8.)

Item

ROPS mounting nut

Fuel tank stay mounting bolt and nut

Fender bracket mounting bolt

Hydraulic cylinder block mounting bolt

Hydraulic pump mounting bolt (M6)

Hydraulic pump mounting bolt (M8)

N'm

124 to 147

48.1 to 55.9

124 to 147

39.2 to 44.1

8.0 to 9.0

18.0 to 21.0 kgf'm

12.6 to 15.0

4.9 to 5.7

12.6 to 15.0

4.0 to 4.5

0.82 to 0.91

1.84 to 2.14 ft·lbs

91.2 to 108

35.4 to 41.2

91.2 to 108

28.9 to 32.5

6.0 to 6.6

13.3 to 15.4

W1012736

5-53

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

(1) Relief Valve

Relief Valve Setting Pressure

1. Disconnect the hydraulic hose (1).

2. Install the hose and adaptor A and B (3) with pressure gauge (2).

3. Start the engine and set at maximum speed.

4. Move the control lever all way up to operate the relief valve and read the gauge.

5. If the pressure is not within the factory specifications, adjust with the adjusting shim (5).

Relief valve setting pressure

Factory spec.

12.3 to 12.7 MPa

125 to 130 kgf/cm

2

1778 to 1849 psi

Condition

• Engine speed: Maximum

• Oil temperature: 45 to 55°C

113t0131 of

(Reference)

• Thickness of shim (5) :

0.1 mm (0.0039 in.), 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.), 0.4 mm (0.0157 in.)

• 0.27 MPa (2.74 kgf/cm

2

, 39.0 psi) pressure is increased whenever the thickness of adjusting shim is increased by 0.1 mm

(0.0039 in.).

(3)

3UBAAABNP060E

(1) Hydraulic Hose

(2) Pressure Gauge

(3) Adaptor Tee, Swivel (9/16-18)

(4) Relief Valve

(5) Shim

A: Adaptor Tee, Swivel (9/16-18)

B: Adaptor B

(a) Connect Pressure Gauge

(b) Connect Hydraulic Hose

W1011231

3TAAAAFBPOO4A

5-S4

BX25, RCK54{P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Pump and Priority Valve

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Checking Hydraulic Oil Flow

• IMPORTANT

• Use the instruction with the flowmeter when you use the flowmeter.

• While testing, do not close the flowmeter loading valve completely.

• NOTE

• To measure the flow volume of pump, oil flow on the power steering system side should be stopped.

1. Remove the pump hose.

2. Remove the hydraulic pipe behind the hydraulic cylinder and fix the flow meter hose and the flow meter as shown in the photo.

• Measure the flow volume of power steering.

1. Make sure that the flow volume of pump is 10 L (2.6 U.S.gals, 2.2

Imp.gals) or higher and verify the content below.

If the flow volume is insufficient, measure it after replacing the pump as its priority-valve is unreadable of its condition.

2. After measuring the flow volume, remove the flow meter then reassembling the hydraulic pipe to the originated position.

3. Remove the transmission fluid fitting plug, then fix the flow meter hose and the flowmeter.

4. Check that a flow volume meets the specifications when the engine revolution is 1500 min-

1

(rpm).

5. If the flow volume varies from the speCification, replace the priority valve then take measurement again.

Condition

• Engine speed: 1500 min-

1

(rpm)

• Oil temperature : 45 to 55°C

113t0131°F

Power steering oil flow . Factory spec.

Above 8.0Umin.

2.1 U.S.gals/min .

1.8 Imp.gals/min.

(Reference)

• Pump Oil Flow

Hydraulic pump delivery at no pressure

Factory spec.

Above 24.9 Umin.

6.6 U.S.gals/min.

5.5Imp.gals/min.

Condition

• Engine speed: Maximum

• Oil temperature: 45 to 55°C

113t0131°F

(1) Pump Hose (A) Pump Oil Flow

(8) Power Steering Oil Flow

W89746512

5-S5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3) Mower Lift Linkage

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Mower Lift Linkage

After reassembling the mower lift linkage, be sure to adjust it as follows.

1. Check the lift arm free play.

2. Loosen the adjusting nut (1) and start the engine.

3. Move the hydraulic control lever to Lift position until the relief valve operating. (Uppermost position)

4. Adjusting bolt (2) until the clearance between stopper and mower rear link LH gets a to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.019 in.)

5. Secure the lock nut (1).

Clearance L2 Factory spec. o to 0.5 mm o to 0.019 in.

(Reference)

I

Length L1

I

Factory spec.

I

17mm

0.669 In.

(1) Nut

(2) Bolt

(A) Upper View

L1 :Length

L2 :Clearance

W54698712

5-86

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

[2] PREPARATION

• Before proceeding this section, disassembling the loader assembling and backhoe. (Refer to section 8 and 9.)

(1) Separating Hydraulic Cylinder

Battery

A

CAUTION

• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. When connecting, connect the positive cable to the battery first.

1. Remove the under panel (1).

2. Disconnect the negative cable (2) from the battery.

(1) Under Panel

(2) Battery

(3) Negative Cable

W1026961

Roll-Over Protective Structures (RaPS) and Seat

1. Disconnect the lead wires from the hazard lights (2), (4) and turn signal lights (3), (5).

2. Remove the ROPS mounting nuts, and remove the ROPS (1).

3. Disconnect the seat switch connectors.

4. Remove the snap pin (7) and remove the seat (6).

(When reassembling) nghtening torque ROPS mounting nut

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 kgf-m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

(1) ROPS

(2) Hazard Light LH

(3) Turn Signal Light LH

(4) Hazard Light RH

(5) Turn Signal Light RH

(6) Seat

(7) Snap Pin

W1027220

Speed Control Pedal and Step

1. Remove the valve covers (3).

2. Remove the speed control pedals (1) and step (2).

(1) Speed Control Pedal

(2) Step

(3) Valve Cover

W1014726

5-S7

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Lever Grips and Fender

1. Disconnect the electric outlet connector (6).

2. Remove the lowering speed adjusting knob (5) and cutting height adjusting dial knob (4).

3. Remove the lever grips (2).

4. Remove the fender (1) with lever guide (3).

(1) Fender

(2) Lever Grip

(3) Lever Guide

(4) Cutting Height Adjusting Dial Knob

(5) Lowering Speed Adjusting Knob

(6) Electric Outlet

W1014865

Fuel Tank

1. Drain the fuel.

2. Disconnect the lead wire from fuel level sensor and fuel hoses from the fuel tank (1).

3. Remove the fuel tank stays (2). (3) and cushions. then remove the fuel tank (1).

4. Remove the PTO cover (4).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque

Fuel tank stay mounting bolt and nut

48.1 to 55.9 N'm

4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m

35.4 to 41.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Fuel Tank

(2) Fuel Tank Stay LH

(3) Fuel Tank Stay RH

(4) PTO Cover

W1027629

Fender Center Stay

1. Remove the fender bracket (2).

2. Remove the fender center stay (1).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque

(1) Fender Center Stay

Fender bracket mounting bolt

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

(2) Fender Bracket

W1027820

5-S8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Hydraulic Cylinder Block

1. Disconnect the mower linkage (1).

2. Remove the wireharness clamp and wireharness (3) move to the front side.

3. Remove the connecting bar (2).

4. Remove the hydraulic cylinder block mounting bolt.

5. Remove the hydraulic cylinder block (4).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque

Hydraulic cylinder block mounting bolt

39.2 to 44.1 N'm

4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m

28.9 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Mower Linkage

(2) Connecting Bar

(3) Wirehamess

(4) Hydraulic Cylinder Block

W1028149

(2) Separating Hydraulic Pump

Battery

A

CAUTION

• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. When connecting, connect the positive cable to the battery first.

1. Remove the under panel (1).

2. Disconnect the negative cable (2) from the battery.

(1) Under Panel

(2) Battery

(3) Negative Cable

W1028561

5-89

BX25, RCK54(P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Roll-Over Protective Structures (ROPS) and Seat

1. Disconnect the lead wires from the hazard lights (2), (4) and turn signal lights (3), (5).

2. Remove the ROPS mounting nuts, and remove the ROPS (1).

3. Disconnect the seat switch connectors.

4. Remove the snap pin (7) and remove the seat (6).

(When reassembling) nghtening torque ROPS mounting nut

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

(1) ROPS

(2) Hazard Light LH

(3) Turn Signal Light LH

(4) Hazard Light RH

(5) Tum Signal Light RH

(6) Seat

(7) Snap Pin

W1019672

Speed Control Pedal and Step

1. Remove the valve covers (3).

2. Remove the speed control pedals (1) and step (2).

(1) Speed Control Pedal

(2) Step

(3) Valve Cover

W12345678

Lever Grips and Fender

1. Disconnect the electric outlet connector (6).

2. Remove the lowering speed adjusting knob (5) and cutting height adjusting dial knob (4).

3. Remove the lever grips (2).

4. Remove the fender (1) with lever guide (3).

(1) Fender

(2) Lever Grip

(3) Lever Guide

(4) Cutting Height Adjusting Dial Knob

(5) Lowering Speed Adjusting Knob

(6) Electric Outlet

W85236974

Fuel Tank

1. Drain the fuel.

2. Disconnect the lead wire from fuel level sensor and fuel hoses from the fuel tank (1).

3. Remove the fuel tank stays (2), (3) and cushions, then remove the fuel tank (1).

4. Remove the PTO cover (4).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque

Fuel tank stay mounting bolt and nut

48.1 to 55.9 N'm

4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m

35.4 to 41.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Fuel Tank

(2) Fuel Tank Stay LH

(3) Fuel Tank Stay RH

(4) PTO Cover

W1020301

5-S10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Fender Center Stay

1. Remove the fender bracket (2).

2. Remove the fender center stay (1).

(When reassembling)

Tightening torque

(1) Fender Center Stay

Fender bracket mounting bolt

124 to 147 N'm

12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m

91.2 to 108 ft-Ibs

(2) Fender Bracket

W1020490

Hydraulic Cylinder Block

1. Disconnect the rear lift link LH (1).

2. Remove the wireharness clamp and move the wireharness (3) forward.

3. Remove the connecting bar (2).

4. Remove the hydraulic cylinder block mounting bolt.

5. Remove the hydraulic cylinder block (4).

Tightening torque

Hydraulic cylinder block mounting bolt

39.2 to 44.1 N'm

4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m

28.9 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Rear lift link

(2) Connecting Bar

(3) Wireharness

(4) Hydraulic Cylinder Block

W1020624

5-511

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Hydraulic Pump

1. Remove the hydraulic pipe (2) and disconnect the hose (1).

2. Remove the hydraulic pump (3).

Hydraulic pump mounting bolt (M6)

S.O to 9.0 N'm

0.S2 to 0.91 kgf·m

6.0 to 6.6 ft-Ibs

Tightening torque

Hydraulic pump mounting bolt (MS)

1S.0 to 21.0 N'm

1.S4 to 2.14 kgf·m

13.3 to 15.4 ft-Ibs

(When reassembling)

• Since the mounting bolt (4) is installed through the transaxle case to the transmission oil tank, seal the sealing tape to the mounting bolt (4) securely.

(1) Hydraulic Hose

(2) Hydraulic Pipe

(3) Hydraulic Pump

(4) Bolt (MS) (Through Bolt)

(5) Bolt (M6)

(6) Bolt (MS)

W102955S

3TAAAAF8P025B

5-S12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

[3]

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Hydraulic Cylinder and Control Valve

Control Valve

1. Remove the control valve (1).

2. Remove the internal snap ring (4) and draw out the spool (2).

(1) Control Valve

(2) Spool

(3) Plain Washer

(4) Internal Snap Ring

W1030131

3TAAAAF8P014A

3)

) Or/' (4)

Control Valve Lever

1. Pull out the pin (1).

2. Remove the control valve lever (3) and arm (2).

(1) Pin

(2) Arm

(3) Control Valve Lever

W1030453

(9)

Lift Arm, Hydraulic Arm Shaft and Hydraulic Arm

1. Remove the external snap rings (8), (10), and remove the lift arms (2), (7).

2. Draw out the hydraulic arm shaft (4).

(When reassembling)

• Align the alignment marks of the hydraulic arm (2) and hydraulic arm shaft (4).

• Align the alignment marks of the lift arms (2), (7) and hydraulic arm shaft (4).

• Apply grease to the right and left bushings and O-rings.

• Take care not to damage the O-ring.

(1) Hydraulic Cylinder Block

(2) Lift Arm LH

(3) O-ring

(4) Hydraulic Arm Shaft

(5) Hydraulic Arm

(6) O-ring

(7) Lift Arm RH

(8) External Snap Ring

(9) Cover

(10) External Snap Ring

W1031001

5-813

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Hydraulic Piston

1. Inject the compressed air into the hydraulic cylinder, and take out the hydraulic piston (1).

(When reassembling)

• Take care not to damage the O-ring (3) and backup ring (2).

• Apply transmission fluid to the O-ring.

• Replace the O-ring if it is defective, worn or scratched. which may cause oil leakage.

(1) Hydraulic Piston

(2) Back-up Ring

(3) O-ring

W1031555

Lowering Speed Adjusting Valve

1. Remove the internal snap ring (5) and remove the lowering speed adjusting shaft (6).

2. Remove the ball (2) and spring (1).

(When reassembling)

• Take care not to damage the O-rings.

(1) Spring

(2) Ball

(3) O-ring

(4) Stopper

(5) Internal Snap Ring

(6) Lowering Speed Adjusting Shaft

W1032074

3TAAAAF8P019A

5-S14

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Mower Lift Linkage

Disassembling Mower Linkage

(1 ) (2) (3) (4)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

(1) Mower Rear Link, RH

(2) Lift Link Rear, RH

(3) Cutting Height Adjusting

Dial Knob

(4) Cutting Height Adjusting

Rod

(5) Lift Arm, LH

(6) Link Adjusting Bolt

(7) Lift Link Rear, LH

(8) Mower Rear Link, LH

(9) Adjusting Cam

W1032616

3TAAAAG8P017 A

1. Remove the clevis pin and remove the mower rear link (7).

2. Remove the pin and remove the mower rear links (1), (8).

3. Remove both side of boss and remove the lift link rear RH (2).

4. Remove the cutting height adjusting dial knob (8).

5. Remove the nut and remove the adjusting cam (12) and cutting height adjusting rod (10).

(When reassembling)

• Adjust the length of the link acljusting bolt. (Refer to page 5-56.)

W1032750

5-515

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[4] SERVICING

(1) Hydraulic Pump

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Clearance between Tip of Gear Tooth and Casing

1. Measure the gear 0.0. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the casing 1.0. with a cylinder gauge and calculate the clearance.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit. replace the assembly.

I

C!earance between tip tooth and caSing

Allowable limit

0.15 mm

0.0059 in.

Gear 0.0.

Case 1.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

33.520 to 33.530 mm

1.3197 to 1.3200 in.

33.570 to 33.577 mm

1.3217 to 1.3219 in.

W1015764

3TAAAAF8P039A

3TAAAAF8P040A

3TAAAAF8P041 A

3TAAAAF8P042A

Clearance between Bushing and Shaft

1. Measure the gear shaft 0.0. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the bushing 1.0. with a cylinder gauge and calculate the clearance.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.

Clearance between bushing and shaft

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.020 to 0.091 mm

0.0008 to 0.0036 in.

0.12 mm

0.0047 in.

Shaft 0.0.

Bushing 1.0.

Factory spec.

Factory spec.

14.970 to 14.980 mm

0.5894 to 0.5898 in.

15.000 to 15.061 mm

0.5906 to 0.5930 in.

W1015972

Side Plate Thickness

1. Measure the side plate thickness with an outside micrometer.

2. If the thickness is less than the allowable limit, replace it.

Side plate thickness

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

2.48 to 2.50 mm

0.0976 to 0.0984 in.

2.40mm

0.0945 in.

W1016194

5-S16

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

3TAAAAF8P043A

3TAAAAF8P044A

-

3TAAAAB8P033B

'.

i.·

--+ -

, i • .-

,..

A

:L

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Hydraulic Cylinder Bore

1. Check the cylinder internal surface for scoring or damage.

2. Measure the cylinder 1.0. with a cylinder gauge.

3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the hydraulic cylinder block.

Cylinder I.D.

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

80.05 to 80.15 mm

3.1516to 3.1555 in.

80.2 mm

3.1575 in.

W10171300

Hydraulic Arm Shaft Bushing

1. Visually inspect the OX bushings for signs of wear or damage.

(The OX bushing tends to show concentrated wear.)

2. If the OX bushing is worn beyond the alloy thickness (A), replace it.

(Reference)

Hydraulic arm shaft bushing

Alloy thickness (A)

0.57 mm

0.0224 in.

Hydraulic arm shaft

LH

RH

A : Alloy Thickness

O.D.

0.0.

31.925 to 31.950 mm

1.2569 to 1.2579 in.

29.925 to 29.950 mm

1.1781 to 1.1791 in.

L: Outside Diameter

W1016329

5-517

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................................................................... 6~M1

2. STARTING SYSTEM .................................................................................... 6-M3

[1] MAIN SWITCH POSiTION ..................................................................... 6~M3

[2] SAFETY SWiTCH ................................................................................... 6-M4

[3] OPERATOR PRESENCE CONTROL (OPC) ....................................... 6~M6

3. CHARGING SYSTEM ................................................................................... 6~M7

[1] ELECTRICAL CIRCU IT .......................................................................... 6-M7

[2] IC REGULATOR (3P CONNECTOR TYPE) ........................................ 6-M8

4. LIGHTING SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 6~M9

5. GAUGES ...................................................................................................... 6-M10

[1] ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ........................................................................ 6-M10

[2] HOUR AND TACHOMETER ................................................................ 6-M11

[3J FUEL LEVEL GAUGE .......................................................................... 6~M11

[41 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ...................................................... 6-M12

6. OTHERS ...................................................................................................... 6-M13

[1] DC OUTLET .......................................................................................... 6~M13

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

1. WIRING DIAGRAM

Illumination

Oil Pressure Glow Lamp

~ ~ Blinker (L)

¢

H( o

Tail Light (12.8W)

Water Temperature

Gauge

Hazard Lamp (23W)

Tail Light (12.8W)

208

20R

3TAAMJ9P001A

Head Light (37.5W)

180r

188

180r

188

Fuse

70RW ope

Timer lOA 20RL lOA 20Y

OFF STOP'

ON RUN

GLOW

START a:

3: a:

;::' :'! a:

Ol

BAT

ON

(IGIM

Main Switch

6-M1

20Y

...L

20Y

Seat

LOY

R-PTO t

20Y

Safety Switch

Starter Motor

12V O.98A a:

;::'

50A

20WY

20LW

20G as;

O .

N '

?

rur

~~?eiaCh,

'HI

-

1

I

112 11 )(I91s.

5

-

:J

" 31211

I

20Yl

20RY l

121 11­

!XI

I I

...9=g; l'l

~ ~

Battery Charge

¢ e:!I

~

Gro,"" ignition (Switched Power)

FuelSensorSiQnaL

I

~ r~

Water Tern

5 Left Tum SiQnal

S Riaht Turn SiQnal

7 NC

8 Batterv CharQe

9 Glow

10 NC

11 Enaine Oil Pressure

12 Tach, Sional

13 Back UahtinQ

~~t

Fuel Gauge

Fuel n

Sensor

~~

20 B

~!

Flasher Unit a Ground b Hazard Switch d Left Tum Switch f Right Tum SiQnal h Batterv

20RW

16RG

20LW

20WR

~

T

20Yl i Left Tum SiQnal i

Riaht Tum Switch

~

Blinker Switch

_ _ '1JIJ r-+

Combination Switch

?OR, I ......-; RY

.­

18RY l80r ::I

20RY

20RG

I -

=--­

~~-

-

r-;;;J c:!RW

X""

8_

Or

"­

R

L

81

-:/

20B

U

Fuel Pump 20 RY

14B

14 RB

-fa!

W k' l' h

..... or Ing Ig t

Hazard Switch

Light Switch

20 RL

20 B

:G,

DC Outlet

~ ~ ~

W(J~ ~~. gU

ti

"

~

~

CJ fIr

Mrvrv

Soleoold

12V 12A

;

I :®-fu]1

7 j r

?iT

tr-

Alternator

Timer Relay Frame Earth

Glow Plug

FLECTRICAl SYSTEM

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

Color of Wiring

W .......... White

R ........... Red

L ........... Blue

P ........... Pink

B ........... Black

Br .......... Brown

Sb ........ , Sky Blue

WR ....... " .. White I Red

WY ........... White I Yellow

RB ........... , Red I Black

RW ............ Red I White

RG ............ Red I Green

RY ............. Red I Yellow

BW ......... Black I White

BR .......... Black I Red

GW ........ Green I White

YR .......... Yellow I Red

YL .......... Yellow I Blue

LW ......... Blue I White

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

W1019456

6-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2. STARTING SYSTEM

[1] MAIN SWITCH POSITION

(18)

20RW

(1 ) i''''''5A~

16RW

(12)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

:?CB

:?CRY

(15)

20 Y a:

N

50A

OFF S10

ON RUN

GLOW

STAAT

(7)

3TAAAAF9P038A

(13) (14)

(1) Fuse

(2) Seat

(3) Seat Turn Over

(4) R-PTO

(5) PTO

(6) HST Neutral

(7) Main Switch

(8) Slow Blow Fuse

(9) Starter Motor

(10) Battery

(11) Alternator

(12) Glow Lamp

(13) TImer Relay

(14) Frame Earth

(15) Fuel Pump

(16) Solenoid

(17) Glow Plug

(18) OPC TImer

When the main switch (7) is turned to the GLOW position, the terminal BAT is connected to the terminal ON and

AC. The glow plugs (17) become red-hot, and the preheat indicator lamp also lights on while preheating.

When the main switch is then turned to the START position with the safety switches on, the terminal BAT is connected to the terminals GLOW and ST. Consequently, battery (10) current flows to the starter motor (9) and start the engine.

The main switch automatically returns to the ON position, the terminal BAT is connected only to the terminal

GLOW, thereby causing the starting circuit to be opened, stopping the starter motor.

When the main switch turned from the ON position to the OFF position, the fuel cut-off solenoid moves the fuel injection pump control rack to the "No Fuel Injection" position and stops the engine.

The BX25 tractor (with the OPC timer (18))equipped the operator presence control (OPC) system which automatically stops the engine in approximately one second when operator stands from the seat while shifting the PTO clutch lever and range gear shift lever

6-M3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

[2] SAFETY SWITCH

There is one type of safety switch, normally closed type.

Normally closed type switch is electrically closed in normal condition.

Safety switches adopted in BX25 tractor operates as sensor detecting and transmitting the position of HST pedal,

PTO lever, independent PTO lever, and seat to engine stop solenoid.

Type of Switch

Normal open type

Normal close type

Safety Switch Name

Seat switch

PTO shift lever switch

Independent PTO Lever

Switch (Rear PTO Switch)

HST pedal neutral switch

Seat reverse switch

Number of Switch Contact

1

1

2

2

1

W1014916

6-M4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Lever I Pedal Position, Engine Condition and Switch Condition

Lever I Pedal Position

No.

HST Pedal

Neutral switch;

Neutral: ON

Forward or reverse: OFF

Independent PTO PTO Shift Lever

Lever Switch; Switch;

I-PTO engaged:

ON

I-PTO

R-PTO Selected:

ON

M-PTO or M and disengaged: OFF R-PTO Selected:

OFF

Operator's Seat

Switch;

Occupied: ON

Off Seat or

Vacant: OFF

1 f - ­

2

I - - ­

3

I - - ­

4

I - - ­

5

J - - ­

6

J - - ­

7

Neutral Position:

ON f - ­

8 f - ­

9 f - ­

10 f - ­

11 f - ­

12

Disengaged: OFF

Engaged: ON

R-PTO Selected:

ON

M-PTO or M and

R-PTO Selected:

OFF

R-PTO Selected:

ON

M-PTO or M and

R-PTO Selected:

OFF

On Seat: ON

Off Seat: OFF

On Seat: ON

Off Seat: OFF

On Seat ON

Off Seat: OFF

On Seat ON

Off Seat: OFF

On Seat: ON 13

J - - ­

14 f - - ­

15 f - - ­

16 f - ­

17 f - ­

18

, - - ­

Forward (OFF) or

Reverse (OFF)

19 f - ­

20

J - - ­

21

-

22

-

-

23

24

Disengaged: OFF

Engaged: ON

R-PTO Selected:

ON

M-PTO or M and

R-PTO Selected:

OFF

R-PTO Selected:

ON

M-PTO or M and

R-PTO Selected:

OFF

Off Seat: OFF

On Seat: ON

Off Seat: OFF

On Seat: ON

Off Seat: OFF

On Seat: ON

Off Seat: OFF

Seat Reverse

Switch;

Normal position:

OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF rse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Revers

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Normal: OFF

Reverse: ON

Engine Condition

Engine

Stopping

Engine

Starting

Running

Running

Stop

Running

Running

Can Start

Stop

Running

Stop

Stop

Stop

Running

Stop

Stop

Stop

Running

Stop

~

Running

Stoo

Can not

Start

I

Stop

!

Stop

W1015145

6-M5

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

[3] OPERATOR PRESENCE CONTROL (OPC)

The BX25 Tractor equips operator presence control (Ope) system which automatically stops the engine when operator stands up from the operator's seat while shifting the PTO lever or the speed control pedal.

Tractor without the ope timer stops quickly and tractor with the ope timer stops in approximately one second when standing up from the seat.

AW

(4) (5)

(1) Slow Blow Fuse

(2) Main Switch

(3) Fuse (10A)

(4) OPC Timer

(5) Seat SWitch (From Seat

Switch ON or OFF)

(6) Fuse

(7) Battery

(8) Engine Stop Solenoid Timer

Relay

(9) Engine Stop Solenoid

W1025506

(7) ­ r

3TAAAAF9P039A

• Electrical Circuit (Tractor with OPC Timer)

General electrical circuit of the tractor ope timer is shown in the figure.

1. When sitting on the operator's seat in the state of the main switch "ON", the battery voltage passes to the seat switch and the ope timer (4), and maintain the solenoid relay (8).

2. When standing up from the operator's seat, the circuit from the seat switch to the ope timer is cut.

However, if the PTO lever (or the speed control pedal) are set at "Neutral" position, the circuit from the battery to the solenoid relay (8) is formed with the

PTO switch (or HST switch).

3. When standing up from the operator's seat while shifting the levers, the circuit from the battery to the solenoid relay (8) is cut, and the engine is stopped by function of the solenoid (9).

• Seat Switch

The seat switch has two positions.

When the operator's seat is occupied, the switch contact point is at "ON" position. When the operator's seat is not occupied, its contact point is at "OFF" position.

• OPC Timer ope timer is located electrically at between the seat switch (5) and the solenoid relay (8).

When the current supply from the seat switch (5) is cut, the ope timer (4) adopted for the ope system has maintained the state of "ON" position for approximately one second.

W1025648

6-M6

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

3. CHARGING SYSTEM

[1] ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

(1)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SA 1

·

·

lSflY

,.Rl

208 lORY

1<.

"RS

209

(4)

(8)

3TAAAAF9P003A

(1) Illumination Light

(2) Battery Charge Lamp

(3) Fuse

(4) Main Switch

(5) Slow Blow Fuse

(6) Battery

(7) Alternator

(8) Frame Earth

The charging system supplies electric power for various electrical devices and also charges the battery while the engine runs.

6-M7

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

[2] IC REGULATOR (3P CONNECTOR TYPE)

3TAAAAF9P004A

(1 )

A BCD

3P connector is connected to the

Ie

regulator. 3P connector consists of three leads, Sb (Sky Blue) lead (1),

RY (Red I Yellow) lead (2), and WR (White I Red) lead

(3).

Sb (Sky Blue) lead (1) is a lead to transmit the puis from the alternator to hour meter and tachometer. When turning on the main switch to "ON" position. the hour meter indicates operated hours.

While the engine runs, the tachometer indicates the present engine revolutions.

RY (Red I Yellow) lead (2) is a lead to chassis.

WR (White I Red) lead (3) is a lead to the charge lamp.

(1) Sb (Sky Blue) Lead

(2) RY (Red I Yellow) Lead

(3) WR (White I Red) Lead

(4) Alternator Assembly

(5) Ie Regulator

(6) Load

(7) Load

A : To Main Switch

B : To Hour Meter and

Tachometer

C: To Ground o :

To Charge Lamp

W1013535

(7)

3TAAAAF9POO5A

6-MB

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

4. LIGHTING SYSTEM

(1)

(2) (3)

-& i\

(4)

~

(5) r:>

(6)

E!I

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(15) ro.

HHW

I

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

~-+

148 __

~

__

~-4 ___ '~4R~.

_ _

~ (22)

50A

(18)

3TAAAAF9POO6A

(1) Illumination Light

(2) Oil Pressure Lamp

(3) Glow Lamp

(4) Blinker (Left)

(5) Blinker (Right)

(6) Battery Charge Lamp

(7) Water Temperature Gauge

(8) Fuel Gauge

(9) Tail Light (12.8W)

(10) Hazard Lamp (23W)

(11) Thermo Unit

(12) Fuel Sensor

(13) Oil Pressure Switch

(14) Flasher Unit

(15) Head Light (37.5W)

(16) Fuse

(17) Combination Switch

(18) Main Switch

(19) Slow Blow Fuse

(20) Battery

(21) Alternator

(22) Working Light

The lighting system consists of main switch, head light switch, turn signal light switch, hazard switch, head lights, turn signal lights. tail lights, and etc ..

6-M9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

5. GAUGES

[1] ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

o

(1 )

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(6)

1SA '8RY a:

N

SOA

3TAAAAF9P007A (9)

(1) Hour and Tachometer

(2) Water Temperature Gauge

(3) Fuel Gauge

(4) Thermo Unit

(5) Fuel Sensor

(6) Fuse

(7) Main Switch

(8) Battery

(9) Frame Earth

The fuel quantity is indicated by the fuel gauge. The coolant temperature is indicated by the water temperature gauge.

6-M10

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[2] HOUR AND TACHOMETER

[3] FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

(1 )

A

(2)

- - - B

~~"o---A

20B

3TAAAAF9P008A

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

The electrical hour meter and tachometer is equipped on the meter panel.

This meter indicates the operated hours when the main switch is turned to "ON" position.

After starting the engine, this meter indicates the present engine revolution.

The meter picks up the voltage from the Ie regulator located in the alternator.

The

Ie

regulator sends a signal of the engine revolution to the meter.

The meter calculates the signal. It changes and indicates the signal to the engine revolution in cooperation with the voltage.

(1) Electrical Hour Meter and

Tachometer

W1013678

Fuel level gauge and fuel level sensor are connected by the wiring.

Fuel level gauge detects the resistance from the fuel level sensor.

Fuel level gauge indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank.

The relationship between the resistance of the fuel level sensor and the fuel level gauges is as follows.

Resistance of Fuel Level

Sensor

Approx. 110 n

Approx.3n

Reading on Fuel Level

Gauge

Empty

Full

(1) Fuel Level Gauge

(2) Fuel Level Sensor

A: Empty

B: Full

W10478523

6-M11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

[4] WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE

Be

3TAAAAF9P009A

Water temperature gauge is located on the meter panel board.

The water temperature gauge and the thermo unit are connected by the wiring.

The water temperature gauge detects the resistance from the thermo unit.

The water temperature gauge indicates the coolant temperature in the engine cylinder head.

The relationship between the resistance of thermo unit and reading on the water temperature gauge is as follows.

Resistance of Thermo Unit

Approx. 220 Q

Approx. 70 Q

Approx. 3 Q

Reading on Water

Temperature gauge

Min.

Start of red

Max.

(1) Water Temperature Gauge

(2) Thermo Unit

A: Min.

B : Start of Red

C: Max.

W10236547

6-M12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

6. OTHERS

[1] DC OUTLET

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(1 )

DC outlet is equipped to this machine.

The capacity of the DC outlet is 12 V I 120 W.

The electrical device as a CD player, a mobile phone battery charger can be used to the DC outlet.

The DC outlet (1) consists of the DC outlet body (3) and the cover (4).

(1) DC Outlet

(2) Electrical Device

(3) DC Outlet Body

(4) Cover

RL : Red I Blue Lead

B: Black Lead

W1021891

3TAAAAF9P010A

(1) (2)

3TAAAAF9P011 A

6-M13

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................6-S1

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 6-S5

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES .............................................................................. 6-S6

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING ...................................... 6-S7

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ............................................................... 6-S7

(1) Battery ................................................................................................. 6-S7

(2) Main Switch ......................................................................................... 6-S8

(3) Starter ............................................................................................... 6-S10

(4) Glow Plug .......................................................................................... 6-S10

(5) Safety Switch .................................................................................... 6-S11

(6) Operator Presence Control (OPC) Switch ........................................ 6-S13

(7) Fuel Pump ......................................................................................... 6-S15

(8) Engine Stop Solenoid ....................................................................... 6-S15

(9) Timer Relay ....................................................................................... 6-S 15

(10)Charging System .............................................................................. 6-S16

(11 )Alternator .......................................................................................... 6-S 16

(12)Combination Switch .......................................................................... 6-S18

(13)Gauge ............................................................................................... 6-S24

(14 )DC Outlet .......................................................................................... 6-S26

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ................................................ 6-S26

(1) Starter ............................................................................................... 6-S26

(2) Alternator .......................................................................................... 6-S27

[3] SERVICING ............................................................................................ 6-S28

(1) Starter ............................................................................................... 6-S28

(2) Alternator .......................................................................................... 6-S30

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

FUSE AND WIRING

Symptom Probable Cause

All Electrical

Equipments Do Not

Operate

Battery discharged or defective

Battery positive cable disconnected or improperly connected

Battery negative cable disconnected or improperly connected

Fuse Blown

Frequently

Slow blow fuse blown

Short-circuited

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Solution

Recharge or replace

Repair or replace

Reference

Page

G-17

Repair or replace -

Replace

Repair or replace -

W10143220

BATrERY

Battery Discharges

Too Quickly

Battery defective

Alternator defective

IC Regulator defective

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between battery positive terminal and regulator B terminal)

Cooling fan belt slipping

Replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Repair or replace

6-S7

6-S16

-

-

Adjust tension G-20

W10137180

STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Motor Does

Not Operate

Engine Does Not

Stop When Main

Switch is Turned OFF

Battery discharged or defective

Slow blow fuse blown

Safety switch improperly adjusted or defective

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between main switch 50 terminal and safety switches, between safety switches and starter motor, between battery positive terminal and starter motor)

Starter motor defective

Main switch defective

Fuse blown (15 A)

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between main switch AC terminal and engine stop solenoid)

Engine Does Not

Start

Engine stop solenoid defective

Timer relay defective

Engine stop solenoid defective

Timer relay defective

Recharge or replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

G-17

6-S13

-

6-S26

6-S8, S9

G-31

-

6-S15

6-S15

6-S15

I

6-S15

W1Q137180

6-S1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

OPERATOR PRESENCE CONTROL (OPC)

Symptom Probable Cause Solution

Engine Does Not

Stop

Starter Motor Does

Not Operate

Engine Stops When

HST Pedal is Pushed in Forward or in

Reverse

Engine Suddenly

Stops

Solenoid fuse blown (15A)

Timer replay defective

Engine stop solenoid defective

PTO shift lever switch defective

Independent PTO lever switch defective

HST pedal switch defective

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between timer relay and engine stop solenoid, between timer relay and battery positive terminal)

Solenoid fuse blown (15A)

Engine stop solenoid defective

Timer relay defective

Seat switch or seat turnover switch defective

PTO shift lever switch defective

Independent PTO lever switch defective

H ST pedal switch defective

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between timer relay and engine stop solenoid, between timer relay and battery positive terminal)

Wrong wiring of seat switch and seat tilt switch

Seat reverse switch

Replace

Replace

Replace

Adjust or replace

Adjust or replace

Adjust or replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Adjust or replace

Adjust or replace

Adjust or replace

Adjust or replace

Repair or replace

Proper Wiring

Adjust the switch position

Reference

Page

G-31

6-S15

6·S15

6·S12

6-S12

6-S12

-

G-31

6-S15

6-S15

6-S13

6-S12

6-S12

6-S12

-

6-S13

6-S13

W10236630

CHARGING SYSTEM

Charging Lamp Does Fuse blown (15 A)

Not Light when Main

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly

Switch is Turned ON connected (between main switch AC terminal and panel board, between panel board and dynamo)

Alternator defective

Charging Lamp Does

Not Go Off When

Engine is Running

IC regulator defective

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between main switch 30 terminal and dynamo, between panel board and dynamo)

Replace

Repair or Replace

Repair or Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

G-31

-

6-S16

-

Alternator defective

Ie

regulator defective

Repair or Replace

Replace

6-S16

-

W10135800

6-S2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

LIGHTING SYSTEM

Symptom Probable Cause Solution

Head Light Does Not

Light

Tail Light Does Not

Light

Illumination Light

Does Not Light

Fuse blown (15 A)

Bulb blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between main switch AC terminal and head light switch, between head light switch and head light) i

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Fuse blown (15 A)

Bulb blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between main switch AC terminal and head light switch, between head light switch and tail light)

Fuse blown (15 A)

Bulb blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between main switch AC terminal and head light switch, between head light switch and illumination light)

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Hazard Light Does

Not Light

Hazard Indicator

Lamp Does Not Light

I

Fuse blown (15 A)

Bulb blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected

Flasher unit defective

Hazard switch defective

Bulb blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected

Flasher unit defective Hazard Light Does

Not Flicker

Turn Signal Light

Does Not Light

Fuse blown (15 A)

Bulb blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected

Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Turn Signal Light

Indicator Lamp Does

Not Light

Turn Signal Light

Does Not Flicker

Flasher unit defective

Turn signal light switch defective

Bulb blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (blinker switch and indicator lamp)

Flasher unit defective

Turn signal light switch defective

Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

~ace eplace

Reference

Page

G-31

G-31

-

G-31

G-31

G-31

G-31

-

G-31

G-31

-

6-822

6-821

G-31

-

6-822

G-31

G-31

-

6-822

6-821

G-31

-

6-822

6-821

W10137180

6-83

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240. 8T601. WSM

LIGHTING SYSTEM (Continued)

Symptom Probable Cause

Glow Lamp Does Not

Light When Main

Switch Is in Pre-heat

Position

Oil Pressure Lamp

Lights Up When

Engine Is Running

Oil Pressure Lamp

Does Not Light When

Main Switch Is

Turned ON and

Engine Is Not

Running

Battery discharged or defective

Slow blow fuse blown

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between main switch 19 terminal and pre-heat indicator, between pre-heat indicator and glow plugs)

Main switch defective

Glow lamp defective

Engine oil pressure too low

Engine oil insufficient

Oil pressure switch defective

Short circuit between oil pressure switch lead and chassis

Bulb blown

Oil pressure switch defective

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between panel board and oil pressure switch)

Solution

Recharge or Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair engine

Replenish

Replace

Repair

Replace

Replace

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Repair or Replace

GAUGES

Fuel Warning Lamp

Does Not Light

Fuel gauge defective

Fuel level sensor defective

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between fuel ga~ge and fuel level sensor)

Coolant Temperature Coolant temperature gauge defective

Gallge Does Not

Coolant temperature sensor defective

Function

Wiring harness disconnected or improperly connected (between coolant temperature gauge and coolant temperature sensor)

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Replace

Replace

Repair or Replace

Reference

Page

G-17

G-31

-

G-31

6-S24

i

6-S8, S9

-

-

G-7

6-S24

i

I

I

W10135800

6-S24

6-S24

6-S25

6-S25

-

W10137180

6-S4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Battery Voltage

Factory Specification

More than 12 V

Glow Plug

Seat Stay to Seat Reverse Switch

Potential

Difference

Resistance

Clearance

Less than 0.1 V

Alternator

Head Light Switch

Blinker Switch

Hazard Light Switch

Charging Current I

Alternator Speed

Charging Voltage I

Alternator Speed

Switch OFF

ON

Switch OFF

R

L

Switch OFF

ON

Approx. 0.9 n

9 to 11 mm

0.355 to 0.433 in.

14 to 15 A I

5200 min-

1

(rpm)

14 to 15 A

5200 min-

1

I

(rpm)

Infinity on

Infinity on on

Infinity on

Starter

Commutator 0.0.

Mica

Brush

Difference of

O.D.'s

Undercut

Length

30.0 mm

1.181 in.

Less than 0.02 mm

0.0008 in.

0.50 to 0.80 mm

0.0197 to 0.0315 in.

14.0 mm

0.551 in.

Alternator

Starter Resistance

Rotor Resistance

Slip Ring 0.0.

Brush Length

I

Less than 1.0 n

2.9n

1.44 mm

0.5669 in.

10.0 mm

0.3937 in.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Allowable Limit

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

29.0 mm

1.142 in.

0.05 mm

0.0020 in.

0.20 mm

0.0079 in.

9.0mm

0.354 in.

-

-

14.0 mm

0.5512

1.5mm

0.0591

W10138740

6-S5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. TIGHTENING TORQUES

Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.

(For general use screws, bolts and nuts: See page G-B.)

Item N-m kgf-m

Starter

B terminal nut 5.9 to 11.B 0.6 to 1.2

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ft-Ibs

4.3 to B.7

W10127360

6-S6

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. 6T601. WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

A

CAUTION

• To avoid accidental short circuit, be sure to attach the positive cable to the positive terminal before the negative cable is attached to the negative terminal.

• Never remove the battery cap while the engine is running.

• Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothes. If you are spattered with it, wash it away completely with water immediately.

• Keep open sparks and flames away from the battery at all times. Hydrogen gas mixed with oxygen becomes very explosive .

• IMPORTANT

• If the machine is to be operated for a short time without battery (using a slave battery for starting), use additional current (lights) while engine is running and insulate terminal of battery. If this advice is disregarded, damage to alternator and regulator may result.

(1) Battery

Battery Voltage

1. Stop the engine and turn the main switch off.

2. Connect the COM (-) lead of the voltmeter to the battery's negative terminal post and the (+) lead to the positive terminal post, and measure the battery voltage.

3. If the battery voltage is less than the factory specification, check the battery specific gravity and recharge the battery.

Battery voltage Factory spec. More than 12 V

(1) Battery

W10125620

Battery Terminal Connection

1. Turn the main switch on, and turn on the head light.

2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the battery's positive terminal post and the cable terminal, and the voltage across the battery's negative terminal post and the chassis.

3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, clean the battery terminal posts and cable clamps, and tighten them firmly.

Potential difference Factory spec. Less than 0.1 V

W10126630

3TMABAB9P001 A

6-S7

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3EEABAB1 P034A

3EEABAB1P035B

(a) (b) (c)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Battery Specific Gravity

1. Check the specific gravity of the electrolyte in each cell with a hydrometer.

2. When the electrolyte temperature differs from that at which the hydrometer was calibrated, correct the specific gravity reading following the formula mentioned in (Reference).

3. If the specific gravity is less than 1.215 (after it is corrected for temperature), charge or replace the battery.

4. If the specific gravity differs between any two cells by more than

0.05, replace the battery.

• NOTE

• Hold the hydrometer tube vertical without removing it from the electrolyte.

• Do not suck too much electrolyte into the tube.

• Allow the float to move freely and hold the hydrometer at eye level.

• The hydrometer reading must be taken at the highest electrolyte level.

(Reference)

• Specific gravity slightly varies with temperature. To be exact, the specific gravity decreases by 0.0007 with an increase of 1 °C

(0.0004 with an increase of 1°F) in temperature, and increases by 0.0007 with a decreases of 1 °C (0.0004 with a decrease of 1

OF).

Therefore, using 20°C (68 OF) as a reference, the specific gravity reading must be corrected by the following formula:

- Specific gravity at 20°C = Measured value + 0.0007 x

(electrolyte temperature - 20 0c)

- Specific gravity at 68 of = Measured value + 0.0004 x

(electrolyte temperature 68 OF)

Specific Gravity

1.260 Sp. Gr.

1.230 Sp. Gr.

1.200 Sp. Gr.

1.170 Sp. Gr.

1.140 Sp. Gr.

State of Charge

100 % Charged

75 % Charged

50 % Charged

25 % Charged

Very Little Useful Capacity

1.110 Sp. Gr.

(a) Good

(b) Bad

Discharged

At an electrolyte temperature of 20 ·C (68 OF)

(e) Bad

W10127630

(2) Main Switch

Main Switch Connector Voltage

1. Remove the under cover panel.

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (4) and remove the main switch (1).

3. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector 30

(red) terminal and chassis.

4. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage (11 to 14 V), the wiring harness is faulty.

Voltage

Connector 30 terminal

- chassis

Approx. battery voltage

(1) Main Switch (2) 4P Connector

W10135530

6-S8

BX25, RCK54(P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAF9P015A

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Main Switch Continuity

1) Main Switch Key at OFF Position

1. Set the main switch OFF position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the B terminal and the ACC terminal, B terminal and ST terminal, B terminal and G terminal.

3. If infinity is not indicated, the contacts of the main switch are faulty.

B terminal - ACC terminal

B terminal - ST terminal Resistance Infinity

B terminal - G terminal

2) Main Switch Key at ON Position

1. Set the main switch ON position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the B terminal and the ACC terminal.

3. If 0 ohm is not indicated, the B ACC contact of the main switch are faulty.

I

Resistance

I

B terminal - ACC terminal

Ion

3) Main Switch Key at PREHEAT Position

1. Set and hold the main switch key at the PREHEAT position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the B terminal and the G terminal, and measure the resistance across the B terminal and the ACC terminal.

3. If 0 ohm is not indicated, these contacts of the main switch are faulty.

I

Resistance

B terminal - G terminal on

B terminal - ACC terminal

4) Main Switch Key at START Position

1. Set and hold the main switch key at the START position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the B terminal and the G terminal, across the B terminal and the ST terminal, and across the B terminal and the ACC terminal.

3. If 0 ohm is not indicated, these contacts of the main switch are faulty.

Resistance

B terminal G terminal

B terminal - 8T terminal

B terminal - ACC terminal on

(1) B Terminal

(2) 8T Terminal

(3) ACC Terminal

(4) G Terminal

W10136580

6-59

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3) Starter

3TMABAB9P007 A

3TMABAB9POO8A

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Motor Test

A

CAUTION

• Secure the starter to prevent if from jumping up and down while testing the motor.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery.

2. Disconnect the battery positive cable and the leads from the starter.

3. Remove the starter from the engine.

4. Disconnect the connecting lead (2) from the starter C terminal

(1 ).

5. Connect a jumper lead from the connecting lead (2) to the battery positive terminal post.

6. Connect a jumper lead momentarily between the starter motor housing and the battery negative terminal post.

7. If the motor does not run, check the motor.

(1) C Terminal

C : C Terminal

S: S Terminal

(2) Connecting Lead

W10142670

Magnet Switch Test (Pull-in, Holding Coils)

1. Remove the motor from the starter housing.

2. Prepare a 6 V battery for the test.

3. Connect jumper leads from the battery negative terminal to the housing and the starter C terminal.

4. The plunger should be attracted and the pinion gear should pop out when a jumper lead is connected from the battery positive terminal to the S terminal. It's a correct.

5. Disconnect the jumper lead to the starter C terminal. Then the pinion gear should remain popped out. It's a correct.

• IMPORTANT

• Testing time must be 3 to 5 sec ..

(a) To Negative Terminal

(b) To Positive Terminal

W1015210

(4) Glow Plug

Lead Terminal Voltage

1. Disconnect the wiring lead (2) from the glow plug (1) after turning the main switch off.

2. Turn the main switch key to the "PREHEAT" position, and measure the voltage between the lead terminal and the chassis.

3. Turn the main switch key to the "START" position, and measure the voltage with a voltmeter between the lead terminal and the chassis.

4. If the voltage at either position differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness or main switch is faulty.

Voltage

(Lead terminal ­

Chassis)

Main switch key at

"PREHEAT"

Main switch key at

"START"

Approx. battery voltage

Approx. battery voltage

(1) Glow Plug (2) Wiring Lead (Positive)

W10149130

6-810

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

Ii

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Glow Plug Continuity

1. Disconnect the lead from the glow plugs.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter between the glow plug terminal and the chassis.

3. If 0 ohm is indicated, the screw at the tip of the glow plug and the housing are short-circuited.

4. If the factory specification is not indicated, the glow plug is faulty.

Glow plug resistance Factory spec. Approx. 0.9 Q

Wl0151150

3TMABAB9P012A

(5) Safety Switch

3TAAAAF9P021 A

PTa Shift Lever Switch Continuity

1. Remove the left rear wheel.

2. Remove the PTO shift lever switch (1).

3. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the switch terminals.

4. If the resistance values specified below are not indicated, the safety switch is faulty .

• Plunger is pushed into the switch body

Resistance

1 terminal (5) •

2 terminal (6)

Factory spec. OQ

Resistance

3 terminal (7) ­

4 terminal (8)

Factory spec. on

• Plunger is released

Resistance

1 terminal (5)

2 terminal (6)

Factory spec.

Resistance

3 terminal (7) ­

4 terminal (8)

Factory spec.

(1) PTO Shift Lever Switch

(2) 2P Connector (LH)

(3) 2P Connector (RH)

(4) Plunger

Infinity

Infinity

(5) 1 Terminal

(6) 2 Terminal

(7) 3 Terminal

(8) 4 Terminal

W10158610

(7)

(8)

3TAAAAF9P022A

6-S11

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

(3)

(7)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HST Neutral Switch Continuity

1. Remove the right rear wheel.

2. Remove the HST neutral switch (1).

3. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the HST neutral switch terminals.

4. If the resistance values specified below are not indicated, the safety switch is faulty .

• Plunger is pushed into the switch body

Resistance

1 terminal (5) ­

2 terminal (6)

Factory spec. on

Resistance

3 terminal (7)

4 terminal (8)

Factory spec. on

• Plunger is released

Resistance

1 terminal (5) ­

2 terminal (6)

Factory spec.

Resistance

3 terminal (7)

4 terminal (8)

Factory spec.

(1) HST Neutral Switch

(2) 2P Connector (LH)

(3) 2P Connector (RH)

(4) Plunger

Infinity

Infinity

(5) 1 Terminal

(6) 2 Terminal

(7) 3 Terminal

(8) 4 Terminal

W10384760

(8)

3TAAAAF9P022A

6-S12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(6) Operator Presence Control (OPC) Switch

Seat Switch and Seat Reverse Switch Continuity Check

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors (2) from the seat switch (1) and the seat reverse switch (3).

2. Remove the seat switch and the seat reverse switch.

3. Connect the circuit tester to the terminals (4) .

• Seat Switch

1. Measure the resistance between terminals (4).

2. If continuity is not infinity, the switch is faulty. Replace it.

When switch is not pushed

Infinity

Seat switch Resistance

When switch is pushed on

• Seat Reverse Switch

1. Measure the resistance between terminals (3).

2. If continuity is not 0

n,

the switch is faulty. Replace it.

Seat reverse switch Resistance

When switch is not pushed on

When switch is Infinity pushed

(1) Seat Switch

(2) 2P Connector

(3) Seat Reverse

(4) Terminals

W10440960

Clearance between Seat Stay and Seat Reverse Switch

1. Slide the operator's to the reverse end position.

2. Measure the clearance (A) between the seat stay (1) and the seat reverse switch (3).

3. If factory specification is not indicated, slide the bracket (2) to indicated the factory speCification.

Clearance between seat stay and seat reverse switch

Factory spec.

9to 11 mm

0.355 to 0.433 in.

(1) Seat Stay

(2) Seat Bracket

(3) Seat Reverse Switch

A : Clearance

W10241110

3TAAAAG9P004A

6-S13

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Checking OPC Timer

1. Remove the OPC timer. (The OPC timer is located under the fender center stay.)

2. Connect the jumper leads across the battery terminal and the

Red I White terminal (2), and across the battery positive terminal and the Yellow terminal (3).

3. Connect the jumper lead across the battery negative terminal and the Black terminal (5), and across the battery negative terminal and the Blue terminal.

4. Connect the jumper lead across the Red terminal (4) and the bulb terminal.

5. The bulb lights up when disconnecting the jumper lead from the

Red I White terminal (2) 0.7 to 1.3 seconds, the OPC timer (1) is proper.

(1) OPC Timer (5) Black Terminal (To Frame Earth)

(2) Red I White Terminal (From Battery) (6) Bulb (Load)

(3) Yellow Terminal (From OPC Switch) (7) Battery

(4) Red Terminal (To Key Stop Solenoid)

W10647550

(7)

T

.J..

(6)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

3TAAAAF9P044A

6-814

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(7) Fuel Pump

OJ]

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Connector Voltage

1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the fuel pump.

2. Turn the main switch key to the "ON" position, and measure the voltage with a voltmeter between the connector terminals.

3. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness or main switch is faulty. tween connector

Voltage Approx. battery voltage

W1016341

3GFABAB9P021 B

Fuel Pump Continuity

1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the fuel pump.

2. Check the continuity between the connector terminals with an ohmmeter.

3. If it does not conduct, the fuel pump is faulty.

W1016134

3GFABAB9P022A

(8) Engine Stop Solenoid

3TAAAAB9P033A

(9) Timer Relay

1----11----'

(1)

3TAAAAB9P034A

Engine Stop Solenoid Test

1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the engine stop solenoid.

2. Remove the engine stop solenoid from the engine.

3. Connect the jumper leads from the battery positive terminal to the

1 P connector, and from the battery negative terminal to the engine stop solenoid body.

4. If the solenoid plunger is not attracted, the engine stop solenoid is faulty.

(1) Batlery(12V)

W1019658

Timer Relay Connector Voltage

1. Disconnect the connector from the timer relay after turning the main switch off.

2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector terminal 4 and chassis.

3. Turn the main switch on, and measure the voltage across the connector terminal 3 and chassis.

4. If these voltages differ from the battery voltage, the wiring harness or main switch is faulty.

Voltage

Connector terminal 4-chassis

Connector terminal 3-chassis

Approx. battery voltage

Approx. battery voltage

(1) Timer Relay

W1016544

6-S15

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2)

3TAAAAB9P035A

(1 )

F=

1~

2 4 =::::

-

-

I

(3)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Test of Timer Relay

1. Remove the timer relay from the tractor.

2. Connect jumper leads across the battery positive terminal and the timer relay terminal 3, and across the battery positive terminal and the timer relay terminal 4.

3. Connect jumper leads across the battery negative terminal and the timer relay terminal 2, and across the battery negative terminal and the bulb terminal.

4. Connect jumper lead across the timer relay terminal 1 and the bulb terminal.

5. The bulb lights up when disconnecting a jumper lead from the terminal 3 arid goes off 6 to 13 seconds late, the timer relay is proper.

(1) Timer Relay

(2) Load (Lamp)

(3) Battery (12V)

W1016721

(10) Charging System

(1)

3TAAAAB9P038A

+

Battery Charging Current

1. After starting the engine, disconnect the battery positive cord (+), and connect an ammeter and voltmeter. Then switch on all electrical loads (such as head lights) and measure the charging current.

• NOTE

• Connect an ammeter only after starting the engine.

• When the electrical loads is considerably low or the battery is fully charged, the speCified reading may not be obtained.

Factory spec.

Current

Voltage

Alternator speed

14to15A

14to15V

5200 min-

1

(rpm)

(1) Battery Positive Cord

W1048417

(11) Alternator

Stator

1. Measure the resistance across each lead of the stator coil with resistance range of circuit tester.

2. If the measurement is not within factory specification, replace it.

3. Check the continuity across each stator coil lead and core with resistance range of circuit tester.

4. If infinity is not indicated, replace it.

Resistance actory spec. Less than 1.0 0

W1019964

Rotor

1. Measure the resistance across the slip rings.

2. If the resistance is not the factory speCification, replace it.

3. Check the continuity across the slip ring and core with resistance range of circuit tester.

4. If infinity is not indicated, replace it.

Resistance Factory spec. 2.90

W1020094

6-516

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

3EEABAB1 P195A

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Slip Ring

1. Check the slip ring for score.

2. If scored, correct with an emery paper or on a lathe.

3. Measure the 0.0. of slip ring with vernier calipers.

4. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.

Slip ring 0.0.

, Factory spec.

Allowable limit

14.4mm

0.567 in.

14.0mm

0.551 in.

W1045871

Brush Wear

1. Measure the brush length with vernier calipers.

2. If the measurement is less than allowable limit, replace it.

3. Make sure that the brush moves smoothly.

4. If the brush is defective, replace it.

Brush length

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

10.5 mm

0.413 in.

8.4mm

0.331 in.

W1020329

Rectifier

1. Check the continuity across each diode of rectifier with resistance range of circuit tester.

2. The rectifier is normal if the diode in the rectifier conducts in one direction and does not conduct in the reverse direction.

W1020452

3EEABAB1 P197 A

3EEABAB1P198A

6-S17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(12) Combination Switch

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Combination Switch

1. Remove the meter panel, and disconnect the combination switch connector.

2. Remove the combination switch (1) and perform the following checks 1) to 8).

(1) Combination Switch

(2) Red I Yellow Lead

(3) Green Lead

(4) Black I Blue Lead

(5) Blue I White Lead

(6) Yellow Lead

(7) Orange Lead

(8) Red I White Lead

(9) Green I White Lead

W1049462

3TAAAAF9P030A

1) Connector Voltage

1. Connect the combination switch connector to the main wire harness.

2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector B1 terminal and chassis when the main switch is ON position.

3. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness and main switch is faulty.

Main switch at

"ON" position

B1 terminal ­

Chassis

Battery voltage

W1050272

2) Head Light Switch Continuity when Setting Switch at "OFF"

Position

1. Set the light switch to the OFF position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the red I yellow lead (1) to the orange lead (4). the red I yellow lead (1) to the yellow lead (3).

3. If infinity is not indicated, the head light switch is faulty.

Resistance

(Switch at OFF position)

Red I Yellow lead (1 ) -

Orange lead (4)

Red I Yellow lead (1)

Yellow lead (3)

Infinity

(1) Red I Yellow Lead

(2) Blue I White Lead

(3) Yellow Lead

(4) Orange Lead

(5) Red I White Lead

A: Head Light "OFF" Position

W1050981

6-S18

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAF9P027C

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3) Head Light Switch Continuity when Setting Switch at "ON"

Position

1. Set the light switch to the ON position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the red I yellow lead (1 ) to the orange lead (4) and the red I yellow lead (1) to the yellow lead (3).

3. If infinity is not indicated, the head light switch is faulty.

Resistance

(Switch at ON position)

Red' Yellow lead (1)­

Orange lead (4)

Red' Yellow lead (1) ­

Yellow lead (3) on

(1) Red 'Yellow Lead

(2) Blue I White Lead

(3) Yellow Lead

(4) Orange Lead

(5) Red' White Lead

A: Head Light "OFF" Position

W1051881

3TAAAAF9P027D

4) Turn Signal Light Switch Continuity when Setting Switch

Knob "OFF" Position

1. Set the tum signal switch knob to the OFF position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the green lead

(1) and red I white lead (2), and across to the green lead (1) and green I white lead (3).

3. If infinity is not indicated, the combination switch is faulty.

Resistance

(Switch knob at OFF position)

Green lead (1) - Red'

White lead (4)

Green lead (1)

Green I White lead (3) on

(1) Green Lead

(2) Red I White Lead

(3) Green' White Lead

A: Turn Signal Light Switch "OFF"

Position

W1052305

6-S19

BX25, RCK54(P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM

3TAAAAF9P027E

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5) Turn Signal Light Switch Continuity when Setting Switch

Knob "RIGHT" Position

1. Set the turn signal switch knob to the RIGHT position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the green lead

(1) and red I white lead (2), and across to the green lead (1) and green I white lead (3).

3. If 0 n is not indicated, the combination switch is faulty.

Resistance

(Switch knob at RIGHT position)

Green lead (1) - Red I

White lead (4)

Green lead (1)

Green I White lead (3) on

Infinity

(1) Green Lead

(2) Red I White Lead

(3) Green I White Lead

A : Turn Signal light Switch "RIGHT"

Position

W1052995

6) Turn Signal Light Switch Continuity when Setting Switch

Knob "LEFT" Position

1. Set the turn signal switch knob to the LEFT position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the green lead

(1) and red I white lead (2), and across to the green lead (1) and green

3. If 0

I white lead (3).

n

is not indicated, the combination switch is faulty.

Resistance

(Switch knob at LEFT position)

Green lead (1) - Red I

White lead (4)

Green lead (1)­

Green I White lead (3)

Infinity on

(1) Green Lead

(2) Red I White Lead

(3) Green I White Lead

A : Turn Signal Light Switch "LEFT"

Position

W1053450

6-S20

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAF9P027G

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

7) Hazard Switch Continuity when Setting Switch Knob at

"OFF" Position

1. Set the hazard switch knob to the OFF position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the black I blue lead (1) and blue I white lead (2).

3. If infinity is not indicated, the combination switch is fautty.

Resistance

(Hazard switch at OFF position)

Black I Blue lead (1) ­

Blue I White lead (2)

Infinity

(1) Black I Blue Lead

(2) Blue I White Lead

A : Hazard Switch "OFF" Position

W1053841

3TAAAAF9P027H

8} Hazard Switch Knob at "ON" Position

1. Set the hazard switch knob to the ON position.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the black / blue lead (1) and blue I white lead (2).

3. If 0 n is not indicated, the combination switch is faulty.

Resistance

(Hazard switch at ON position)

Black I Blue lead (1)­

Blue I White lead (2) on

(1) Black I Blue Lead

(2) Blue I White Lead

A: Hazard Switch "ON" Position

W1054637

6-521

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Flasher Unit

1. Remove the under panel.

2. Disconnect the coupler (2) from flasher unit.

3. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the terminal hand terminal c or chassis.

4. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring hamess is faulty.

Voltage

Terminal h

Terminal c or Chassis

Approx. battery voltage

(1) Flasher Unit (2) Coupler

W1055033

3TAAAAB9P046A

I

I

(1)~

AC

2!....A

3

)

~I

~I

I I

~J

3TAAAAB9P047 A

Flasher Unit Actuation Test

1. Set the hazard switch to the ON position, and make sure the hazard light gives 60 to 85 flashes for a minute.

2. With the main switch and the hazard switch at the ACC and ON positions, respectively, move the turn signal light switch to the left. Make sure that the right-hand light stays on and the left-hand light gives flashes earlier (by about 20 flashes) than when the hazard lamp is activated. Then move the turn signal light switch to the right and make sure the corresponding actions take place.

3. Now set the main switch to the ACC position and move the blinker switch alone. Make sure the same actions as above result.

4. If both the hazard switch and the turn signal light switch function but the above actions do not take place, replace the flasher unit with new one.

(1) Hazard Light Switch

(2) Turn Signal Light Switch

(3) Flasher Unit

W10456987

6-S22

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601. WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Charge Lamp (Charging Circuit)

1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the alternator after turning the main switch OFF.

2. Tum the main switch ON and connect a jumper lead from the wiring harness connector terminal (White I Red) to the chassis .

• NOTE

• If you connect the jumper lead from the wiring harness connector terminal (White I Red) to the chassis, 15A fuse will be blown. Do not connect the lead to Red I Yellow terminal.

3. If the charge lamp does not light, the wiring harness or fuse is faulty.

(1) Alternator

(2) 3P Connector

(3) Sb (Sky Blue) Terminal

(4) RY (Red / Yellow) Terminal

(5) WR (White / Red) Terminal

A: To Main Switch

B : To Hour Meter and Tachometer

C : To Change Lamp

0: To Ground

W10456321

Engine Oil Pressure Lamp

1. Disconnect the lead (2) from the engine oil pressure switch (1) after turning the main switch OFF.

2. Tum the main switch ON and connect a jumper lead from the lead to the chassis.

3. If the engine oil pressure indicator lamp does not light, the wiring harness is faulty.

(1) Engine Oil Pressure Switch

(2) Lead

(a) From Oil Pressure Lamp

W10325487

(1)~

3TMABAB9P037 A

6-523

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Engine Oil Pressure Switch Continuity

1. Disconnect the lead (2) from the engine oil pressure switch (1).

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the switch terminal and the chassis.

3. If 0 ohm is not indicated in the normal state, the switch is faulty.

4. If infinity is not indicated at pressure over 4.9 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm

2,

7 psi), the switch is faulty.

00

Resistance

(Switch terminal ­

Chassis)

In normal state

At pressure over approx. 4.9 kPa

(0.5 kgffcm

2 ,

7 psi)

Infinity

(1) Engine Oil Pressure Switch (2) Lead

W1055934

(1 )

3TMABAB9P038A

(13) Gauge

F

3TMABAB9P040A E

3TMABAB9P041 A

3TMABAB9P042A

(a)

Fuel Level Sensor

1) Sensor Continuity

1. Remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank.

2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the sensor terminal and its body.

3. If the reference values are not indicated, the sensor is faulty.

Resistance

(Sensor terminalits body)

Reference value

Float at upper-most position

Float at lower-most position

1 to 50

103 to 117 0

E: Empty F: Full

W10582369

Coolant Temperature Sensor (Thermo Unit)

1) Lead Terminal Voltage

1. Disconnect the lead from the coolant temperature sensor after turning the main switch OFF.

2. Turn the main switch ON and measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the lead terminal and the chassis.

If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness, fuse or coolant temperature gauge is faulty.

Voltage Lead terminal - Chassis Approx. battery voltage

2) Sensor Continuity

1. Measure the resistances with an ohmmeter across the sensor terminal and the chassis.

2. If the reference value is not indicated, the sensor is faulty.

Resistance

(Sensor terminal

Chassis)

Reference value

Approx. 16.1 0

Approx. 27.4 0 at 120 °C (248 OF) at 100°C (212 OF)

Approx. 51.9 0

Approx. 153.90 at 80°C (176 OF) at 50°C (122 OF)

(1) Coolant Temperature Sensor (a) From Temperature Gauge

W10458796>

6-S24

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Hour Meter and Tachometer

1. Disconnect the 3P connector (4) from the IC regulator (9) located in the alternator (5) after starting the engine.

2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the hour meter terminal (6) and the alternator body when the hour meter or tachometer does not indicated the proper value.

3. If the measured voltages differ from the specified voltage, the hour meter and tachometer is faulty.

Voltage while engine runs at idling speeds

Hour meter terminal

Alternator body

Approx. battery voltage

(1) Sb (Sky Blue) Lead

(2) RY (Red I Yellow) Lead

(3) WR (White I Red) Lead

(4) 3P Connector

(5) Alternator

(6) Hour Meter and Tachometer

Terminal

(7) Ground Terminal

(8) Charge Lamp Terminal

(9) IC Regulator

A : To Main Switch

B : To Hour Meter and Tachometer

C: To Ground

0: To Charge Lamp

W1057349

(1 )

(2)

(3)

(5)

3TAAAAF9P032A

6-525

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(14) DC Outlet

3TAAAAF9P034A

(1 )

(2)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DC Outlet Connector Voltage and DC Outlet Continuity

1. Disconnect the connector from the DC outlet. And turn the main switch "ON".

2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector red I blue lead and the chassis.

If the voltage differs from the battery voltage the wiring harness is faulty.

3. Disconnect the connector from the DC outlet. Since the DC outlet can not be removed easily, measure the continuity with a ohm meter across the plus terminal (3) and the nut (5), and across the earth terminal (3) and the DC outlet case (6).

4. If the resistance differs from 0 ohm, the DC outlet body (1) is faulty.

DC outlet connector voltage

Red I Blue lead - Chassis Battery voltage

DC outlet continuity

Plus terminal Nut

Earth terminal case

DC outlet on

(1) DC Outlet Body

(2) Fuse

(3) Earth Terminal (for Chassis)

(4) Plus Terminal (for Battery)

(5) Nut

(6) DC Outlet Case

W1063447

I

J

(3)

(6)

3TAAAAF9P036A

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Starter

Motor

1. Disconnect the connecting lead (9) from the magnet switch (8).

2. Remove the screws (6), and then separate the end frame (4), yoke (2) and armature (1).

3. Remove the two screws (5), and then take out the brush holder

(3) from the end frame (4).

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to the spline teeth (A) of the armature (1).

(9)

3TMABAB9P013A

Tightening torque Nut (7)

5.9 to 11.8 N'm

0.6 to 1.2 kgf·m

4.3 to 8.7 ft-Ibs

(1) Armature

(2) Yoke

(3) Brush Holder

(4) End Frame

(5) Screw

(6) Screw

(7) Nut

(8) Magnet Switch

(9) Connecting Lead

A: Spline Teeth

W1016288

6-S26

BX25. RCK54(P).23BX, RCK60B·23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAB9P036A

~

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Magnet Switch

1. Remove the drive end frame (1) mounting screws.

2. Take out the overrunning clutch (2), ball (3), spring (4), gears (5), rollers (6) and retainer (7).

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to the gear teeth of the gears (5) and overrunning clutch (2), and ball (3).

(1) Drive End Frame

(2) Overrunning Clutch

(3) Ball

(4) Spring

(5) Gear

(6) Roller

(7) Retainer

W1016728

Plunger

1. Remove the end cover (1 ).

2. Take out the plunger (2).

(1) End Cover (2) Plunger

W1016883

3TMABAB9P015A

~~

~~

(2) Alternator

Alternator

1. Check the battery charging voltage while engine runs.

2. Check the increasing voltage when increasing the engine revolution.

3. If the battery charging voltage does not increase, the alternator is faulty,

4. Replace the alternator as an assembly.

(1) Battery

W1058597

6-S27

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

[3] SERVICING

(1) Starter

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Overrunning Clutch

1. Inspect the pinion for wear or damage.

2. If there is any defect, replace the overrunning clutch assembly.

3. Check that the pinion turns freely and smoothly in the overrunning direction and does not slip in the cranking direction.

4. If the pinion slips or does not rotate in the both directions. replace the overrunning clutch assembly.

W1016990

3EEABAB1P188A

3EEABAB1P182A

3EEABAB 1 P183A

(1)~(2)

(a) (b)

~(3)

-..

3EEABAB1 P184A

Commutator and Mica

1. Check the contact face of the commutator for wear, and grind the commutator with emery paper if it is slightly worn.

2. Measure the commutator 0.0. with an outside micrometer at several pOints.

3. If the minimum 0.0. is less than the allowable limit, replace the armature.

4. If the difference of the O.O.'s exceeds the allowable limit, correct the commutator on a lathe to the factory speCification.

5. Measure the mica undercut.

6. Ifthe undercut is less than the allowable limit, correct it with a saw blade and chamfer the segment edges.

Commutator 0.0.

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

30.0mm

1.181 in.

29.0mm

1.142 in.

Difference of O.D.'s

Mica undercut

(1) Segment

(2) Undercut

(3) Mica

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

Less than 0.02 mm

0.0008 in.

0.05 mm

0.0020 in.

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

0.50 to 0.80 mm

0.0197 to 0.0315 in.

0.20mm

0.0079 in.

(a) Correct

(b) Incorrect

W1017092

3TAAAAB9P037 A

(A)

Brush Wear

1. Ifthe contact face ofthe brush is dirty or dusty, clean it with emery paper.

2. Measure the brush length (A) with vernier calipers.

3. If the length is less than the allowable limit, replace the yoke assembly and brush holder.

Brush length (A)

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

14.0 mm

0.551 in.

9.Omm

0.354 in.

W1017544

6-S28

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, 8T601, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Brush Holder

1. Check the continuity across the brush holder and the holder support with an ohmmeter.

2. If it conducts, replace the brush holder.

W1017672

3EEABAB1P189A

Armature Coil

1. Check the continuity across the commutator and armature coil core with an ohmmeter.

2. If it conducts, replace the armature.

3. Check the continuity across the segments of the commutator with an ohmmeter.

4. If it does not conduct, replace the armature.

W1017767 i

3EEABAB1 P186A

Field Coil

1. Check the continuity across the lead (1) and brush (2) with an ohmmeter.

2. If it does not conduct, replace the yoke assembly.

3. Check the continuity across the brush (2) and yoke (3) with an ohmmeter.

4. If it conducts, replace the yoke assembly.

(1) Lead

(2) Brush

(3) Yoke

W1018015

3EEABAB1 P190A

3EEABAB1P191A

6-S29

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM

(2) Alternator

Bearing

1. Check the bearing for smooth rotation.

2. If it does not rotate smoothly, replace it.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

W1019790

3EEABAB1 P192A

Alternator Components

1. When the alternator does not generator or does not charge the battery, replace the alternator as an assembly.

W1060576

6-S30

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY DECALS

I

The following safety decals are installed on the mower.

If a decal becomes damaged, illegible or is not on the mower, replace it. The decal part number is listed in the parts list.

[RCK60B-23BX, RCK54-23BX]

(A) t

(1) Part No. K5112-7311-1

(A) Forward

(3) Part No. K5763-4715-1

ACAUTION

(2) Part No. K5112-7312-1

ADANGER

DO NOT PUT HANDS OR FEET

INTO MOWER WHEN ENGINE

IS RUNNING.

1BDACADAPOO4E

1

3 TAAAAGCP002A

7-1

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[RCK54P·23BX]

(A) Forward

(1) Part No. K5617-731 1-1

[ :

I

~[

.~

::

&DANGER

'.... 2 11: '.

~

:,M:\ :,,; fJ:

,

\ . I

. . . . . . t , •

-~~[S ~:: ::::...

~

::~

1 BDABBSAP0030

(2) Part No. K5617-7312-1

(3) Part No. K5763-4715-1

ACAUTION

1 BDABBSAP0020

CARE OF DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS

1. Keep danger, warning and caution labels clean and free from obstructing material.

2. Clean danger, warning and caution labels with soap and water, dry with a soft cloth.

3. Replace damaged or missing danger, warning and caution labels with new labels from your local KUBOTA dealer.

4. If a component with danger, warning or caution label (s) affixed is replace with new part, make sure new label (s) is (are) attached in the same locations (s) as the replaced component.

5. Mount new danger, warning and caution labels by applying on a clean dry surface and pressing any bubbles to outside edge.

3TAAAAGCPOO3A

7-2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

TERMINOLOGY

[RCK60B-23BX, RCK54-23BX]

TERMINOLOGY

(8) (9) (10) (11 )

3TAAAAFFP001 A

(1) Front Anti-scalp Roller

(2) Belt Cover (Left)

(3) Gear Box

(4) Belt Cover (Right)

(5) Discharge Deflector

(6) Universal Joint

(7) Deck

(8) Outer Blade (Right)

(9) Center Anti-scalp Roller

(10) Center Blade

(11) Outer Blade (Left)

(12) Rear Anti-scalp Roller

(13) Self-balancer (RCK60B-23BX only)

7-3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[RCK54P-23BX)

TERMINOLOGY

(8) (9) (10)

3TAAAAFFP003A

(1) Front Anti-scalp Roller

(2) Belt Cover (Left)

(3) Gear Box

(4) Belt Cover (Right)

(5) Discharge Deflector

(6) Universal Joint

(12)

(7) Deck

(8) Outer Blade (Right)

(9) Center Anti-scalp Roller

(10) Center Blade

(11) Outer Blade (Left)

(12) Rear Anti-scalp Roller

7-4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

SPECIFICATIONS

Model RCK60B-23BX

Mounting method

Self-balance suspended linkage

Adjustment of cutting height

Cutting width

Cutting height

Weight (Approx.)

Blade spindle speed

Blade tip velocity

Blade length

Number of blades

Overall length

Dimensions

Overall width

Overall height (Min.)

1524 mm (60 in.)

115 kg (250 Ibs)

44.1 rls

(2647 rpm)

72.5 m/s

(14271 fpm)

523 mm

(20.6 in.)

1000 mm

(39.4 in.)

1930 mm

(76.0 in.)

281 mm (11.0 in.)

SPECIFICATIONS

RCK54P-23BX

Quick-Joint, Parallel linkage

RCK54-23BX

Suspended linkage

Dial gauge

1375 mm (54 in.)

25 to 102 mm (1.0 to 4.0 in.)

86 kg (190 Ibs)

49.5 rls

(2969 rpm)

73.8 m/s

(14527 fpm)

475mm

(18.7 in.)

3

908mm

(35.7 in.)

1700 mm

(67.0 in.)

291 mm(11.5in.)

1372 mm (54 in.)

95 kg (210 Ibs)

928mm

(36.5 in.)

1780 mm

(66.5 in.)

281 mm (11.0 in.)

W1028770

7-5

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. POWER TRANSMISSION ............................................................................ 7-M1

2. LIFTING MECHANISM ................................................................................. 7-M2

3. SELF-BALANCER SYSTEM ......................................................................... 7-M3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. POWER TRANSMISSION

(2) (3) o o o

000

ROTARY MOWER o o

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

3TAAAAFMP001A

(1) 19T Bevel Gear

(RCK54-23BX,RCK54P-23BX)

(2) 16T Bevel Gear

(RCK54-23BX, RCK54P­

1ST Bevel Gear

(RCK60B-23BX)

23BX)

17T Bevel Gear

(RCK60B-23BX)

(3) Pinion Shaft

(4) Universal Joint

(5) Mid-PTO Shaft

(6) Center Blade

(7) Center Pulley

(8) Bevel Gear Shaft

(9) Mower Belt

(10) Blade Shaft

(11) Outer Pulley

(12) Outer Blade

The power is transmitted from mid-PTO to blades as follows:

• Center Blade

Mid-PTO Shaft (5) ~ ~ Pinion Shaft (3) Bevel Gear (1) ~ Bevel Gear (2) ~ Bevel Gear

Shaft (8) ~ Center Blade (6)

• Outer Blade

Mid-PTO Shaft (5) ~ ~ Pinion Shaft (3) ~ Bevel Gear (1) ~ Bevel Gear (2) ~ Bevel Gear

Shaft (8) ~ Center Pulley (7) ~ Mower Belt (9) ~ Outer Pulley (11) ~ Blade Shaft (10) ~ Outer Blade (12)

7-M1

ROTARY MOWER BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2. LIFTING MECHANISM

0

0

0 o

0 0

0

\

,

)

J

/ '

(1 ) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

3TAAAAFMP002A

(5) Rear Lift Link (LH) (6) Lift Arm (1) Front Link

(2) Rear Link

(3) Lift Link

(4) Rear Lift Link (RH)

The lifting of mower is performed by the hydraulic system installed on the tractor.

The mower should be kept lift when traveling. When the position control lever is moved to "LIFT" position, the lift arm (6) is lifted up by the oil pressure of hydraulic system, and the rear lift link (LH) (5) is pulled rearward.

Therefore, rear lift links (4), (5) rotate and the mower is lifted by the lift links (3) and rear links (2).

As this link system is a parallel linkage, the mower can be kept parallel at every position.

A

CAUTION

• Never operate mower in transport position.

7-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

3. SELF-BALANCER SYSTEM

This system reduces the stepped differences in cutting height when mowing rolling terrain.

3TAAAAFMP003A

3TAAAAFMP004A

(A)

• Self-Balancer

1. The mower deck is held in place via the balancer plate (4) and the support by the rear link (1), (2).

2. The mower deck is suspended by, and is tilted to the right and left by, the balancer support (5). The balancer springs (3) at both sides adjust themselves for suitable tension to keep the mower deck out of excessive tilt.

• Without Self-Balancer Type (A)

• When working on a wavy ground, the tractor itself, with the mower deck, goes along the curves of the terrain. If not equipped with the self-balancer, the tractor tends to tilt itself greater than the ground's waves by its own weight. This may cause an uneven mowing. The wider the mower is, the more unevenness is caused.

• With Self-Balancer Type (B)

• When working on a wavy ground, the tractor itself goes along the curves of the terrain like with the tractor that is not equipped with the self-balancer.

The balancer springs (3), however, serve to keep the mower deck in parallel with the ground's curves until the anti-scalp roller (6) comes in contact with the ground.

• If the tractor temporarily tilts itself more than the ground's slope or the like, the anti-scalp roller (6) touches the ground. Now the mower deck is brought back in parallel with the ground by the counterforce of the roller (6) just hitting the ground as well as the tension of the balancer springs (3). This helps reduce an uneven mowing.

(c)

-'-LLLI..l.LI.UI..l.LL.._

3GMAAACMP004B

(8)

• NOTE

• Always keep the anti-scalp roller with specified position (Refer to Operator's Manual).

(1) Rear Link (RH)

(2) Rear Link (LH)

(3) Balancer Spring

(4) Balancer Plate

(5) Balancer Support

(6) Anti-scalp Roller

(7) Mower Deck

(A) Without Self-Balancer

(B) With Self-Balancer

(a) Tilt: Tractor

(b) Tilt: Mower Deck

(c) Ground

(d) Grass

W1013200

(b)

ITTTITTTTI'irrrr;;..z::\-----;'

(c) ---.LUJL.U.LU.LU.U.l..1.Lm"-...:.::J.I.lJlillUlllUlWlLL..-.J.rn.uJWl

3GMAAACMP005A

7-M3

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 7-S1

[1] MOWER IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................... 7-S1

[2] LUBRICANTS ........................................................................................... 7-S2

[3] TIGHTENING TORQUES (GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLT AND

NUTS) ....................................................................................................... 7-S3

[4] MEINTENANCE CHECK L1ST ................................................................ 7-S4

[5] CHECK AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 7 -S5

(1) Check Points of Daily or Each Use ..................................................... 7 -S5

(2) Check Point of Initial 50 Hours ............................................................ 7 -S7

(3) Check Point of Every 150 Hours ......................................................... 7 -S7

(4) Check Point of Every 2 years ............................................................. 7 -S7

[6] SETTING UP MOWER ........................................................................... 7-S8

[7] MOWER ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................ 7 -S 11

2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................. 7-S16

3. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................. 7-S17

4. TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................................ 7-S18

5. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING .................................... 7-S19

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ............................................................. 7-S19

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ................................................ 7 -S20

[3] SERVICING ............................................................................................ 7-S26

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

1. GENERAL

[1] MOWER IDENTIFICATION

ROTARY MOWER

When contacting your local KUBOTA distributor, always specify mower serial number.

(1) Mower Serial Number

W1015293

7-S1

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601. WSM

[2] LUBRICANTS

No.

1 Gear Box

Place

RCK60B·23BX

RCK54-23BX

RCK54P-23BX

Capacity

0.36 L

0.38 U.S.qts

0.32 Imp.qts

0.15 L

0.16 U.S.qts

0.13Imp.qts

Greasing

2 Universal joint

~hree spindle shafts

4 elt tension pulley

5 Belt tension pivot

6 Balance shaft (RCK60B-23BX only)

7 Front and rear anti-scalp roller

Until grease overflows

ROTARY MOWER

Lubricants

SAE 90 gear oil

(API Service GL-5 gear oil)

SAE multi-purpose type grease

NLGI·2 or NLGI-1 (GC-LB)

7-S2

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

[3] TIGHTENING TORQUES (GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLT AND NUTS)

Screws, bolts and nuts whose tightening torques are not specified in this Workshop Manual should be tightened according to the table below.

Indication on top of bolt

Material of bolt

0 @

No-grade or 4T

SS400,S20C ill 7T

S43C,S48C

® 9T

SCr435,

SCM435

Material of opponent part

Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness i

~it

Diameter

N'm kgf·m IbHt N·m kgf'm IbHt N·m kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf·m IbHt

,

M6

(6 mm, 0.24 in.)

M8

(8 mm, 0.31 in.)

M10

(10 mm, 0.39 in.)

M12

(12 mm, 0.47 in.)

M14

(14 mm. 0.55 in,)

7.9 0.80 5.8 7.9 0.80 5.8 9.81 1.00 7.24 7.9 0.80 5.8 12.3 1.25 9.05 to to to to to to to to to to to to to to

9.3 0.95 6.8 8.8 0.90 6.5 11.2 1.15 8.31 0.90 6.5 14.2 1.45 10.4

18 1,8 to to

20 2.1

40 to

45 4.6

13 to

15

29 to

33

17

~~

32 to

34

1.7 to

2.0

13 to

14

3.2 24 to to

3.5 25

24 to

27

48 to

55

2.4 to

2.8

4.9 to

18 to

20

36 to

5.7 41 to

20

1.8 to

2.1

13 to

15

40 4.0 to to

29 to

44 4.5 32

30 to

34

61 to

70

3.0 to

3.5

22 to

25

6.2 to

45 to

7.2 52

63 6.4 to to

72 7.4

47 to

53

108 11.0 79.6 to to to

125 12.8 92.5

-

-

78 7.9 to to

90 9.2

58 to

66

124 12.6 91.2 to to to

147 15.0 108

63 6.4 to to

72 7.4

-

47 103 10.5 76.0 to to to to

53 117 12.0 86.7

167 17.0 123

to to to

196 20.0 144

M16

(16 mm, 0.63 in.)

M18

(18 mm, 0.71 in.)

M20

(20 mm, 0.79 in.)

167 17.0 123 to to to

191 19.5 141

246 25.0 181 to to to

284 29.0 209

334 34.0 246 to to to

392 40.0 289

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

197 20.0 145 to to to

225 23.0 166

275 28.0 203 to to to

318 32.5 235

368 37.5 272 to to to

431 44.0 318

-

260 26.5 192 to to to

304 31.0 224

-

344 35.0 254

to to to

402 41.0 296

-

491 to

5~0 362 to

568 58.0 419

Wi 034542

American standard cap screw with UNC or UNF threads.

Grade

SAEGR.5

G

~

5/16

3/8

112

9116

518

N'm kgf'm

23.1 to 27.7

48 to 56

2.35 to 2.83

4.9 to 5.8

109to~

149.2 to

11.1 to 13.2

15.21 to 18.24

203.4 to 20.74 to 24.88

IbNt N'm

17.0 to 20.5 32.6 to 39.3

35.0 to 42.0

80.0 to 96.0

110.0 to 132.0

61.1 to 73.2

~to

178.9

.0 to 260.3

150.0 to 180.0 298.3 to 357.9

SAEGR.8

@ kgf'm

3.32 to 4.00

6.23 to 7.46

15.21 to 18.24

22.12 to 26.54

30.42 to 36.49

IbNt

24.0 to 29.0

45.0 to 54.0

110.0 to 132.0

160.0 to 192.0

220.0 to 264.0

W1016345

7-S3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

[4] MEINTENANCE CHECK LIST

To keep the mower working in good condition as well as to avoid any accident and trouble, carry out periodic inspection and maintenance. Check the following points before use.

Service interval

Daily (Each use)

Initial 50 hours

Every 150 hours

Every 2 years

(After purchase)

Check points

Anything unusual in previous day's operation

Make sure mower blade screws are tighten

Check mower blades for wear or damage

Check gear box oil level

Check oil leaks

Check all hardware

Make sure all pins are in place

Clean mower deck

Apply grease to universal joint

Apply grease to spindle shafts

Apply grease to belt tension pulley

Apply grease to belt tension pivot

Apply grease to balance shaft (RCK60B-23BX only)

Apply grease to front and rear anti-scalp roller

Change gear box oil

Change gear box oil

Replace gear box oil seal

Reference

Page

-

7-55

7-54

7-57

-

-

7-55

7-56

7-56

7-56

7-56

7-56

7-57

7-56

7-57

W1016625

7-54

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. lA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

[5) CHECK AND MAINTENANCE

(1) Check Points of Daily or Each Use

Retightening Mower Blade Screw

A

CAUTION

• To avoid injury, always handle the mower blade with care.

1. Dismount the mower and turn it over to expose the mower blades.

2. Wedge a block of wood securely between the mower blade and mower deck.

3. Retighten the mower blade screw to the specified torque.

4. If the mower blade screw is worn or broken. replace it.

3GMAAACMP007 A

(1 )

Tightening torque Mower blade screw

98.1 to 117.1 N'm

10.0 to 12.0 kgf·m

72.3 to 86.8 ft-Ibs

(1) Mower Blade Screw

W1025290

Checking Gear Box Oil Level

1. Place the mower on level ground.

2. Loosen the check plug (1). and check to see if oil seems from the opening.

3. If the oil level is low, remove the oil filler plug (2) and add new gear oil .

• IMPORTANT

• Use the specified gear oil.

Refer to "LUBRICANTS". (See page 7·S2.)

(1) Check Plug

(2) Oil Filler Plug

(3) Drain Plug

[A] RCK60B·23BX, RCK54-23BX

[B] RCK54p·23B

W1025491

Greasing Universal Joint

1. Grease the internal splines (1) and grease nipples (2) of the universal joint if the amount of grease is insufficient.

(1) Spline

~

(2)

(2) Grease Nipple

W1013305

3TAAAAFMP023A

7-S5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

[A]

(1 )

ROTARY MOWER

Greasing Spindle Shafts, Belt Tension Pivot and Tension Pulley

1. Grease the grease nipples (1). (2) of the spindle shafts if the amount of grease is insufficient.

(1) Grease Nipple (Spindle Shaft) [A] RCK60B-23BX. RCK54-23BX

(2) Grease Nipple (Belt Tension Pulley) [B] RCK54P-23BX

(3) Grease Nipple (Belt Tension Pivot)

W1013808

(3)

3TAAAAFMP024A

[8]

(2)

(3)

3TAAAAFMP025A

3TAAAAFMP024B

(2)

Greasing Balance Shaft (RCK60B-23BX)

1. Grease the grease nipple (1) of the balance shaft if the amount of grease is insufficient.

(1) Grease Nipple

W1014604

Greasing Front and Rear Anti-scalp Rollers

1. Grease the grease nipple (1). (2) of the front and rear anti-scalp rollers if the amount of grease is insufficient.

(1) Grease Nipple (Front Anti-scalp

Roller)

(2) Grease Nipple (Rear Anti-scalp

Roller)

W1017331

7-S6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

(2) Check Point of Initial 50 Hours

Changing Gear Box Oil

A

CAUTION

• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before changing the oil.

[RCK60B-23BX, RCK54-23BX]

1. Dismount the mower from the tractor, and place the mower on level ground.

2. Remove the oil filler plug (2).

3. Remove the drain plug (1), and drain the used oil completely.

4. After draining the used oil, reinstall the drain plug.

5. Fill with new oil up to the specified level.

[RC K54P-23BXJ

1. To drain the used oil, remove the oil filter plug (2) at the mower gear box, tilt the mower deck and drain the oil completely into the oil pan.

2. After draining, reinstall the filter plug (2).

3. Fill with new oil up to the filter plug port.

4. After filling, reinstall the oil filter plug (2) .

• IMPORTANT

• Use the specified gear oil.

Refer to "LUBRICANTS". (See page 7-S2.)

(1) Drain Plug

(2) Oil Filter Plug

[A] RCK60B-23BX, RCK54-23BX

[B) RCK54P-23BX

W1017456

(3) Check Point of Every 150 Hours

Changing Gear Box Oil

1. See above.

W1017729

(4) Check Point of Every 2 Years

Replacing Gear Box Oil Seal

1. Replace the gear box oil seals (1), (2) with new ones.

(1) Oil Seal (2) Oil Seal

W1017780

3GMAAACMP013A

7-57

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[6] SETTING UP MOWER

ROTARY MOWER

Assembling Mower

1. Place the mower on blocks as illustrated.

Turn the anti-scalp rollers sideways and attach to the arms of the deck at the upper position with clevis pins and snap rings.

Remove the blocks.

2. Attach the discharge to the deck with the spring, discharge pin and cotter pin.

Secure the spring to the discharge deflector as illustrated.

(1) Anti-scalp Roller

(2) Block

(3) Clevis Pin

(4) Snap Ring

(5) Deck

(6) Discharge Pin

(7) Discharge Deflector

(8) Spring

(9) Cotter Pin

W1016757

3TAAAAFMP028A

3TAAAAFMP029A

Setting Mower

A

CAUTION

• Park the tractor on a firm, flat and level surface, set the parking brake, stop the engine and remove the key.

1. Start the engine and the hydraulic lever rearward to raise the mower rear link to the highest position.

2. Stop the engine and remove the key.

3. Roll the mower under the tractor from right side.

(1) Hydraulic Control Lever

W1016877

7-S8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

Universal Joint

1. Pull back the coupler (3) of the universal jOint (2).

2. Push the universal joint (2) onto the mid-PTO shaft (1), until the coupler locks.

3. Slide the universal joint back and forward to make sure the universal jOint is locked securely .

• IMPORTANT

• Finally, tug on the universal joint to make sure it is locked on the PTO shaft.

(1) Mid-PTO Shaft

(2) Universal Joint

(3) Coupler

A: Tug

W1017099

(3)

3TAAAAFMP040A

Rear Link

1. Set the cutting height control dial (1) to zero inch position.

2. Operate the tractor's hydraulic control lever (2) forward to lower the mower rear links (3).

Attach the rear link (3) to the mower with the L-pins (4).

(1) Cutting Height Control Dial

(2) Hydraulic Control Lever

(3) Rear Link

(4) L-pin

W1017307

7-S9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

Front Link

1. Hook the front link (1) to the front bracket groove (2) as shown in the figure.

(Reference)

• Make sure the length (L) of the front link (1) is 47 mm (1.85 in.).

(1) Front Link (2) Front Bracket Groove

W1017424

3TAAAAFMP033A

(6)

3TAAAAFMP035A

3TAAAAFMP036A

Mounting Front Link

1. Position the front lever to the front link bracket.

2. Pull and lock the L pin. Then lower the front lever.

3. Hook the front link to the lever fulcrum, and lift the front lever.

4. Release the L pin to lock the front lever.

• NOTE

• When hooking the front link to the lever fulcrum, normal position of the lever fulcrum groove is open to downward .

• IMPORTANT

• Check that the front lever is locked securely with the L pin.

(1) Lpin

(2) Lever Fulcrum

(3) Front Link Bracket

(4) Front Lever

(5) Lever Fulcrum Groove

(6) Front Link

W1018394

7-510

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

[7] MOWER ADJUSTMENT

A

CAUTION

• Park the tractor on a firm, flat and level surface and set the parking brake.

• Stoop the engine, remove the key, and allow the blades to stop before making adjustments.

• Wear heavy gloves or wrap end of blade with a rag when you handle blades.

• Before starting the engine, set the PTO clutch lever to off position and range gear shift lever to the neutral position.

Adjusting Mower Link

1. Tire pressure must be correct.

2. Move the hydraulic control lever rearward to raise the mower to the highest position.

3. Stop the engine and remove the key.

4. Adjust the left side links with bolt so that the clearance L is as follows.

Clearance (L) between stopper and rear link

Factory spec.

Oto 0.5 mm o to 0.02 in.

L: 0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.02 in.) (1) Bolt

(2) Lock Nut

(3) Stopper

(4) Rear Link

W10425879

3TAMAFMP042A

(B)

(3)

.

'\

3TAAAAFMP043A

7-S11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3)

ROTARY MOWER

Adjusting Front and Rear Cutting Height

1. Tire pressure must be correct.

2. Make sure the level of the mower blades is adjusted as shown below. Then tighten the lock nuts securely.

3. Turn the cutting height control dial to "2.0" and the anti-scalp roller's height to keep clearance between rollers and ground from

6 to 13 mm (0.25 to 0.5 in.).

4. Turn right blade by hand parallel to direction of travel.

5. Adjust (L) of front links with lock nuts so that A is 0 to 5 mm (0 to

0.2 in.) A = (R)-(F).

6. If the difference between front tip and rear tip of blade is not within the factory speCification, adjust the length L of front link with lock nut (3). The height of rear blade tip R should be bigger than the front.

Difference (R-F) (R <: F) between front tip and rear tip of blade

Factory spec.

0.0105.0 mm

0.0 to 0.20 in.

(1) Cutting Height Control Dial

(2) Hydraulic Control Lever

(3) Lock Nut

L: Length of Front Link

F: Height of Blade Tip (Front)

R : Height of Blade Tip (Rear)

W1018083

3TAAAAFMP033B

3TAAAAFMP037A

F R

7-512

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601! WSM

3GMAAACMP026A

ROTARY MOWER

Adjusting Left and Right Cutting Height

1. Tire pressure must be correct.

2. Operate the hydraulic control lever (2) rearward to raise the mower deck to the highest position.

3. Stop the engine and remove the key.

4. Turn the cutting height control dial to the desired height.

5. Set the anti-scalp roller's height to keep clearance between rollers and ground from 6 to 13 mm (0.2 to 0.5 in.).

6. Lower the mower deck by moving the hydraulic control lever forward.

7. Turn left blade by hand parallel to tractor axle and turn right blade parallel to axle to measure from the outside blade tip at Land R to the level surface.

8. The difference between measurement should be less than 3 mm

(0.12in.).

9. If the difference between measurement is more than 3 mm (0.12 in.), loosen the lock nut of the left side.

10.Adjust the cutting height fine turning bolts so that the difference between measurement Land R is less than 3 mm (0.12 in.).

Then lock the nut.

Difference (L-R) between left tip and right Factory spec. tip of blade

Less than 3 mm

0.12 in.

(1) Cutting Height Control Dial

(2) Hydraulic Control Lever

(3) Cutting Height Fine Tuming Bolt

(4) Lock Nut

L: Left Blade Measurement Position

R: Right Blade Measurement

Position

A : Blade Height

W1018567

3TAAAAFMP013A

(3)--grr

H

(4)r-w-l

7-S13

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3)

-r-'~-(4)

L (2)

~~-(4)

3TAAAAFMP015A

ROTARY MOWER

Adjusting Self-Balance Suspended Linkage

(RCK60B-23BX Only)

1. Check the length (L) of balancer spring (2).

2. If the length (L) is not within the factory specification, adjust the length of balancer spring (2) with lock nut (3) .

• NOTE

• Check the left and right cutting height difference after adjusting the self-balancer linkage.

Balancer spring length

(L) (Right and left)

Factory spec.

55.0mm

2.17 in.

(1) Self-Balancer

(2) Balancer Spring

(3) Lock Nut

(4) Plain Washer

(5) Mower Deck

L: Balancer Spring Length

W1018990

7-814

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3TAAAAFMP016A n

(3)

A

B

C-----J.;:;

D - - - ; - O

E

F

G

ROTARY MOWER

Cutting Height

A

DANGER

• Never operate the mower in transport position .

• IMPORTANT

• (for self-balance suspended linkage)

To reduce the stepped difference in cutting height when mowing rolling terrain, follow the procedure below.

1. To set the cutting height, move the hydraulic control lever rearward to raise the mower to the highest position. Turn the cutting height control dial (1) to adjust height.

2. Set the anti-scalp roller's (3) height as shown to keep clearance between rollers and ground from 6 to 13 mm (0.2 to 0.5 in.).

3. Lower the mower deck by moving the hydraulic control lever (2) forward.

4. Use the higher settings for mowing in a rough area or when mowing tall grass. Lower settings should be used only for smooth lawns where short grass is desired.

5. To set the cutting height, move the hydraulic control lever (2) rearward to raise the mower to the highest position. Turn the cutting height control dial to adjust height.

6. Set the anti-scalp roller's (3) position as shown to have the same cutting height.

Dial (Cutting Height)

25 mm (1.0 in.), 32 mm (1.25 in.)

38 mm (1.5 in.), 45 mm (1.75 in.)

51 mm (2.0 in.), 57 mm (2.25 in.)

64 mm (2.5 in.), 70 mm (2.75 in.)

76 mm (3.0 in.), 83 mm (3.25 in.)

89 mm (3.5 in.), 95 mm (3.75 in.)

102 mm (4.0 in.)

Anti-scalp Roller

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

(1) Cutting Height Control Dial

(2) Hydraulic Control Lever

(3) Anti-scalp Roller

W1019383

3TAAAAFMP017 A

7-515

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Probable Cause

Blade Does Not Turn Mid-PTO system malfunctioning

Broken mower belt

Blade Speed Is Slow Loosen mower belt

Clogged grass

Flattened out or worn cup washer

Engine rpm too low

Cutting Is Poor Worn or broken mower blade

Loosen mower blade screw

Cutting height improper

Ground speed too fast

Low tire inflation

Anti-scalp rollers not adjusted correctly

Mower Is Not Lifted Broken linkage system

Trouble of hydraulic system

ROTARY MOWER

Solution

Check transmission

Replace mower belt 7-S19

Replace mower belt • 7-S19 or tension spring

Remove grass

Replace cup washer

-

7-S20

Mowat full throttle, check and reset engine rpm

Sharpen or replace mower blade

7-S19, S20

7-S20 Retighten mower

I

blade screw

I

Adjust cutting height 7-S13

Slow-down

Add air to correct

Adjust anti-scalp rollers

Replace linkage system

Check hydraulic system

Reference

Page

7-S15

-

W1014322

7-S16

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Input Shaft (without Mower Belt) Turning Force

Turning Torque

Factory Specification

Less than 117.7 N

12.0 kgf

26.51bs

Less than 1.47 N'm

0.15 kgf·m

1.08 ft-Ibs

Bevel Gears in Gear Box Backlash

(RCK54-23BX,

RCK60B-23BX)

0.1 to 0.2 mm

0.0039 to 0.0078 in.

(RCK54P-23BX) 0.13 to 0.25 mm

0.0051 to 0.0098 in.

ROTARY MOWER

Allowable Limit

-

0.4 mm

0.0157 in.

0.4 mm

0.0157 in.

W1013874

7-S17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, 8T601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

4. TIGHTENING TORQUES

Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.

(For general use screws, bolts and nuts: See page 7-S3.)

[RCK54-23BX, RCK60B-23BX]

Item

Gear box mounting screw and nut

Mower blade screw

Center pulley holder bolt and nut

Outer pulley mounting nut

Gear box bracket (RH) mounting bolt and nut

Pulley boss mounting nut

Pulley holder mounting bolt and nut

N'm

77.4 to 90.2 .

102.9 to 117.7

77.4 to 90.2

196.17 to 225.6

77.4 to 90.2

23.5 to 27.4

77.4 to 80.2 kgf·m

7.9 to 9.2

10.5 to 12.0

7.9 to 9.2

20.0 to 23.0

7.9 to 9.2

2.4 to 2.8

7.9 to 9.2 ft-Ibs

57.1 to 66.5

75.9 to 86.8

57.1 to 66.5

144.7 to 166.4

57.1 to 66.5

17.4 to 20.3

57.1 to 66.

W10127

[RCK54P-23BX]

Item

Mower blade screw

Gear box screw

Gear box mounting screw (for aluminum gear case)

Gear box mounting screw and nut

Center pulley holder bolt and nut

Outer pulley mounting nut

Pulley holder mounting bolt and nut

Gear box bracket (RH) mounting screw (for aluminum gear case)

I

N'm

103 to 118

23.5 to 27.4

39.2 to 44.1

77.4 to 90.2

77.4 to 90.2

166.7 to 186.3

77.4 to 90.2

39.2 to 44.1

I i kgf'm

10.5 to 12.0

2.4 to 2.8

4.0 to 4.5

7.9 to 9.2

7.9 to 9.2

17.0to 19.0

7.9 to 9.2

4.0 to 4.5 i

I

ft-Ibs

76 to 87

17.4 to 20.2

28.9 to 32.5

57.1 to 66.5

57.1 to 66.5

123.0 to 137.0

57.1 to 66.5

28.9 to 32.5

W1013579

7-S18

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

5. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

3GFABABMP023A

3GFABABMP024A

Checking Mower Blade

1. Check the cutting edge of mower blade.

2. Sharpen the cutting edges, if the mower blades are as shown in figure (2).

3. Replace the mower blades, ifthey are as shown in figure (3) .

• IMPORTANT

• Never forget to set the dust cover, cup washer(s) and lock washer (RCK54-23BX, RCK60B-23BX), when reassembling the mower blades. (See page 7-520.)

• NOTE

• To sharpen the mower blades by yourself, clamp the mower blade securely in a vise and use a large mill file along the original bevel.

• To balance the mower blade, place a small rod through the center hole and check to see if the blade balance evenly.

File heavy side of the blade until it balance out even.

(1) New Blade

(2) Worn Blade

(3) Cracked Blade

W1011041

Checking Mower Belt

1. Check to see the mower belt.

2. Replace the mower belt with a new one, if there is found surface split at more than 3 positions.

(When replacing mower belt)

1. Dismount the mower from the tractor.

2. Remove the left and right hand belt cover from the mower deck.

3. Clean around the gear box.

4. Remove the right hand bracket (3) which mounts the gear box to the mower deck.

5. Remove the mower belt (2) from the tension pulley (1). Slip the mower belt over the top of the gear box.

6. To install a new belt, reverse the above procedure.

TIghtening torque

Gear box bracket RH mounting bolt and nut

Gear box bracket RH mounting screw

(for aluminum gear case)

77.4 to 90.2 N'm

7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m

57.1 to 66.5 ft-Ibs

39.2 to 44.1 N'm

4.0 to 4.5 kgf-m

28.9 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

• IMPORTANT

• After setting the gear box bracket mounting screws on the deck without tightening. then mount the other screws on the gear box. And finally tighten them.

(1) Tension Pulley

(2) Mower Belt

(3) Gear Box Bracket (Right)

W1011180

7-S19

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM ROTARY MOWER

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

Universal Joint and Belt Cover

1. Unscrew the universal joint screw.

2. Remove the universal joint (1).

3. Remove the left and right belt covers (2), (3).

(1) Universal Joint

(2) Belt Cover (Left)

(3) Belt Cover (Right)

W1012580

(2) (3)

(A)

3GZAAADMP010C

(B)

Mower Blades (Center Blade and Outer Blades)

1. Turn over the mower.

2. Unscrew the mower blade screw (5), and remove the lock washer

(4), cup washer(s) (3), mower blade (2) and dust cover (1) .

• NOTE

• To remove the blade securely, wedge a block of wood between one blade and the mower deck in such position that it will hold the blade safely while loosing or tightening the blade screw.

(When reassembling)

[RCK54-23BX, RCK54P-23BXl

• Install the blade in position together with the dust cover and the cup washer. Tighten them up with the screw.

[RCK60B-23BX]

• Install the blade in position together with the dust cover, the lock washer and the 2 cup washers. Tighten them up with the screw .

• IMPORTANT

• Make sure the cup washer is not flattened out or worn, causing blade to slip easily.

Replace cup washer{s) if either is damaged.

Tightening torque Mower blade screw

102.9 to 117.7 N'm

10.5 to 12.0 kgf·m

75.9 to 86.8 ft-Ibs

(1) Dust Cover

(2) Mower Blade

(3) Cup Washer

(4) Lock Washer

(5) Mower Blade Screw

(A) RCK54-23BX, RCK54P-23BX

(B) RCK60B-23BX a: Loosen

W1012667

7-S20

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(A)

ROTARY MOWER

Blade Boss

1. Remove the external snap ring (2).

2. Remove the blade boss (1).

(1) Blade Boss

(2) External Snap Ring

(A) RCK54P-23BX

(B) RCK54-23BX, RCK60B-23BX

W1012871

(1k....

~

(2)~

3GZAAADMP011A

(8)

(1 )

(2)

3GMAAABMP044B

Gear Box and Mower Belt

1. Turn over the mower.

2. Remove the mower belt (3) from the tension pulley (5).

3. Unscrew the left and right gear box mounting screws (2), (4) and remove the gear box (1) from the mower deck.

(When reassembling)

• Install the reamer screws (2) at their original positions as shown in the figure. lightening torque

Gear box mounting screw and nut

Gear box mounting screw

(for aluminum gear case)

77.4 to 90.2 N·m

7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m

57.1 to 66.5 ft-Ibs

39.2 to 44.1 N·m

4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m

28.9 to 32.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Gear Box

(2) Gear Box Mounting Screw

(Reamer Screw)

(3) Mower Belt

(4) Gear Box Mounting Screw

(5) Tension Pulley

(6) Tension Spring

W1012961

7-S21

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

3GMAAACMP013B

3GZAAADMP013A

ROTARY MOWER

Disassembling Gear Box (RCK54-23BX, RCK60B-23BX)

1. Unscrew the drain plug (19). and drain the gear box oil.

2. Remove the center pulley (23) with a puller, and remove the feather key (22) on the bevel gear shaft.

3. Remove the gear box caps (7), (8).

4. Remove the oil seal (13). internal snap ring (14) and shim (15).

5. Tap out the pinion shaft (17) with the ball bearing (16), and remove the bevel gear (1).

6. Remove the internal snap ring (6), shims (5) and ball bearing (4).

7. Remove the external snap ring (9), and draw out the bevel gear shaft (21).

8. Remove the bevel gear (10), ball bearing (11). shim (12) and oil seal (20).

(When reassembling)

• Replace the oil seals (13), (20) and gear box caps (7), (8) with new ones.

• Check the backlash and turning torque.

If not proper, adjust with the shims (5), (12). (15).

(See page S-11, 12)

(1) 19T Bevel Gear (RCK54-23BX) (11) Ball Bearing

1ST Bevel Gear (RCK60B-23BX) (12) Shim

(2) Breather (13) Oil Seal

(3) Gear Box

(4) Ball Bearing

(14) Intemal Snap Ring

(15) Shim

(5) Shim (16) Ball Bearing

(6) Internal Snap Ring (17) Pinion Shaft

(7) Gear Box Cap (is) Oil Filler Plug

(S) Gear Box Cap (19) Drain Plug

(9) External Snap Ring (20) Oil Seal

(10) 16T Bevel Gear (RCK54-23BX) (21) Bevel Gear Shaft

17T Bevel Gear (RCK60B-23BX) (22) Feather Key

(23) Center Pulley

W101S143

Disassembling Gear Box (RCK54P-23BX)

1. Unscrew the drain plug (6), and drain the gear box oil.

2. Remove the center pulley (20) with a puller.

3. Remove the gear box.

4. Open the gear box.

5. Remove the input shaft (3) and the blade shaft (18).

6. Disassembling the input shaft (3) and the blade shaft (18).

(When reassembling)

• Replace the oil seals (1). (10), (16) and gear box caps with new ones.

• Check the backlash and turning torque.

If not proper, adjust with the shims.

• After cleaning dirty and gear box oil and the gear box surface, apply the liquid gasket.

Tightening torque Gear box screw

23.5 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.S kgf-m

17.4 to 20.2 ft-Ibs

(1) Oil Seal

(2) Ball Bearing

(3) Input Shaft

(4) External Cir Clip

(5) Shim

(6) Drain Plug

(7) Bevel Gear

(S) Shim

(9) Ball Bearing

(10) Oil Seal

(11) External Cir Clip

(12) Bevel Gear Case

(13) Bevel Gear

(14) Ball Bearing

(15) Shim

(16) Oil Seal

(17) External Cir Clip

(is) Blade Shaft

(19) Feather Key

(20) Center Pulley

W1015954

7-S22

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(A)

(1)".......

(2)

(3)

(8)

( 5 ) - - t

'1-_::...--(9) e

.....:0

(4)---@;l

3GMAAACMP038B

ROTARY MOWER

Center Pulley Holder

1. Unscrew the center pulley holder screws (1). (15) I center pulley nut (5). (11).

2. Remove the upper oil seal (6) and lower oil seal (4).

3. Remove the internal snap ring (3) and ball bearing (2).

(When reassembling)

• Replace the oil seals (4). (6) with new ones .

• Install the reamer screws (12) I reamer bolt (15) at their original positions as shown in the figure.

• Be sure to fix the O-rings (7). (13) to the original position .

• NOTE

• When reassembling the center pulley holder (i4), gear box and gear box stays (9), (i0), tighten the bolts and nuts in the order as below, to prevent the incline the gear box.

• Tighten the reamer bolts (i2) to the gear box first, then tighten the reamer bolts (i5) and nut (ii) to the center pulley holder (14) with specified torque.

• Tighten the gear box screws (8) to the gear box, then tighten the center pulley holder bolts (i) and nut (5) with specified torque.

• See page S-6 for tightening torque of gear box screw.

Tightening torque

Center pulley holder bolt and nut

77.4 to 90.2 N·m

7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m

57.1 to 66.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Center Pulley Holder bolt

(2) Ball Bearing

(3) Snap Ring

(4) Oil Seal

(5) Nut

(6) Oil Seal

(7) a-ring

(8) a-ring

(9) Gear Box Stay RH

(10) Gear Box Stay LH

(11) Nut

(12) Gear Box Reamer Bolt

(13) a-ring

(14) Center Pulley Holder

(15) Center Pulley Holder Reamer Bolt

(16) Collar

(A) RCK54-23BX. RCK60B-23BX

(B) RCK54P-23BX

W1013720

7-823

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

(A) (1)

(2)

- _ _ . . o .

(3)--~

1

(4)---®1Yi

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(20)

(17)

(18)

(19)

3GMAAACMP040C

(37)

(38)

(33)

(34)

(35)

(36)

ROTARY MOWER

Outer Pulley and Blade Shaft (To be continued)

1. Unscrew the outer pulley mounting nut (21). and remove the outer pulley (27).

2. Unscrew the pulley holder mounting nut (29), and remove the left pulley holder (34).

3. Remove the oil seal (37) and tap out the left blade shaft (38) with the ball bearings (36). (32). taking care not to damage the grease nipple (20).

4. Remove the oil seal (31).

5. Remove the ball bearings (36). (32) and collar (33) from the blade shaft (38).

6. Remove the right pulley holder (15) and blade shaft (19) as above.

(When reassembling)

• Replace the oil seals (31). (37), (12) and (18) with new ones.

Tightening torque

Outer pulley mounting nut

Pulley boss mounting nut

Pulley holder mounting bolt and nut

196.1 to 225.6 N'm

20.0 to 23.0 kgf·m

144.7 to 166.4 ft-Ibs

23.5 to 27.4 N'm

2.4 to 2.8 kgf'm

17.4 to 20.3 ft-Ibs

77.4 to 90.2 N'm

7.9 to 9.2 kgfm

57.1 to 66.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Grease Nipple

(2) Outer Pulley Mounting Nut

(3) Spring Washer

(4) Plain Washer

(5) Outer Pulley Boss (Right)

(6) Outer Pulley (Right)

(7) Pulley Holder Mounting Nut

(8) Spring Washer

(9) Pulley Boss Mounting Bolt

(10) Pulley Holder Mounting Nut

(11) Spring Washer

(12) Oil Seal

(13) Ball Bearing

(14) Collar

(15) Pulley Holder (Right)

(16) Pulley Holder Mounting Bolt

(17) Ball Bearing

(18) Oil Seal

(19) Blade Shaft (Right)

(20) Grease Nipple

(21) Outer Pulley Mounting Nut

(22) Spring Washer

(23) Plain Washer

(24) Pulley Boss Mounting Nut

(25) Spring Washer

(26) Outer Pulley Boss (Left)

(27) Outer Pulley (Left)

(28) Pulley Boss Mounting Bolt

(29) Pulley Holder Mounting Nut

(30) Spring Washer

(31) Oil Seal

(32) Ball Bearing

(33) Collar

(34) Pulley Holder (Left)

(35) Pulley Holder Mounting Bolt

(36) Ball Bearing

(37) Oil Seal

(38) Blade Shaft (Left)

(Al RCKS4-23BX. RCK60B-23BX

W1018943

7-S24

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(8)

(1 )

(2)

(3) ____-

(4)

3TAAAAFMP010B

ROTARY MOWER

Outer Pulley and Blade Shaft (Continued)

1. Unscrew the blade side pulley mounting nut (11). and remove the blade side pulley (12).

2. Unscrew the pulley holder mounting bolts (18). and separate the right pulley side holder (5) from the mower deck.

3. Remove the oil seal (8) and tap out the right blade shaft (9) with the ball bearings (4), (7), taking care not to damage the grease nipple (10).

4. Remove the oil seal (4).

5. Remove the ball bearings (4). (7) and collar (6) from the right blade shaft (9).

6. Remove the left pulley holder and blade shaft as above.

(When reassembling)

• Replace the oil seals (3), (8), (16) and (31) with new ones.

Tightening torque

Outer pulley mounting nut

Pulley holder mounting bolt and nut

166.7 to 186.3 N'm

17.0 to 19.0 kgf-m

123.0 to 137.4 ft-Ibs

77.4 to 90.2 N'm

7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m

57.1 to 66.5 ft-Ibs

(1) Outer Pulley Mounting Nut

(2) Plain Washer

(3) Upper Oil Seal

(4) Ball Bearing

(5) Pulley Side Holder (Right)

(6) Collar

(7) Ball Bearing

(8) Lower Oil Seal

(9) Blade Shaft (Right)

(10) Grease Nipple

(11) Spring Washer

(12) Blade Side Pulley (Right)

(13) Nut

(14) Spring Washer

(15) Plain Washer

(16) Upper Oil Seal

(17) Ball Bearing

(18) Pulley Holder Mounting Bolt

(19) Grease Nipple

(20) Outer Pulley Mounting Nut

(21) Spring Washer

(22) Plain Washer

(23) Blade Side Pulley (Left)

(24) Nut

(25) Spring Washer

(26) Plain Washer

(27) Pulley Side Holder (Left)

(28) Pulley Holder Mounting Bolt

(29) Coliar

(30) Bali Bearing

(31) Lower Oil Seal

(32) Blade Shaft (Left)

(B) RCK54P-23BX

W1017587

Balancer (RCK60B·23BX)

1. Unscrew the lock nut (1) both side.

2. Remove the plain washer (2) and balancer spring (3).

3. Unscrew the center pin bolt (6).

4. Remove the center pin (5) and balancer plate (4).

(When reassembling)

• Apply grease to the center pin (5).

• Adjust the balancer spring (3) length to the factory speCification, with lock nut (1).

Balancer spring length

(l) (Right and left)

Factory spec.

55.0mm

2.1653 in.

(1) Lock Nut

(2) Plain Washer

(3) Balancer Spring

(4) Balancer Plate

(5) Center Pin

(6) Center Pin Bolt

W1017924

3GMAAACMP028A

7-S25

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

[3] SERVICING

ROTARY MOWER

Turning Torgue of Pinion Shaft

1. Remove the mower belt, and reassemble the gear box to the mower deck.

2. Wind a string around the pinion shaft and set a spring balance (or push-pull gauge) to the tip of the string, and then slowly pull the spring balance horizontally to measure the turning force.

3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, check the bearing and gears and adjust the adjusting shims (1), (2), (3).

[RCK54~23BXJ RCK60B-23BX]

Turning force Factory spec.

Less than 117.7 N

12.0 kgf

26.51bs

Turning torque Factory spec.

Less than 1.47 N'm

0.15 kgf·m

1.08 ft-Ibs

(Reference)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (1), (2): 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (3) : 0.1 mm (0.0039 in.)

0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

[RCK54P~23BX]

Turning force Factory spec.

Less than 0.7 N'm

0.07 kgf·m

0.52 ft-Ibs

(Reference)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (1), (2): 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (3) : 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)

(1) Adjusting Shim

(2) Adjusting Shim

(3) Adjusting Shim

(A) RCK54-23BX, RCK60B·23BX

(B) RCK54P-23BX

W1019836

3GZAAADMP016C

7-826

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ROTARY MOWER

Backlash between Bevel Gears

1. Remove the gear box cap (3).

2. Place fuses the bevel gear (2) on the input shaft (5).

3. Turn the input shaft (5).

4. Take out the fuses. and measure the thickness of fuses with an outside micrometer. (Backlash equal thickness of fuse)

5. If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, adjust with shims (1),

(4), (6).

[RCK54-23BX, RCK60B-23BX]

Backlash between bevel gears

Factory spec.

0.10 to 0.20 mm

0.0039 to 0.0079 in.

Allowable limit

0.4mm

0.0157 in.

(Reference)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (1), (4): 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (6) : 0.1 mm (0.0039 in.)

0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

[RCK54P-23BX]

Factory spec.

0.13 to 0.25 mm

0.0051 to 0.0098 in.

Backlash between bevel gears

Allowable limit

0.40mm

0.0157 in.

(Reference)

Thickness of adjusting shims (1), (4): 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)

• Thickness of adjusting shims (6) : 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)

0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)

(1) Shim

(2) 19T Bevel Gear

(RCK54-23BX, RCK54P-23BX)

18T Bevel Gear

(RCK60B-23BX)

(3) Gear Box Cap

(4) Shim

(5) Input Shaft

(6) Shim

(7) External Cir Clip

(A) RCK54·23BX, RCK60B·23BX

(B) RCK54P·23BX

W1020126

3GZAAADMP016D

7-527

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. HYDRAULIC CiRCUiT .................................................................................. 8-M1

2. CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLy ..... .............................................................. 8-M2

[1] STRUCTURE ........................................................................................... 8-M2

[2] OPERATION ........ .................................................................................... 8-M3

3. BOOM CYLINDER AND BUCKET CYLINDER ........................................ 8-M1D

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

(1 )

r'-'-'-'- -----.-.----.-.-.-----......,

P.B.¢------\------.

1A

FRONT LOADER

(2)

(3)

(1) Bucket Control Valve

(2) Bucket Cylinder

(3) Boom Cylinder

(4) Boom Control Valve

(5) Control Valve Assembly

P: From Pump

P.B. :To 3-Point Hydraulic

System

T: ToTank

1A :1A Port

2A:2A Port

1B :1B Port

2B :2B Port

W1016476

3TAAAAGLP001 A

To operate the front loader, the hydraulic oil pressurized by the hydraulic pump flows from P port through the boom control valve (4) and the bucket control valve (1) to P.B. port or T port.

Since relief valve is not equipped in the front loader control valve, the main relief valve in the tractor operates.

8-M1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

2.

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY

[1] STRUCTU RE

(1 )

FRONT LOADER

(3)

(4) (2)

P.B.

I

I

I

I

!

B2

A2

B1

A1

(3)

3TAAAAGLP002A

(1) Inlet and Outlet Section

(2) Boom Control Valve

(3) Bucket Control Valve

(4) Power Beyond

P: P Port (From Pump)

T: T Port (To Tank)

A1 : A1 Port

A2:A2 Port

B1 : B1 Port

B2: B2 Port

P.B. :P.B. Port

The control valve assembly is composed of one casting block and four major section as shown above.

(1) Inlet and Outlet Section

This section has P and T ports.

The P port is connected to the OUTLET port of hydraulic block by the hydraulic hose.

The T port is connected to the TANK port of hydraulic block by the hydraulic hose.

(2) Boom Control Section

The boom control valve is of 4-position, 6-connection, detent, spring center type, consisting of a mono block valve housing, spool, load check valve, etc. This valve has A1 and B1 ports and controls oil flow to the boom cylinder.

(3) Bucket Control Section

The bucket control valve is of 4-position, 6-connection, no detent, spring center type, consisting of a mono block valve housing, spool, load check valve, etc. This valve has A2 and B2 ports and controls oil flow to the bucket cylinder.

(4) Power Beyond

This section has P.B. port which is connected to the INLET port of hydraulic block by the hydraulic hose, and feeds oil to the three point hydraulic control valve.

8-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

[2] OPERATION

• Neutral

FRONT LOADER

(2)

---~ r::======E:::-,

P T

B1

3TAAAAGLP017 A

(1) Boom Control Section

(2) Bucket Control Section

(3) Spool

(4) Spool

(5) P.B. Passage 1

(6) P.B. Passage 2

(7) Load Check Valve

~:a

T: T Port (To Tank)

P: P Port (From Pump)

Ai: Ai Port

A2: A2 Port

B1 : B1 Port

B2: B2 Port

P.B. :P.B. Port a : Low Pressure

8-M3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-238X, LA240, 8T601, WSM

• Up

FRONT LOADER

P.B.;..------""""ir---------~::....--___.

(2)

P T

81

(4) (5)

3TAAAAGLP018A

(1) Boom Control Section

(2) Bucket Control Section

(3) Spool

(4) P.B. Passage 1

(5) Neutral Passage 1

(6) Load Check Valve

(7) Passage 1

(8) Boom Cylinder

P : P Port (From Pump)

T : T Port (To Tank)

A1 : A1 Port

(From Boom Cylinder)

B1 : B1 Port (To Boom Cylinder)

P.B. :P.B. Port (To 3 Hitch) a : Low Pressure b : High Pressure

1. When the hydraulic control lever is set to the "UP" position, the spool (3) of the boom control section (1) moves to the left, which forms oil passages between passage 1 (7) and B1 port, and between A1 port and P.B. passage 1

(4 ).

2. As the oil passage from the neutral passage 1 (5) to the P.B. passage 1 (4) is closed by the spool (3), the pressure­ fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (6) and flows through the notched section of the spool (3) and

B1 port to extend the boom cylinder (8).

3. Return oil from the boom cylinder (8) flows from the A1 port through the passage in the spool (3) and P.B. passage

1 (4) to the bucket control section (3).

8-M4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Down

FRONT LOADER

P.B.......- - - -...... .., r--------~~-__,

B1

P T

_:b

:a

3TAAAAGLP019A

(1) Boom Control Section

(2) Bucket Control Section

(3) Spool

(4) P.B. Passage 1

(5) Neutral Passage 1

(6) Load Check Valve

(7) Passage 1

(8) Boom Cylinder

P : P Port (From Pump)

T : T Port (To Tank)

B1 : B1 Port

(From Boom Cylinder)

A1 : A1 Port (To Boom Cylinder) P.B. :P.B. Port (To 3 Hitch) a : Low Pressure b : High Pressure

1. When the hydraulic control lever is set to the "DOWN" position, the spool (3) moves to the right, which forms oil passages between passage 1 (7) and A1 port, and between B1 port and P.B. passage 1 (4).

2. As the oil passage from the neutral passage 1 (5) to the P.B. passage 1 (4) is closed by the spool (3), the pressure­ fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (6) and flows through the notched section of the spool (3) and

A1 port to retract the boom cylinder (8).

3. Return oil from the boom cylinder (8) flows from the B1 port through the passage in the spool (3) and P.B. passage

1 (4) to the bucket control section (2).

8-M5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Floating

FRONT LOADER

3TAAAAGLP020A

(1) Boom Control Section

(2) Bucket Control Section

(3) Spool

(4) P.B. Passage 1

(5) Detent Mechanism

(6) Neutral Passage 1

(7) Boom Cylinder

P : P Port (From Pump)

T: T Port (To tank)

A1 : A1 Port

B1 : B1 Port

P.B. :P.B. Port (To 3 Hitch) a : Low Pressure

1. When the hydraulic control lever is set to the "FLOAT" position, the spool (3) moves further to the right from the

"DOWN" position and is retained by the detent mechanism (5).

2. This forms oil passages among the A1 port, B1 port and T port. As a result, oil in the boom cylinder (7) flows freely from the A1 port and B1 port through the T port to the transmission case.

3. Oil entering the P port flows to the bucket control section (2) through the neutral passage 1 (6) and P.B. passage

1 (4).

8-M6

FRONT LOADER BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Roll-back

P.t:S.;--------, r;::========-,

(4) (5) _:b

:a

3TAAAAGLP021A

(1) Boom Control Section

(2) Bucket Control Section

(3) P.B. Passage 1

(4) Spool

(5) Neutral Passage 2

(6) P.B. Passage 2

(7) Load Check Valve

(8) Passage 2

(9) Bucket Cylinder

P : P Port (From Pump)

T : T Port (To Tank)

P.B. :P.B. Port (To 3 Hitch)

A2: A2 Port

(From Bucket Cylinder)

B2: B2 Port

(To Bucket Cylinder) a : Low Pressure b : High Pressure

1. When the hydraulic control lever is set to the "ROLL-BACK" position, the spool (4) of the bucket control section

(2) moves to the left, which forms oil passages between passage 2 (8) and B2 port, and between A2 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port flows to the neutral passage 2 (5) through the boom control section (1) and

P.B. passage 1 (3). As the oil passage from the neutral passage 2 (5) to the P.B. passage 2 (6) is closed by the spool (4), this oil opens the load check valve (7), and flows through the notched section of the spool (4) and B2 port to retract the bucket cylinder (9).

3. Return oil from the bucket cylinder (9) flows to the transmission case through the A2 port and T port.

8-M7

B><25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Dump 1

( 1

P T

T

FRONT LOADER

(4) _:b

3TAAAAGLP022A

(1) Boom Control Section

(2) Bucket Control Section

(3) P.B. Passage 1

(4) Spool

(5) Neutral Passage 2

(6) P.B. Passage 2

(7) Load Check Valve

(8) Passage 2

(9) Bucket Cylinder

P : P Port (From Pump)

T: T Port (To Tank)

P.B. :P.B. Port (To 3 Hitch)

A2 :A2 Port

(To Bucket Cylinder)

B2: B2 Port

(From Bucket Cylinder) b : High Pressure

1. When the hydraulic control lever is set to the "DUMP 1" position, the spool (4), which forms oil passages among passage 2 (8), A2 port and B2 port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port flows through the boom control valve, opens the load check valve, and flows to the bucket cylinder to extend the cylinder through the notched section of the spool and A2 port.

3. Return oil from the bucket cylinder (9) flows from the B2 port to the passage 2 (8), and flows to the A2 port together with the pressure-fed oil from the P port.

As a result, the dump speed is increased.

(Reference)

• The oil pressure of the A2 port and B2 port is identical, but the bucket cylinder extends by the difference of received pressure area (cylinder rod part).

8-M8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Dump 2

(1 )

P T

FRONT LOADER

3TAAAAGLP023A

(1) Boom Control Section

(2) Bucket Control Section

(3) P.B. Passage 1

(4) Spool

(5) Neutral Passage 2

(6) P.B. Passage 2

(7) Load Check Valve

(8) Passage 2

(9) Bucket Cylinder

P: P Port (From Pump)

T: T Port (To Tank)

P.B. :P.B. Port (To 3 Hitch)

A2 :A2 Port

(To Bucket Cylinder)

B2: B2 Port

(From Bucket Cylinder) a : Low Pressure b : High Pressure

1. When the hydraulic control lever is set to the "DUMP 2" position, the spool (4) of the bucket control section (2) moves to the right of the bucket control section (2) moves further to the right from the "DUMP 1" position, which forms oil passages between passage 2 (8) and A2 port, and between B2 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port flows to the neutral passage 2 (5) through the boom control section (1) and

P.B. passage 1 (3). As the oil passage from the neutral passage 2 (5) to the P.B. passage 2 (6) is closed by the spool (4), this oil opens the load check valve (7) and flows through the notched section of the spool (4) and 62 port to extend the bucket cylinder (9).

3. Return oil from the bucket cylinder (9) flows to the transmission case through the B2 port and T port.

8-M9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

3. BOOM CYLINDER AND BUCKET CYLINDER

FRONT LOADER o

(1 ) (2) (3) (4) (5)

3UFAAACLP017 A

(1) Nut

(2) Piston

(3) Cylinder Tube (4) Head (5) Piston Rod

Both boom cylinder and bucket cylinder consists of a head (4), cylinder tube (3), piston rod (5), piston (2), and other parts as shown in the figure above. They are single-rod double acting cylinder in which the reciprocating motion of the piston is controlled by hydraulic force applied to both of its ends.

Cylinder Specifications

Boom Cylinder Cylinder I.D.

Rod 0.0.

Stroke

Bucket Cylinder Cylinder I.D.

Rod O.D.

Stroke

LA240

40 mm (1.57 in.)

25 mm (0.98 in.)

326 mm (12.8 in.)

65 mm (2.56 in.)

30 mm (1.18 in.)

204 mm (8.03 in.)

W1025274

8-M10

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 8-S1

[1] IDENTIFiCATION ...................................................................................... 8-S1

[2] GENERAL PRECAUTION ....................................................................... 8-S1

[3] LUBRICANTS ........................................................................................... 8-S2

[4] MAINTENANCE CHECK LlST ................................................................ 8-S2

[5] CHECK AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 8-S2

(1) Check Points of Each Use or Daily ..................................................... 8-S2

(2) Check Points of Every 10 Hours ......................................................... 8-S3

2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................... 8-84

3. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 8-S5

4. TIGHTENING TORQUES .............................................................................. 8-S6

[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS (FOR FRONT

LOADER AND BACKHOE) ..................................................................... 8-S6

[2] STUD BOLTS ........................................................................................... 8-S6

[3] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC

OR UNF THREADS ................................................................................ 8-S7

[4] PLUGS ...................................................................................................... 8-S7

[5] HYDRAULIC FITTINGS ........................................................................... 8-S8

5. DISMOUNTING AND MOUNTING FRONT LOADER FROM TRACTOR .8-S9

['I] DISMOUNTING FRONT LOADER FROM TRACTOR ......................... 8-S9

[2] MOUNTING FRONT LOADER TO TRACTOR ................................... 8-S10

6. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING .................................... 8-S11

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ............................................................... 8-S1

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ................................................ 8-S11

(1) Control Valve .................................................................................... 8-S 11

(2) Bucket, Boom and Hydraulic Cylinders ............................................. 8-S14

(3) Side Frames, Front Guard and Main Frames ................................... 8-S16

[3] SERVICING ............................................................................................ 8-S17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. GENERAL

[1] IDENTIFICATION

FRONT LOADER

When contacting your local KUBOTA distributor, always specify front loader model and serial number.

(1) Modell Serial Number

W1010468

3TMAAGLP024A

[2] GENERAL PRECAUTION

3UFAAABLP008A

• During disassembly, carefully arrange removed parts in a clean area to prevent later confusion. Screws, bolts and nuts should be replaced in their original positions to prevent reassembly errors.

• When special tools are required, use genuine KUBOTA tools.

Special tools which are not used frequently should be made according to the drawings provided.

• Clean parts before measuring them.

• Use only genuine KUBOTA parts for parts replacement to maintain loader performance and to assure safety.

• O-ring and oil seals must be replaced during reassembly. Apply grease to new O-rings or oil seals before reassembling.

A: Grease

W1010531

8-S1

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM FRONT LOADER

[3] LUBRICANTS

To prevent serious damage to hydraulic system. use only specified fluid or its equivalent.

Place Lubricants

Transmission Case

Grease fitting

Capacities

11.6 L

3.1 U.S.gals

2.6 Imp.gals

Until grease overflows

KUBOTA SUPER UDT Fluid"

Moly Ep Type grease

• NOTE

• * KUBOTA SUPER UOT Fluid .................. KUBOTA original transmission hydraulic fluid

W1010650

[4] MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST

To keep the machine working in good condition as well as to avoid any accident and trouble, carry out periodic inspection and maintenance. Check the following points before use.

Service Internal

Daily (Each use)

Every 10 hours

Check Points

Check the transmission fluid level

Check the hydraulic hoses

Grease all grease fitting

Lubricate joints of control lever linkage

Reference

Page

8-S2

8-S2

8-S3

8-S3

W1010764

[5] CHECK AND MAINTENANCE

A

CAUTION

• When checking and repairing, park the tractor on flat ground and apply the parking brake.

• When checking and repairing, lower the bucket and stop the engine.

(1) Check Points of Each Use or Daily

Checking Transmission Fluid Level

1. Check the oil level at the dipstick (1).

2. If the level is too low, add new oil to the prescribed level at the oil inlet.

• IMPORTANT

• If oil level is low, do not run engine.

(1) Dipstick A: Oil level is acceptable within this range.

W1010960

Checking Hydraulic Hoses

1. Checking all hydraulic hoses for cuts or wear.

2. If defects are found, replace them.

(1) Hydraulic Hose

(2) Cardboard

(3) Magnifying Glass

W1011064

3TVAAACLP003A (1)

8-S2

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT LOADER

(2) Check Points of Every 10 Hours

Greasing

1. Inject grease in all grease fitting with a hand grease gun.

W1011132

3TAAAAGLP025A

Lubricating

1. Lubricate joints of control lever linkage.

W1011274

8-83

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601. WSM

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Probable Cause

Boom Does Not Rise Control valve malfunctioning

Boom cylinder defective

Control lever linkage defective

Hydraulic pump malfunctioning

Oil filter clogged

Hydraulic hose damaged

Control valve malfunctioning Boom Does Not

Lower

Insufficient Boom

Speed

Bucket Does Not

Move

Insufficient Bucket

Speed

Front End Loader

Drops by its Weight

Boom cylinder tube worn or damaged

Boom cylinder piston ring (piston seal and 0­ ring) worn or damaged

Oil leaks from tube joints

Relief valve setting pressure too low

Insufficient transmission fluid

Dirty relief valve

Control valve malfunctioning

Bucket cylinder defective

Control lever linkage defective

Hydraulic pump malfunctioning

Oil filter clogged

Relief valve spring damaged

Hydraulic hose damaged

Dirty relief valve

Bucket cylinder tube worn or damaged

Bucket cylinder piston ring (piston seal and 0­ ring) wom or damaged

Oil leaks from tube joints

Insufficient transmission fluid

Boom cylinder tube worn or damaged

Boom cylinder piston ring (piston seal and 0­ ring) worn or damaged

Oil leaks from tube joints

Control valve malfunctioning

Solution

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Clean or replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Replace

Repair

Adjust

Refill

Clean

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Repair or replace

Clean or replace

Replace

Replace

Clean

Replace

Replace

Repair

Refill

Replace

Replace

Repair

Repair or replace

FRONT LOADER

8-S9

8-S2

-

8-S11

8-S12

8-SlO

5-S12

G-13

-

8-S12

Reference

Page

I

8-S11

8-S12

8-S10

5-S12

G-13

8-S12

8-S11 i

I i

8-S13

8-S14

8-S13

8-S14

-

8-S2

8-S13

8-S14

8-S13

8-S11

W1014322

8-S4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, 8T601, WSM FRONT LOADER

3. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Piston Rod

I

Bend

Factory Specification Allowable Limit

0.25 mm

0.0098 in.

W1013874

8-S5

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM FRONT LOADER

4. TIGHTENING TORQUES

[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS (FOR FRONT LOADER

AND BACKHOE)

Screws, bolts, and nuts whose tightening torques are not specified in this Workshop Manual should be tightened according to the table below.

Indication on top of bolt

0

@

No-grade or 4T ill

@

7T or Property class 8.8

® @

9Tor

Property class 10.9

Ordinariness

Material of opponent part

Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness Aluminum

M6

(6 mm. 0.24 in.)

M8

(8 mm. 0.31 in.)

M10

(10 mm. 0.39 in.)

M12

(12 mm. 0.47 in.)

M14

(14 mm. 0.55 in.)

M16

(16 mm. 0.63 in.)

M18

(18 mm. 0.71 in.)

M20

(20 mm. 0.79 in.)

N'm kgf·m IbNt N'm kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf·m IbHt

0.80 to

0.95

1.8 to

2.1

4.0 to

4.6

6.4 to

7.4

11.0 to

12.8

17.0 to

19.5

25.0 to

29.0

34.0 to

40.0

I

246 to

284

334 to

392

108 to

125

167 to

191

7.9 to

9.3

18 to

20

40 to

45

63 to

72

5.8 to

6.8

13 to

15

29 to

33

47 to

53

79.6 to

92.5

123 to

141

181 to

209

246 to

289

7.9 to

8.8

17 to

19

32 to

34

-

-

-

-

0.80 to

0.90

1.7 to

2.0

3.2 to

3.5

-

-

-

!

5.8 to

6.5

13 to

14

24 to

25

-

-

-

9.81 to

11.2

24 to

27

197 to

225

275 to

318

3 :8 t

431

1.00 to

1.15

2.4 to

2.8

48 to

55

78 to

90

124 to

147

4.9 to

I

5.7

7.9 to

9.2

12.6 to

15.0

20.0 to

23.0

28.0 to

32.5

37.5 to

44.0

7.24 to

8.31

18 to

20

36 to

41

58 to

66

91.2 to

108

145 to

166

203 to

235

272 to

318

I

40 to

44

63 to

72

7.9 to

8.8

18 to

20

-

-

0.80 to

0.90

1.8 to

2.1

4.0 to

4.5

6.4 to

7.4

-

-

5.8 to

6.5

13 to

15

32

47 to

53

-

-

-

12.3 to

14.2

30 to

34

70

103 to

117

167 to

196

260 to

304

344 to

402

491 to

568

254 to

296

362 to

419

123 to

144

192 to

224

9.05 to

10.4

22 to

25

45 to

52

76.0 to

86.7

W1034542

17.0 to

20.0

26.5 to

31.0

35.0 to

41.0

50.0 to

58.0

1.25 to

1.45

3.0 to

3.5

6.2 to

7.2

10.5 to

12.0

[2] STUD BOLTS

Material of opponent part

Ordinariness

M8

(8 mm, 0.31 in.)

M10

(10 mm, 0.39 in.)

M12

(12 mm, 0.47 in.)

M14

(14 mm. 0.55 in.)

M16

(16 mm. 0.63 in.)

M18

(18 mm. 0.71 in.)

Aluminum

N'm kgf·m IbHt

I

N'm

29.5 to

49.0

62 to

73

98.1 to

112

12 to

15

25 to

31

172 to

201

1.2 to

1.6

2.5 to

3.2

3.0 to

5.0

6.3 to

7.5

21.7 to

36.1

46 to

54

72.4 10.0 to

11.5 71 t

20.5

'27 to

83.1

148 to

8.7 to

11

18 to

23

8.9 to

11

20 to

25

31.4

-

-

kgf'm IbHt

0.9 to

1.2

2.0 to

2.6

3.2

-

-

6.5 to

8.6

15 to

18

23.1

-

-

W1048139

8-S6

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT LOADER

[3] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC OR

UNF THREADS

Grade

SAEGR.5

G

SAEGR.8

@

~

1/4

5/16

3/8

1/2

9/16

5/8

N'm

11.7t015.7

23.1 to 27.7

48 to 56

110 to 130

150 to 178

204 to 244 kgf·m

1.19 to 1.61

2.35 to 2.83

4.9 to 5.8

11 to 13

15.2 to 18.2

20.8 to 24.8

IbHt

8.61 to 11.6

17.0 to 20.5

35.0 to 42.0

80 to 96

110 to 132

150 to 180

N'm

16.3 to 19.7

33 to 39

61 to 73

150 to 178

217 to 260

299 to 357 kgf·m

1.66 to 2.01

3.4 to 4.0

6.3 to 7.4

15.2 to 18.2

22.2 to 26.5

30.5 to 36.4

IbHt

12.0 to 14.6

24 to 29

45 to 54

110 to 132

160 to 192

220 to 264

W1022485

[4] PLUGS

Material of opponent part

Shape Size

R1/8

Tapered screw R1/4

~

R1/2

Straight screw

L:]

G1/4

G3/8

G1/2

N'm

13 to 21

25 to 44

49 to 88

58.9 to 107

25 to 34

62 to 82

49 to 88

Ordinariness kgf·m

1.3 to 2.2

2.5 to 4.5

5.0 to 9.0

6.00 to 11.0

2.5 to 3.5

6.3 to 8.4

5.0 to 9.0

IbHt

9.4 to 15

18 to 32

37 to 65

43.4 to 79.5

18 to 25

46 to 60

37 to 65

N'm

13 to 21

25 to 34

49 to 58

59 to 78

-

-

Aluminum kgf'm

1.3t02.0

2.5 to 3.5

5.0 to 6.0

6.0 to 8.0

-

-

IbHt

9.4t015

18 to 25

37 to 43

44 to 57

-

0000001666E

8-S7

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT LOADER

[5] HYDRAULIC FITTINGS

• Adaptors, Elbows and Others

Item Shape Thread size

N'm

37 to 44

Tightening torque kgf'm

3.8 t04.5

IbHt

27 to 33

I

I

Adjustable elbow,

Adaptor (O-ring port) (UNF)

Hose fitting, Flare nut (UNF)

~~ a a

9/16

3/4

[A1 Nut Type

[B1 No Nut Type a: O-ring

7/8

9/16

~ alE

3/4

7/8

48 to 54

77 to 85

22 to 25

36 to 40

43 to 50

4.9 to 5.5

7.9 to 8.6

2.3 to 2.6

3.6 to 4.1

35to 40

57 to 62

I

16 to 19

26 to 30

4.4 to 5.0 32 to 36

Adaptor (NPT)

~ 1/4

3/8

30 to 50

39 to 60

3.1 to 5.0

4.0 to 6.1

23 to 36

29 to 44

1/2 49 to 58 5.0 to 5.9 36 to 43

• NOTE

• When connecting a hose with flare nut, after tightening the nut with specified torque, return it approximately 45 degrees (0.79 rad) and re-tighten it to specified torque.

W1015484

[6] TIGHTENING TORQUES OF SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS ON THE

TABLE BELOW ARE ESPECIALLY SPECIFIED

Item

Boom cylinder piston mounting nut

Bucket cylinder piston mounting nut

Main frame mounting bolt and nut (M14)

N'm

150 to 180

350 to 400

147 kgf·m

15.3 to 18.3

35.7 to 40.7 ft-Ibs =

111 to 132

259 to 295

108 15.0

W1012736

8-S8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B·23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT LOADER

5. DISMOUNTING AND MOUNTING FRONT LOADER

FROM TRACTOR

• IMPORTANT

• When dismounting the front loader, park the tractor on flat and hard ground, apply the parking brake.

• When starting the engine or using the hydraulic control valve, always sit on the operator's seat.

[1] DISMOUNTING FRONT LOADER FROM TRACTOR

(3)

Side Frame

1. Raise the boom until the stands (1) can be rotated.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Remove the spring pin (2) holding the stand (1) to the boom.

4. Slide the stands (1) leftward and rotate it until the hole in the stand and pin on the boom are aligned. Then slide the stand (1) rightward and insert the spring pin (2) as shown.

5. Start the engine and run at idle.

6. Dump the bucket approximately 20 degrees.

7. Lower the boom and raise the front wheels slightly .

• IMPORTANT

• Lift the front wheels with the bucket. Do not attempt to lift the with the stand.

8. Stop the engine.

9. Remove the mounting pins from the loader side frames and hold them in the plate of side frame.

10.Start the engine and run at idle. Slowly move the hydraulic control lever (3) to rollback position to raise the loader side frames up and out of the receives of the main frames as shown.

11.Stop the engine.

12.Slowly release all hydraulic pressure by moving the hydraulic control lever (3) in all directions.

13.Disconnect the four hoses with quick couplers at the control valve and place them on the right side of the boom.

14.Place the protective caps and plugs (4) on the quick coupler ends.

15.Start the engine and slowly back the tractor away from the loader.

(1) Stand

(2) Spring Pin

(3) Hydraulic Control Lever

(4) Protective Plug

W1012789

8-S9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT LOADER

[2] MOUNTING FRONT LOADER TO TRACTOR

Side Frame and Hoses

1. Slowly drive the tractor between the loader side frames until the rear portion of both side frames touches the main frames as shown.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Connect four hoses with couplers to the nipple on the control valve as indicated with color marks. Then connect the protective caps and plugs to each other.

4. Start the engine and run at idle.

5. Slowly move the loader control lever to dump position to lower the side frames into the main frames and engage the bosses of the main frames to the guide bosses of the side frames. Then lift the front wheels slightly with the loader .

• IMPORTANT

• Do not attempt to lift the front wheels with the stand.

6. Stop the engine. Reinstall the mounting pins and secure them with the locking rods.

7. Start the engine.

8. Raise the boom until the stand can be rotated.

9. Stop the engine.

10.Store the stand to their original positions and secure it with the spring pin as shown.

11.Start the engine.

12.Lower the boom and level the bucket.

(1) Side Frame

(2) Main Frame

(3) Hose

(4) Loader Control Lever

(5) Spring Pin

(6) Stand

W1020231

3TAAAAGLP030A

3TAAAAGLP031A

8-S10

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM FRONT LOADER

6. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

Relief Valve Setting Pressure

• NOTE

• The relief valve is not installed on this model. However the relief valve of the tractor hydraulic system is used as the relief valve of the front loader. Refer to hydraulic section.

(Reference)

Relief valve setting pressure

Factory spec.

12.3 to 12.7 MPa

125 to 130 kgf/cm

2

1778 to 1849 psi

Condition

• Engine speed ....... Maximum

• Oil temperature ..... 45 to 55°C

113t0131 of

W1014688

[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Control Valve

Step and Battery

A

CAUTION

• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. When connecting, connect the positive cable to the battery first.

1. Remove the under panel (1).

2. Disconnect the negative cable (3) from the battery (2).

3. Remove the valve covers (4).

4. Remove the HST pedal (5) and the step (6).

(1) Under Panel

(2) Battery

(3) Negative Cable

(4) Valve Cover

(5) HST Pedal

(6) Step

W1012394

8-S11

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

(11 )

(10)

FRONT LOADER

Control Valve

1. Remove the loader frame (6).

2. Disconnect the cruise control rod (2).

3. Disconnect the frame loader control rods (3).

4. Remove the brake spring.

5. Remove the arms (4) from spool end.

6. Remove the stay bolt (5).

7. Remove the valve stay (7).

8. Disconnect the pipes (1).

9. Remove the control valve (8) with pipes.

(When reassembling)

• After reassembling a valve, check for oil leakage by starting up an engine .

• IMPORTANT

• When starting up engine, watch out for the rotating propeller shaft (9).

(Reference)

• When adjusting the length of rods, make the lever come to the neutral position.

A: 145 mm (5.71 in.)

B : 315 mm (12.46 in.)

C : 448 mm (17.64 in.)

(1) Pipe

(2) Cruise Control Rod

(3) Front Loader Control Rod

(4) Arm

(5) Stay

(6) Loader Frame

(7) Valve Stay

(8) Control Valve

(9) Propeller Shaft

(10) Front Loader Control Lever

(11) Rod 1

(12) Rod 2

(13) Rod 3

W1013522

3TAAAAGLP026A

8-S12

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM FRONT LOADER

Disassembling Control Valve

(2)

3TAAAAGLP032A

(1) Dust Seal

(2) Dust Seal

(3) Load Check Valve

(4) Spring

(5) O-ring

(6) Plug

(7) Bolt

(8) Plug

(9) Seat

(10) Spring

(11) Ball

(12) Stopper

(13) Ring

(14) Bolt

(15) Plug

(16) Seat

(17) Spring

(18) Ball

(19) Stopper

(20) Ring

(21) Spool

(22) O-ring

(23) Back-up Ring

(24) Collar

(25) Spring Holder

(26) Spring

(27) Spring Holder

(28) Valve Body

(29) Spool

(30) O-ring

(31) Back-up Ring

(32) Collar

(33) Spring Holder

(34) Spring

(35) Spring Holder

A, C: Boom Control Section

B, 0: Bucket Control Section

W1016062

1. Remove the plugs (6) and take out the spring (4) and load check valve (3).

2. Remove the seal plates (8), (15) with other parts inside plug (C), (D).

3. Draw out the spools (21), (29) with other component parts (A), (8) from the valve body (28).

(When reassembling)

• Clean all parts with a suitable solvent, and dry with a lint-free cloth or air.

• Visually inspect all parts for damage,

• Install the spools to the valve body, not to damage the O-ring.

8-S13

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM FRONT LOADER

(2) Bucket, Boom and Hydraulic Cylinders

Bucket and Bucket Cylinder

1. Remove the pins (4), the lower pin (1) and remove the bucket (3).

2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the bucket cylinder (2).

3. Remove the upper pin (1) and remove the bucket cylinder (2).

(When reassembling)

• When installing the bucket cylinder (2), the hydraulic port should face inside and be careful of the direction of grease fittings.

(1) Pin

(2) Bucket Cylinder

(3) Bucket

(4) Pin

W1016780

Boom Cylinder and Hydraulic Tubes

1. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the boom cylinders (4).

2. Remove the pins (2) and remove the boom cylinders (4).

3. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (6) with quick couplers at the control valve.

4. Remove the pins (1) and remove the boom (3) from the side frame (5).

5. Remove the hydraulic tubes (7) from the boom (3).

(When reassembling)

• When installing the boom cylinders (4), the hydraulic port should face inside and be careful of the direction of grease fittings.

(1) Pin

(2) Pin

(3) Boom

(4) Boom Cylinder

(5) Side Frame

(6) Hydraulic Hose

(7) Hydraulic Tube

W1016879

8-S14

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM r

~(1)(2) ~

1

-~

3UFAAABLP035A

(3)

----­

(4)

FRONT LOADER

Piston Rod Assembly

1. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder, and secure the tube end of the cylinder in a vise.

2. Unscrew the cylinder head (1) with the adjustable gland nut wrench (4).

3. Pull out the piston rod assembly (2) from the cylinder tube (3).

(When reassembling)

• Visually inspect the cylinder tube for signs of scoring or damage.

• Insert the piston rod assembly to the cylinder tube, not to damage the piston seal on the piston.

• Install the cylinder head to the cylinder tube, not to damage the a-ring on the cylinder head.

(1) Cylinder Head

(2) Piston Rod Assembly

(3) Cylinder Tube

(4) Adjustable Gland Nut Wrench

W1017050

3UFAAABLP036A

3UFAAABLP037A

(5) (6) (7)

Cylinder Head, Piston and Nut

1. Secure the rod end in a vise.

2. Unscrew the nut (4). and remove the piston (3) and cylinder head

(2) from the piston rod (1).

(When reassembling)

• Visually inspect all parts for signs of scoring or damage.

• Insert the piston rod to the cylinder head. not to damage the wiper seal (5) and oil seal (6).

Tightening torque

Boom cylinder piston mounting nut

Bucket cylinder piston mounting nut

150t0180N'm

15.3 to 18.3 kgf'm

111 to 132 ft-Ibs

350 to 400 N'm

35.7 to 40.7 kgf'm

259 to 295 ft-Ibs

(1) Piston Rod

(2) Cylinder Head

(3) Piston

(4) Nut

(5) Wiper Seal

(6) Oil Seal

(7) O-ring

W1017322

3UFAAABLP038A

({(oj

(1 )

(2)

(3) o

3UFAAABLP048A

Piston Seal and O-ring

1. Remove the piston seal (2) and a-ring (3) from the piston (1).

• IMPORTANT

• When installing the O-ring (3) and piston seal (2) to the piston (1), use the slide jig and correcting jig as shown "S.

Special Tools" of "GENERAL" section.

(1) Piston

(2) Piston Seal

(3) O-ring

W1017590

8-S15

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1) (2)

3UFAAABLP039A

(3) (4)

FRONT LOADER

Installing a-ring and Piston Seal

1. Place the slide jig (2) on the piston (4).

2. Install the O-ring (3) to the piston using the slide jig.

3. Install the piston seal (1) over the O-ring using the slide jig.

4. Compress the piston seal to the correct size by installing the piston into the correcting jig (5) .

• NOTE

• Do not turn (roll) the piston seal as you install it.

(1) Piston Seal

(2) Slide Jig

(3) a-ring

(4) Piston

(5) Correcting Jig

W1018156

(5)

/

I

I

--+

...... IIJII

3UFAAABLP040A

(3) Side Frames, Front Guard and Main Frames

Side Frames

1. Remove the pins (2), (5).

2. Remove the side frames (1) from the boom assembly (3) and the boom cylinder (4).

(1) Side Frame

(2) Pin

(3) Boom Assembly

(4) Boom Cylinder

(5) Pin

W1015835

Front Guard

1. Remove the front guard (1).

(1) Front Guard

W1015954

Main Frames

1. Remove the main frame mounting bolts and nuts (2) from the tractor body.

2. Remove the main frame (1).

Tightening torque

Main frame mounting bolt and nut (M14)

147 N'm

15.0 kgf·m

108 ft-Ibs

(1) Main Frame (2) Main Frame Mounting Bolt and Nut

W1016042

8-516

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

[3] SERVICING

FRONT LOADER

Piston Rod Bend

1. Place piston rod on V blocks.

2. Set a dial indicator on the center of the rod.

3. Turn the piston rod and read the dial indicator.

4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.

Piston rod bend Allowable limit

0.25 mm

0.0098 in.

W1017385

3UFAAABLP041 A

8-S17

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY DECALS

The following safety decals are installed on the machine.

If a decal becomes damaged, illegible or is not on the machine, replace it. The decal part number is listed in the parts list.

(1) Part No. 75597-7528-1 (4) Part No. 75595-7517-2 (5) Part No. 75595-7524-2

AWARNING

(2) Part No. 7K501-7529-1 (3) Part No. 75597-7517-2

CARE OF DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS

1. Keep danger, warning and caution labels clean and free from obstructing material.

2. Clean danger, warning and caution labels with soap and water, dry with a soft cloth.

3. Replace damaged or missing danger, warning and caution labels with new labels from your local KUBOTA distributor.

4. If a component with danger, warning and caution label(s) affixed is replaced with new part, make sure new label(s) is (are) attached in the same location(s) as the replaced component.

5. Mount new danger, warning and caution labels by applying on a clean dry surface and pressing any bubbles to outside edge.

13TAAAAGCP001A

9-1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

BACKHOE TERMINONOGY

BACKHOE TERMINONOGY

3TAAAAGDP001 A

(16)--_..;.

(17)

(1) Backhoe Bucket

(2) Bucket Teeth

(3) Bucket Link

(4) Bucket Cylinder

(5) Dipperstick

(6) Dipperstick Cylinder

(7) Boom

(8) Boom Cylinder

(9) Swing Frame

(10) Main Frame

(11) Swing Cylinder

(12) Stabilizer

(13) Stabilizer Pad

(14) Stabilizer Cylinder

(15) Joystick Control

(16) Stabilizer Control

(17) Swing Lock Pin

(18) Boom Lock Pin

9-2

SPECIFICATIONS BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

SPECIFICATIONS

• Operating Dimensions

@

A

F

')

_ l

(--~

11--/

L

/&:

~

~ c+

\

AI

K

( I

,

B

E

J

\ J

h"

..-::I\~~cb~~::--,.

-l~,"

---~

U

I

R

17

I

NI

\----­

,

"'-

....

-­

'1M

~

----

//

/

~//

,

/

I

I

H

G

3TAAAAGDPOO3A

A

B

C

E

F

G

H

Model

Transport Height

Stabilizer Spread Transport

Ground Clearance

Overall Width

1719 mm (67.7 in.)

1296 mm (51.0 in.)

240 mm (9.4 in.)

1128 mm (44.4 in.)

BT601

J

K

Maximum Digging Depth

Digging Depth 2 ft., Flat Bottom

Digging Depth 8 ft.• Flat Bottom

Operating Height Fully Raised

Loading Height

1889 mm (74.4 in.)

1842 mm (72.5 in.)

1059 mm (41.7 in.)

2539 mm (100 in.)

1533 mm (60.4 in.)

L

M

N p

Loading Reach

Reach from Swing Pivot

Swing Pivot to Rear Axle Center Line

Bucket Rotation

Stabilizer Spread-Operation

Angle of Departure per SAE J1234

789 mm (31.1 in.)

2612 mm (102.8 in.)

726 mm (28.6 in.)

180 deg.

1862 mm (73.3 in.) R

A3

U Leveling Angle

Swing Arc

20.1 deg.

11 deg.

140 deg. a 60 0

NOTE:The specifications are taken with KUBOTA BX24 tractor. (Tire size: Front 18 x 8.5-10, Rear 26 x 12.00-12)

W1028417

9-3

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCKSOB-23BX, LA240, BTS01, WSM

• Digging Force (Per SAE J49)

Model

With bucket cylinder

With dipperstick cylinder

• Cycle Time (Seconds)

Boom cylinder. extend

Boom cylinder, retract

Swing cylinder. from 90

0 to center

Dipperstick cylinder, extend

Dipperstick cylinder, retract

Bucket cylinder. extend

Bucket cylinder. retract

Stabilizer cylinder. max. height to ground

Stabilizer cylinder. ground to max. height

• Hydraulic Cylinders

Rod diameter

Cylinder bore

Boom cm (in.)

3.0(1.18)

6.5 (2.56)

• Bucket Sizes

Dipperstick cm (in.)

2.5 (0.98)

6.0 (2.36)

I

Bucket mm (in.)

I

2.5 (0.98)

I 5.0 (1.97)

Trenching 8"

Trenching 12"

Width cm (in.)

20.3 (8)

30.5 (12)

8T601

8610 N (1936Ibs)

5209 N (1171 Ibs)

4.5

3.7

1.5

4.1

3.4

3.1

2.4

2.9

2.3

Stabilizer cm (in.)

2.5 (0.98)

6.0 (2.36)

SAE Struck

Capacity m

3

(cu-ft)

0.009 (0.317)

0.014 (0.510)

SAE Heaped

Capacity m

3

(cu-ft)

0.011 (0.402)

0.020 (0.690)

Number of Teeth

2

3

SPECIFICATIONS

W1027852

W1028902

Swing cm (in.)

3.0(1.18)

6.0 (2.36)

W1028958

Weight kg (Ibs)

10 (22)

13 (29)

W1029014

9-4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Lift Capacity (Per SAE J31)

FT

8~----~----~~~-r-----'

192 (423)

212 (467)

4~ __ --+-----~----~L---~

215 (474)

209 (461)

2~----+-----~-----+~~~

203 (448)

2~----+-----~--~~----~

201 (443)

4~----+---~~~---+----~

214 (472)

6~----~----~--~~~--~

FT

262 (578)

[A]

3TAAAAGDP004A

[A] Rated Lift Capacity (Over End) - kg (Ibs)

Lift capacities shown are 87 % of maximum lift force, according to SAE definition.

SPECIFICATIONS

W1029646

9-5

MECHANISM

CONTENTS

1. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM .................................................................................. 9-M 1

[1] HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ............................................................................ 9-M1

[2] CONTROL VALVE .................................................................................. 9-M2

(1) Structure ............................................................................................ 9-M2

(2) Operation ........................................................................................... 9-M3

(3) Overload Relief Valve ...................................................................... 9-M16

[3] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ...................................................................... 9-M18

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

1. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

[1] HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

(1 )

P

T

BACKHOE

P.B.

B1 :B1 Port

B2 :B2 Port

B3 :B3 Port

B4:B4 Port

B5 :B5 Port

B6 :B6 Port

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A: From Hydraulic Pump

(Approx. 14 Umin.,

3.7 U.S.gals/mln.,

3.08 Imp.gals/min.)

To operate the backhoe, the hydraulic oil pressurized oil by the hydraulic pump flows pump from pump port P through six control valve (the bucket control valve, the dipperstick control valve, the stabilizer RH control valve, the stabilizer LH control valve, the boom control valve and the swing control valve) to P.B. port (to front loader control valve).

Since the relief valve is not equipped in the backhoe control valve. the main relief valve in the tractor operates.

9-M1

BX25, RCK54(P}-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[2] CONTROL VALVE

(1) Structure

B1 A1 B2A2 B3A3 B4A4 B5A5 B6A6

P.B.

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP007 A

(1) Inlet Section

(2) Bucket Control Valve

(3) Dipperstick Control Valve

(4) Stabilizer RH Control Valve

(5) Stabilizer LH Control Valve

(6) Boom Control Valve

(7) Swing Control Valve

(8) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

Ai :A1 Port

A2 :A2 Port

A3 :A3 Port

A4 :A4 Port

A5 :A5 Port

A6 :A6 Port

B1 :B1 Port

B2 :B2 Port

B3 :B3 Port

B4 :B4 Port

B5 :B5 Port

B6 :B6 Port

(1) Inlet

This section has P and T ports.

The P port is connected to the OUTLET port of tractor connected by the quick coupler.

The T port is connected to the transaxle case by the quick coupler.

(2) Control Valve Section

The control valves are of 3 positions, 6 connections, no detent, spring center type. These valves have A and B ports and control oil flow to each cylinders.

These are consisting of a valve housing, spool, load check valve, overload relief valve, etc ..

(3) Outlet Section

This section has P.B. port which is connected to the INLET port of hydraulic block or front loader control valve.

9-M2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2) Operation

• Neutral

P

BACKHOE

P.B.

P

P.B.

T

B1

A1

B2

A2

B3

A3

B4

A4

(11 )

(8)

B5

A5

B6

3TAAAAGNP008A

A6

L -______ ~----------------~

P.B.

(1) Inlet Section

(2) Bucket Control Valve

(3) Dipperstick Control Valve

(4) Stabilizer RH Control Valve

(5) Stabilizer LH Control Valve

(6) Boom Control Valve

(7) Swing Control Valve

(8) Outlet Section

(9) Load Check Valve

(10) Spool

(11) Neutral Passage

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.8. : Power 8eyond Port

A1 : A1 Port

A2: A2 Port

A3: A3 Port

A4 :A4 Port

A5: A5 Port

A6: A6 Port

81: 81 Port

82: 82 Port

83: 83 Port

84: 84 Port

85: 85 Port

86: 86 Port a: low Pressure

:a

Pressure-fed oil from the hydraulic pumps are delivered into P port in the inlet section (8).

As the load check valves (9) are kept closed in the neutral position. oil flows along the notched section of the spools

(10) to the P.B. port through the neutral passage (11).

Then the oil is fed to the front loader valve or transaxle case and pipe from the P.B. port.

9-M3

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Bucket (Roll-back) ,

(1 ) p T

BACKHOE

(2) (3) (4) (5)

3TAAAAGNP009A

(1) Bucket Cylinder

(2) Bucket Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A1 : A1 Port

(From Bucket Cylinder)

B1 : B1 Port

(To Bucket Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the dipperstick and bucket lever is moved to the left to set to the "ROLL-BACK" position, the spool (5) of the bucket control valve (2) moves to the right. which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and B1 port, and between A1 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4) and flows to B1 port to extend the bucket cylinder (1).

3. Return oil from the bucket cylinder (1) returns to the transmission case through the A 1 port. low pressure passage and T port.

9-M4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Bucket (Dump)

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP010A

(1) Bucket Cylinder

(2) Bucket Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A1 : A1 Port

(To Bucket Cylinder)

B1 : B1 Port

(From Bucket Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the dipperstick and bucket lever is moved to the right to set to the "DUMP" position, the spool (S) of the bucket control valve (2) moves to the left, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and Ai port, and between B1 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4) and flows to Ai port to retract the bucket cylinder.

3. Return oil from the bucket cylinder returns to the transmission case through the B1 port, low pressure passage and

T port.

9-MS

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B·23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Dipperstick (Crowd) p

T

(2) (3) (4)

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP011 A

(1) Oipperstick Cylinder

(2) Oipperstick Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A2: A2 Port

(From Dlpperstick Cylinder)

B2: B2 Port

(To Dlpperstlck Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the dipperstick and bucket lever is pulled to the backward to set to the "CROWD" position. the spool (5) of the dipperstick control valve (2) moves to the left, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and B2 port, and between A2 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4) and flows to B2 port to extend the dipperstick cylinder.

3. Return oil from the dipperstick cylinder returns to the transmission case through the A2 port, low pressure passage and T port.

9-M6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Dipperstick (Extend)

P T

(1 )

(2) (3) (4)

BACKHOE

P.B.

(6)

3TAAAAGNP012A

(1) Dipperstick Cylinder

(2) Dipperstick Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A2: A2 Port

(To Dipperstlck Cylinder)

B2: B2 Port

(From Dipperstick Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the dipperstick and bucket lever is pushed to the forward to set to the "EXTEND" position, the spool (5) of the dipperstick control valve (2) moves to the right, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and A2 port, and between 82 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4) and flows to A2 port to retract the dipperstick cylinder.

3. Return oil from the dipperstick cylinder returns to the transmission case through the 82 port, low pressure passage and T port.

9-M7

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240. BT601, WSM

• Stabilizer RH (Shrink) p T

(2) (3) (4)

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP013A

(1) Stabilizer Cylinder RH

(2) Stabilizer RH Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A3 :A3 Port

(From Stabilizer RH

Cylinder)

B3: B3 Port

(To Stabilizer RH Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the right stabilizer control lever is pushed to the forward to set to the "SHRINK" position, the spool (5) of the stabilizer RH control valve (2) moves to the left. which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and 83 port, and between A3 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4), and flows to 83 port to retract the right stabilizer cylinder.

3. Return oil from the right stabilizer cylinder returns to the transmission case through the A3 port, low pressure passage and T port.

9-M8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Stabilizer RH (Extend)

(1 )

¢ ' =. . ._.....

P.B.

(6)

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP014A

(1) Stabilizer Cylinder RH

(2) Stabilizer RH Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A3: A3 Port

(To Stabilizer RH Cylinder)

B3: B3 Port

(From Stabilizer RH

Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the right stabilizer control lever is pulled to the downward to set to the "EXTEND" position, the spool (5) of the stabilizer RH control valve (2) moves to the right, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (6) and A3 port, and between 83 port and T port_

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (3), and flows to A3 port to extend the right stabilizer cylinder.

3. Return oil from the right stabilizer cylinder returns to the transmission case through the 83 port, low pressure passage and T port.

9-M9

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

• Stabilizer LH (Shrink)

(2) (3) (4)

BACKHOE

P.B.

3TAAAAGNP015A

(1) Stabilizer Cylinder LH

(2) Stabilizer LH Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A4: A4 Port

(From Stabilizer LH Cylinder)

B4: B4 Port

(To Stabilizer LH Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the right stabilizer control lever is pushed to the forward to set to the "SHRINK" position. the spool (5) of the stabilizer LH control valve (2) moves to the left, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and 84 port, and between A4 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4), and flows to 84 port to retract the left stabilizer cylinder.

3. Return oil from the left stabilizer cylinder returns to the transmission case through the A4 port, low pressure passage and T port.

9-M10

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

• Stabilizer LH (Extend)

BACKHOE

(2) (3) (4) (5)

3TAAAAGNP016A

(1) Stabilizer Cylinder LH

(2) Stabilizer LH Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A4 :A4 Port

(To Stabilizer LH Cylinder)

B4: B4 Port

(From Stabilizer LH Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the right stabilizer control lever is pulled to the downward to set to the "EXTEND" position, the spool (5) of the stabilizer LH control valve (2) moves to the right, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (4) and A4 port, and between 84 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (3), and flows to A4 port to retract the left stabilizer cylinder.

3. Return oil from the left stabilizer cylinder returns to the transmission case through the B4 port, low pressure passage and T port.

9-M11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Boom (Up)

T

(2) (3) (4)

BACKHOE

(1 ) c:C>

3TAAAAGNP017A

(1) Boom Cylinder

(2) Boom Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A5: A5 Port

(From Boom Cylinder)

B5: B5 Port

(To Boom Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the boom and swing lever is pulled to the backward to set to the "UP" position, the spool (5) of the boom control valve (2) moves to the left, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and B5 port, and between

A5 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4) and flows to B5 port to retract the boom cylinder.

3. Return oil from the boom cylinder returns to the transmission case through the AS port, low pressure passage and

T port.

9-M12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Boom (Down) p

T

BACKHOE

(6)

85

3TAAAAGNP018A

(1) Boom Cylinder

(2) Boom Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A5: A5 Port

(To Boom Cylinder)

B5: B5 Port

(From Boom Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the boom and swing lever is pulled to the forward to set to the "DOWN" position, the spool (5) of the boom control valve (2) moves to the right, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (4) and AS port, and between

B5 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (3) and flows to AS port to extend the boom cylinder.

3. Return oil from the boom cylinder returns to the transmission case through the B5 port, low pressure passage and

T port.

9-M13

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, 6T601, WSM

• Swing (Right)

T

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP019A

(1) Swing Cylinder

(2) Swing Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) Outlet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P.B. :Power Beyond Port

A6: A6 Port

(From Swing Cylinder)

B6: B6 Port

(To Swing Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1. When the boom and swing lever is moved to the right to set to the "RIGHT" position, the spool (5) of the swing control valve (2) moves to the right, which forms oil passage between bridge passage (3) and A6 port, and between

86 port and T port.

2. The pressurewfed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (4) and flows to 86 port to extend the swing cylinder.

3. Return oil from the swing cylinders return to the transmission case through the A6 port, low pressure passage and

T port.

9 w

M14

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

• Swing (Left) p

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP020A

(1) Swing Cylinder

(2) Swing Control Valve

(3) Bridge Passage

(4) Load Check Valve

(5) Spool

(6) Inlet Section

(7) OuUet Section

P: Pump Port

T: Tank Port

P,B, :Power Beyond Port

A6: A6 Port

(To Swing Cylinder)

B6: B6 Port

(From Swing Cylinder) a: Low Pressure b: High Pressure

1, When the boom and swing lever is moved to the left to set to the "LEFT" position, the spool (5) of the swing control valve (2) moves to the left, which forms oil passage between bridge (4) and A6 port, and between 86 port and T port.

2. The pressure-fed oil from the P port opens the load check valve (3) and flows to A6 port to shrink the swing cylinder.

3. Return oil from the swing cylinders return to the transmission case through the 86 port, low pressure passage and

T port.

9-M15

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(3) Overload Relief Valve

3TAAAAGNP021A

(3)

(4) ( \

(7)

(6\ ~

~~

(2)

BACKHOE

Overload relief valve in this control valve is a combination valve combining a relief operation and anti­ cavitation operation .

• Relief Operation

When the control valve is in the neutral position, both cylinder ports of control valve are blocked by the spool.

If an external load is imposed on the cylinder, pressure builds in the circuit.

When the pressure exceeds the set level of the overload relief vale, the relief valve opens and the oil returns to tank. In this way, the hydraulic circuit and actuator are protected from excessive pressures.

• Anti-cavitation Operation

Overload relief valve also has anti-void function. If a negative pressure takes place in the circuit, the oil is fed from the tank to eliminate the negative pressure.

(1) Overload Relief Valve

(2) Control Valve

(3) Housing

(4) Check Valve Poppet

(5) Relief Valve Poppet

(6) Piston Spring

(7) Piston Poppet

(8) Lock Nut

(9) Adjusting Screw

(10) Pilot Spring

(11) Pilot Poppet

(12) Pilot Section

W1023498

3UBAAABNP018A

• Relief Operation

(12)

(5)

, 3UBAAABNP019A

B (4)

[When the actuator port pressure is lower than the setting]

The cylinder port HP is applied to the seat B in the following route: first through the throttle a of the piston poppet (1) built in the relief valve poppet (5), second through the spring chamber A, and then through the circular clearance between the adjusting screw (9) and the piston poppet (1). This cylinder port HP works to open the pilot poppet (2). Because the piston spring (3) has not reached the set pressure, however, the valve stays shut. In this way the seat remains intact and the relief valve poppet (5) stays shut.

(1) Piston Poppet

(2) Pilot Poppet

(3) Piston Spring

(4) Adjusting Screw

(5) Relief Valve Poppet

HP :High Pressure

LP :Low Pressure

A: Chamber

B: Seat a: Throttle

W1024073

9-M16

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

A (2) (3)

3UBAAABNP020A

(5)

• Anti-cavitation Operation

(1 )

3UBAAABNP021 A

(5) (4)

(4)

(3)

(2)

BACKHOE

[When the actuator port pressure is higher than the setting]

When the cylinder port HP has reached the set pressure of the piston spring (5), the pressure oil in the spring chamber A opens the pilot poppet (4) and flows through the drain passage into the tank passage. This lowers the pressure in the spring chamber A, and the pressure difference across the throttle a moves the relief valve poppet (1) to the right. Now the seat of the relief valve poppet (1) gets open. The pressure oil flows then from this seat into the tank, and the circuit pressure is kept at the pressure level set by the overload relief valve.

Dipperstick

Relief valve setting pressure

17.20 to 17.69 MPa

175 to 180 kgf/cm 2

2489 to 2560 psi

Swing

(1) Piston Poppet

(2) Pilot Poppet

(3) Piston Spring

(4) Adjusting Screw

(5) Relief Valve Poppet

13.7 to 14.1 MPa

140 to 145 kgf/cm

2

1991 to 2062 psi

• Oil temperature: 45 to 55°C

113 to 131°F

HP :High Pressure lP :low Pressure

A: Chamber a: Throttle

W1024163

This valve, in operation, prevents a condition - so called cavitation - that arises in the cylinder port HP where fluid is not entirely filling out.

That is, this relief valve is combined an anti-cavitation functions supplying oil.

The pressure oil at the tank port LH opens the check valve poppet, allowing oil to flow through the tank port to prevent negative pressure from being generated in the cylinder.

(1) Check Valve Poppet

(2) Piston Spring

(3) Pilot Poppet

(4) Relief Valve Poppet

(5) Piston Poppet

W1024467

9-M17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

[3] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER

BACKHOE

(1 ) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

3TAAAAGNP022A

(1) Rod

(2) Head

(3) Cylinder Tube

(4) Piston

(5) Nut (6) Tube End

Bucket, dipperstick, boom, swing, and stabilizer cylinder consists of cylinder head (2), piston rod (1), cylinder tube

(3), piston (4) and other parts as shown in the figure above.

They are single-rod double acting cylinders in which the reciprocating motion of the piston is controlled by hydraulic force applied to both of its ends.

Cylinder Specifications

Cylinder 1.0.

Rod 0.0.

Stroke

Boom Cylinder mm (in.)

30.0 (1.18)

65.0 (2.56)

304 (11.97)

Oipperstick

Cylinder mm (in.)

25.0 (0.98)

60.0 (2.36)

330 (12.99)

Bucket Cylinder mm (in.)

25.0 (0.98)

50.0 (1.97)

356 (14.02)

Stabilizer

Cylinder mm (in.)

25.0 (0.98)

60.0 (2.36)

272 (10.71)

Swing Cylinder mm (in.)

30.0 (1.18)

60.0 (2.36)

175 (6.89)

W1025274

9-M18

SERVICING

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL .......................................................................................................9-51

[1] BACKHOE IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................9-51

[2] GENERAL PRECAUTION .......................................................................9-51

[3] LUBRiCANTS ...........................................................................................9-52

[4] MAINTENANCE CHECK LlST ................................................................ 9-S2

[5] CHECK AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 9-S2

(1) Check Points of Each Use or Daily .....................................................9-52

(2) Check Points of Every 10 Hours .........................................................9-53

2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................9-54

3. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................9-55

4. TIGHTENING TORQUES ..............................................................................9-57

[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS .................................. 9-S7

[2] HYDRAULIC HOSES FITTING AND FLARE PiPES ........................... 9-57

[3] TIGHTENING TORQUES OF SCREWS, BOLT AND NUTS ON THE

TABLE BELOW ARE ESPECIALLY SPECIFIED .................................9-57

5. DISMOUNTING AND MOUNTING ................................................................ 9-S8

[1] DISMOUNTING THE BACKHOE ............................................................ 9-S8

[2] MOUNTING THE BACKHOE TO TRACTOR .....................................9-510

[3] DISASSEMBLING THE BACKHOE ......................................................9-512

6. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING .................................... 9-S16

[1] CONTROL VALVE .................................................................................9-516

(1) Checking and Adjusting ....................................................................9-516

(2) Disassembling and Assembling ........................................................9-516

[2] BOOM, DIPPERSTICK, BUCKET, SWING AND STABILIZER

CyLINDER ..............................................................................................9-518

(1) Disassembling and Assembling ........................................................9-518

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

1. GENERAL

[1] BACKHOE IDENTIFICATION

When contacting your local KUBOTA distributor, always specify backhoe serial number and hour meter reading.

(1) Serial Number (2) Hour Meter

W1010477

[2] GENERAL PRECAUTION

3UFAAABLP008A

• During disassembly, carefully arrange removed parts in a clean area to prevent later confusion. Screws, bolts and nuts should be replaced in their original positions to prevent reassembly errors.

• When special tools are required, use genuine KUBOTA tools.

Special tools which are not used frequently should be made according to the drawings provided.

• Clean parts before measuring them.

• Use only genuine KUBOTA parts for parts replacement to maintain backhoe performance and to assure safety.

• O-rings and oil seals must be replaced during reassembly. Apply grease to new O-rings or oil seals before reassembling.

• Nipples must be tightened to the specified torque. Excessive torque may cause damages hydraulic units or nipples, and insufficient torque will result in oil leaks.

• When using a new hose or pipe, tighten nuts to the specified torque once, then loosen them (approx. by 45 0) to allow hose or pipe to settle before retightening to the specified torque (except teflon tape parts).

• When removing both ends of a pipe, remove the lower end first.

• Use two pliers in removal and reinstallation; one to hold the static side, and the other to turn the side being removed to avoid twisting.

• Check to see that sleeves of fearless connectors and tapered sections of hoses are free of dust and scratches.

• After tightening nipples, clean the joint and apply the maximum working pressure 2 to 3 times to check for oil leak.

A: Grease

W1010572

9-S1

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

[3] LUBRICANTS

To prevent serious damage to hydraulic systems, use only specified fluid or its equivalent.

Place

Transmission case

Grease nipples

Capacity

11.6 L

3.1 U.S.gals

2.6 Imp.gals

Until grease overflows

Lubricants

KUBOTA SUPER UDT f1uid*

Moly Ep Type grease

* KUBOTA original transmission hydraulic fluid

[4] MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST

To keep the machine working in good condition as well as to avoid any accident and trouble, carry out periodic inspection and maintenance. Check the following points before use.

Service Interval

Dally (Each use)

Every 10 hours

Check Points

Check the transmission fluid level

Retighten the backhoe hardware to torque value

Check the hydraulic hoses

Grease all grease nipples

Reference page

9-S2

9-S2

9-S2

9-S3

W1013874

[5] CHECK AND MAINTENANCE

A

CAUTION

• When checking and repairing. park the tractor on flat ground and apply the parking brake.

• When checking and repairing, lower the bucket and stabilizers, and stop the engine.

(1) Check Points of Each Use or Daily

Checking Transmission Fluid Level

1. Check that the tractor hydraulic fluid level.

2. To check the oil level, remove the dipstick (1), wipe it clean, replace it, and remove it again.

Check that the oil level is between the two notches.

3. If the level is too low, replenish new oil.

• IMPORTANT

• Use only KUBOTA SUPER UDT fluid. Use of other oils may damage the transmission or hydraulic system.

Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT". (See page

G-7.)

(1) Dipstick A :011 level acceptable within this range.

W1011494

Retightening Backhoe Hardware

1. Check all hardware before daily operation.

2. If the screws, bolts and nuts are loosen, retighten them to the specified torque.

W1011636

Checking Hydraulic Hoses

1. Check all hydraulic hoses for cuts or wear.

2. If defects are found, replace them.

W1011703

9-S2

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

(2) Check Points of Every 10 Hours

Greasing

1. Inject grease all grease nipples with a hand grease gun.

W1011760

3TAAAAGNP044A

9-53

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

BACKHOE

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

i

Symptom Probable Cause Solution

All Functions

Inoperative (Front

Loader Is OK)

All Functions

Including Front

Loader, Are

Inoperative

Hydraulic Oil

Overheats

Individual Cylinder

Circuit Weak or

Inoperative (Others

OK)

Excessive Cylinder

Movement

Insufficient Cylinder

Speed

Quick coupler disconnected Reconnect

Insufficient transmission fluid

Relief valve spring damaged

Hydraulic pump malfunctioning

Replenish

Replace

Repair or replace

Oil filter clogged

Continuous operation against relief

Replace

Operate properly

Transmission fluid improper brand and viscosity Use proper fluid

Relief valve mis-adjusted

Insufficient transmission fluid

Readjust

Replenish

Oil filter clogged

Valve spool not moving fully

Valve spool stick (especially when warm)

Overload relief valve mis-adjusted

Piston seal ring worn or damaged

Cylinder tube worn or damaged

Oil leaks from joint

Hydraulic hose damaged

Dust in overload relief valve

Piston seal ring worn or damage

Excessive valve spool to bore tolerance

Hydraulic hose or fitting damaged

Hydraulic hose or fitting loose

Cylinder tube worn or damaged

Engine rpm too low

Hydraulic pump malfunctioning

Relief valve pressure too low

Insufficient transmission fluid i

Replace

Adjust linkage

Repair or replace

Readjust

Replace

Replace

Repair or replace

Replace

Flush hydraulic line

Replace

Replace

Replace

Retighten

Replace

Adjust rpm

Repair or replace

Readjust

Replenish

I

Reference

Page

-

9-S2

5-S4

5-S12

G-13

-

G-7

5-S4

9-S2

G-13

-

9-S16

-

9-S19

9-S18

-

9-S19

9-S16

-

-

9-S19

-

5-S12

5-S4

9-S2

W1014322

9-S4

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

3. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS

Item

Boom Cylinder Rod Pin to Cylinder

Bushing

Clearance

Factory Specification

0.060 to 0.185 mm

0.002 to 0.007 in.

Pin O.D. 29.970 to 30.000 mm

1.180 to 1.181 in.

Bushing 1.0.

Boom Support, Oipperstick Fulcrum Pin to Clearance

Bushing

Pin O.D.

30.060 to 30.155 mm

1.183to 1.187 in.

0.140 to 0.180 mm

0.006 to 0.007 in.

29.820 to 29.850 mm

1.174 to 1.175 in.

Bushing I.D.

Oipperstick Cylinder Rod Pin to Cylinder

Bushing

Pin

Bushing

Clearance

0.0.

1.0.

Bucket Fulcrum Pin, Bucket Cylinder Pin, Clearance

Bucket Guide Link Pin to Bushing

Pin 0.0.

29.990 to 30.000 mm

1.1807 to 1.1811 in.

0.060 to 0.185 mm

0.002 to 0.007 in.

29.970 to 30.000 mm

1.180to 1.181 in.

30.060 to 30.155 mm

1.183 to 1.187 in.

0.204 to 0.315 mm

0.008 to 0.0012 in.

Bushing

Boom Fulcrum Pin to Swing Frame

Bushing

Pin

Bushing

Main Frame Fulcrum Pin to Bushing

Pin

1.0.

Clearance

0.0.

1.0.

Clearance

24.816 to 24.846 mm

0.977 to 0.978 in.

29.990 to 30.000 mm

1.1807 to 1.1811 in.

0.140 to 0.180 mm

0.006 to 0.007 in.

29.820 to 29.850 mm

1.1740 to 1.1752 in.

29.990 to 30.000 mm

1.1807 to 1.1811 in.

0.070 to 0.130 mm

0.003 to 0.005 in.

0.0.

Bushing

1.0.

34.970 to 35.000 mm

1.377 to 1.378 in.

35.070 to 35.100 mm

1.381 to 1.382 in.

Allowable Limit

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

-

-

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

-

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

-

-

-

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

0.5mm

0.0197 in.

-

-

W1013874

9-S5

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

Item

Swing Cylinder Rod Pin to Cylinder

Bushing

Pin

Clearance

0.0.

Bushing

Thrust Washer

Piston Rod

1.0.

Thickness

Bend

BACKHOE

Factory Specification

0.108 to 0.259 mm

0.004 to 0.010 in.

24.816 to 25.000 mm

0.977 to 0.984 in.

25.000 to 25.209 mm

0.984 to 0.992 in.

2.66 mm

0.1046 in.

Allowable Limit

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

-

1.8mm

0.0709 in.

0.25 mm

0.0098 in.

W1013089

9-S6

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

4. TIGHTENING TORQUES

[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS (FOR FRONT LOADER

AND BACKHOE)

Screws, bolts, and nuts whose tightening torques are not specified in this Workshop Manual should be tightened according to the table below.

Indication on top of bolt

0 ®

No-grade or 4T ill

@

7T or Property class 8.8

@@

9Tor

Property class 10.9

Material of opponent

Diameter

Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness

~t~m

IbHt N'm kgf· N'm kgf·m IbHt N'm kgf'm IbHt N'm kgf·m IbHt

.80 5.8 7.9 0.80 5.8 9.81 1.00 7.24 7.9 0.80 5.8 12.3 1.25 9.05 M6 7.

.

(6 mm, 0.24 In.) to to

9.3 0.95 to to to to to to to to to to to 0 to

6.8 8.8 0.90 6.5 11.2 1.15 8.31 8.8 0.90 6.5 14.2 45 10.4

M8

(8 mm, 0.31 in.)

M10

(10 mm, 0.39 in.)

M12

(12 mm, 0.47 in.)

18 to

20

40 to

45

1.8 to

2.1

4.0 to

4.6

13 to

15

29 to

33

17 to

19

32 to

34

-

1.7 to

2.0

3.2 to

3.5

-

13 to

14

24 to

25

24 to

27

48 to

55

2.4 to

2.8

4.9 to

5.7

18 to

20

36 to

41

18 to

20

40 to

44

63 to

72

1.8 to

2.1

4.0 to

4.5

6.4 to

7.4

13 to

15

29 to

32

47 to

53

30 to

34

61 to

70

3.0 to

3.5

6.2 to

7.2

22 to

25

45 to

52

M14

(14 mm, 0.55 in.)

M16

(16 mm, 0.63 in.)

M18

(18 mm, 0.71 in.)

M20

(20 mm, 0.79 in.)

63 to

72

6.4 to

7.4

47 to

53

108 11.0 79.6 to to

25 12.8 I

17.0 123 to to to

191 19.5 141

246 25.0 181 to to to

284 29.0 209

334 34.0 246 to to to

392 40.0 289

-

-

-

-

-

-

78 to

90

7.9 to

9.2

58 to

66

124 12.6 91.2 to to to

147 15.0 108

197 20.0 145 to to to

225 23.0 166

275 28.0 203 to to to

318 32.5 235

368 37.5 272 to to to

431 44.0 318

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

103 10.5 76.0 to to to

117 12.0 86.7

167 17.0 123 to

196

260 to to to

~ to to

304 31.0 224

344 35.0 254 to to to

402 41.0 296

491 50.0 362 to to to

568 58.0 419

Wi 034542

[2]

STUD BOLTS

Material of opponent part

N'm

M8

(8 mm, 0.31 in.)

M10

(10 mm, 0.39 in.)

M12

(12 mm, 0.47 in.)

M14

(14 mm, 0.55 in.)

M16

(16 mm, 0.63 in.)

M18

(18 mm, 0.71 in.)

12 to

15 to

1.6 to

11

25 to

31

2.5 to

3.2

18 to

23

29.5 to to

21.7 to

49.0 5.0 36.1

62 to

73

6.3 to

7.5

46 to

54

98.1 10.0 72.4 to to to

112 11.5 83.1

172 17.5 127 to to to

201 20.5 148 to

11

20 to

25 to

1.2

2.0 to

2.6

31.4 3.2 23.1

IbHt

6.5 to

8.6

15 to

18

Wi 048139

9-S7

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

[3] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC OR

UNF THREADS

Grade

SAE GR.5

G

SAEGR.8

@

~

1/4

5/16

3/8

1/2

9/16

5/8

N'm

11.7 to 15.7

23.1 to 27.7

48 to 56

110 to 130

150 to 178

I

204 to 244 kgf'm

1.19to 1.61

2.35 to 2.83

4.9 to 5.8

11 to 13

15.2 to 18.2

20.8 to 24.8

Ibf-ft

8.61 to 11.6

17.0 to 20.5

35.0 to 42.0

80 to 96

110 to 132

150 to 180

.

N'm

16.3 to 19.7

33 to 39

61 to 73

150 to 178

217 to 260

299 to 357 kgf·m

1.66 to 2.01

3.4 to 4.0

6.3 to 7.4

15.2 to 18.2

22.2 to 26.5

30.5 to 36.4

IbUt

12.0 to 14.6

24 to 29

45 to 54

110 to 132

160 to 192

220 to 264

W1022485

[4] PLUGS

Material of opponent part

Shape Size

R1/8

Tapered screw R1/4

~

R1/2

G1/4 Straight screw

EJ]

G3/8

G1/2

N'm

13 to 21

25 to 44

49 to 88

58.9 to 107

25 to 34

62 to 82

49 to 88

Ordinariness kgf·m

1.3 to 2.2

2.5 to 4.5

5.0 to 9.0

6.00 to 11.0

2.5 to 3.5

6.3 to 8.4

5.0 to 9.0

Ibf-ft

9.4 to 15

18 to 32

37 to 65

43.4 to 79.5

18 to 25

46 to 60

37 to 65

N'm

13 to 21

25 to 34

49 to 58

59 to 78

Aluminum kgf·m

1.3 to 2.0

IbHt

==

9.4 to 15

18 to 25 2.5 to 3.5

5.0 to 6.0

6.0 to 8.0

-

-

37 to 43

44 to 57

-

-

0000001666E

9-S8

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

[5] HYDRAULIC FITTINGS

• Adaptors, Elbows and Others

Item Shape Thread size

N'm

37 to 44

Tightening torque kgf'm

3.8 to 4.5

IbHt

27 to 33

I

Adjustable elbow,

Adaptor (O-ring port) (LlNF)

Hose fitting, Flare nut (UNF)

~~ 9/16 a a

3/4

[A] Nut Type

[8] No Nut Type a: O-ring

7/8

9/16

Jill:Q4

It

3/4

7/8

48 to 54

77 to 85

22 to 25

36 to 40

4.9 to 5.5

7.9 to 8.6

2.3 to 2.6

3.6 to 4.1

35 to 40

57 to 62

16 to 19

26 to 30

43 to 50 4.4 to 5.0 32 to 36

Adaptor (NPT)

~ 1/4

3/8

30 to 50

I

39 to 60

3.1 to 5.0

4.0 to 6.1

23 to 36

29 to 44

112 49 to 58 5.0 to 5.9 36 to 43

• NOTE

• When connecting a hose with flare nut, after tightening the nut with specified torque, return it approximately 45 degrees (0.79 rad) and re-tighten it to specified torque.

W1015484

[6] TIGHTENING TORQUES OF SCREWS, BOLT AND NUTS ON THE

TABLE BELOW ARE ESPECIALLY SPECIFIED

Item

Boom cylinder head

Dipperstick cylinder and stabilizer cylinder head

Bucket cylinder head

Swing cylinder head

Boom cylinder piston mounting nut

Cylinder piston mounting nut (Dipperstick, Stabilizer.

Bucket)

Swing cylinder piston mounting nut

N'm

350 to 400

250 to 280

200 to 230

246 to 274

200 to 230

150 to 180

216 to 245 kgf·m

35.7 to 40.7

25.5 to 28.5

20.4 to 23.4

25.0 to 28.0

20.4 to 23.4

15.3to 18.3

22.0 to 25.0 ft-Ibs

259 to 295

185 to 206

148 to 169

181 to 202

148 to 169

111 to 132

159 to 181

W1012736

9-S9

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

5. DISMOUNTING AND MOUNTING

[1] DISMOUNTING THE BACKHOE

A

CAUTION

• When starting the engine, always sit in the operator's seat.

• When getting off the tractor, make sure that PTO lever is off and range gear shift lever is in neutral. Then set the parking brake.

• Keep hands, feet and body from between tractor and backhoe. Never allow any part of body under the machine.

• When leaving the operator's seat, fully lower the boom to the ground.

• When removing the backhoe set the swing lock pin .

• IMPORTANT

• When removing the backhoe, set the engine speed slightly above low idle.

• For removing the backhoe, locate the tractor I loader I backhoe on a flat and hard surface. preferably concrete. If the ground surface is soft. place a board on the ground for the bucket and stabilizers.

Preparation

1. Start the engine and lower the front loader to the ground.

2. Set the swing lock pin to prevent the pivoting of the boom before removing the backhoe.

3. Stand beside the rear tire, fully close the dipperstick, curl the bucket and lower the boom until the back of bucket contacts the ground.

4. Keep the stabilizer pads at about 380 mm (15 in.) high.

(1) Swing Lock Pin A : 380 mm (15 in.)

W1014290

3TAAAAGNP046A

9-S10

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

Mounting Pin

1. Raise the rear wheels slightly with the boom and remove the mounting pins (1).

2. Put the mounting pins (1) in the holes on the step of the backhoe.

3. Slowly raise the boom to disengage the backhoe from the tractor.

4. Raise the backhoe by operating the stabilizers to the lowering direction until the mount bars (3) hit to the guide stopper (2) on the support hooks (4).

5. Move the tractor forward from the backhoe about 200 mm (8 in.) .

• IMPORTANT

• Be careful not to damage or break the hoses when moving the tractor.

6. Lower the main frame (5) and swing frame (6) onto the ground by operating the boom and stabilizer control levers.

7. Shut off the engine and set the parking brake.

(1) Mounting Pin

(2) Guide Stopper

(3) Mount Bar

(4) Support Hook

(5) Main Frame

(6) Swing Frame

W1013187

9-S11

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, lA240, BT601, WSM

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP051A

Hydraulic Hoses

1. Slowly release all hydraulic pressure by moving the backhoe hydraulic control levers in all directions.

2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses in the following manner.

3. Disconnect the inlet, outlet and power beyond hoses from the tractor.

4. Connect the tractor's outlet hose to coupler of power beyond pipe.

• IMPORTANT

• Install the dust plugs and the dust cap onto the tractor's hydraulic couplers and nipple to prevent contamination.

(1) Outlet Hose (Tractor) (2) Power Beyond Pipe (Tractor)

W1013581

Separation

1. Start the engine.

Then drive the tractor I loader slowly from the backhoe.

2. Shut off the engine and remove the key from the tractor. Set the parking brake.

• NOTE

• The entire three point hitch can now be reinstalled on the tractor for use with other rear mount implements.

• Be sure that there is sufficient ballast in the rear tires and an implement is attached to the three point hitch before using the loader with backhoe removed.

W1013720

[2] MOUNTING THE BACKHOE TO TRACTOR

A

CAUTION

• When starting the engine, always sit in the proper operator's seat of the tractor.

• Keep hands, feet and body from between the tractor and the backhoe and under the backhoe.

• When getting off the tractor, make sure that range gear shift lever and PTO lever is in neutral, them set the parking brake.

Preparation

• IMPORTANT

• When installing the backhoe, set the engine speed to low idle.

1. Remove the three-point hitch and I or drawbar. (If equipped.)

2. Detach the mower, if attached in position.

3. Make sure the swing lock pin is installed.

4. Slowly back the tractor I loader, centering to the backhoe main frame.

Stop the tractor 250 to 300 mm (10 to 12 in.) away from the backhoe.

5. Shut the engine off and set the parking brake.

6. Connect the inlet, outlet and power beyond hoses of the backhoe to the outlet hose, power beyond pipe and return pipe of the tractor.

(1) Outlet Hose (Tractor)

(2) Retum Pipe (Tractor)

(3) Power Beyond Pipe (Tractor)

(4) Power Beyond Hose (Backhoe)

(5) Outlet Hose (Backhoe)

(6) Inlet Hose (Backhoe)

W1015093

9-S12

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

Mounting Pin and Mounting Backhoe

• IMPORTANT

• Make sure both hoses are firmly connected before starting the engine.

A

WARNING

• Do not move the joystick control lever to the swing position.

1. Start the engine.

2. Stand beside the rear wheel. Move the boom to fully raising position and raise the backhoe by operating the stabilizers until the mount bar on the backhoe main frame are slightly higher than the tractor main frame support hooks.

• NOTE

• If the support hooks are not parallel to the mount bars, adjust with the stabilizers.

3. Move the tractor backward until the support hooks on the tractor main frame are just beneath the mount bar on the backhoe main frame.

4. Lower the mount bar onto the support hooks by operating the stabilizer and boom control levers.

5. Move the boom slowly to the lowering position, and engage the guide plates of the main frame to the bosses of sub frame. Then raise the rear wheels slightly by operating the boom to the lowering direction.

6. Shut off the engine. Reinstall the mounting pins, and insert the slide bar of the mounting pins to the hole of the main frame.

• IMPORTANT

• Be careful not to catch the hydraulic hoses between backhoe frame and tractor while mounting the backhoe.

• NOTE

• Move the tractor Jloader Jbackhoe to an open area and cycle all backhoe functions. This will check their operation and flow oil back through the system, filtering it and refilling each circuit. Check the hydraulic oil level before putting the backhoe into full operation. See section "MAINTENANCE" for oil type and correct level.

(1) Support Hook

(2) Mount Bar

(3) Guide Stop

(4) Mounting Pin

(5) Slide Bar

W1014341

9-S13

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

[3] DISASSEMBLING THE BACKHOE

• IMPORTANT

• When reassembling the pins, bushings and inner rings, apply slight coat of grease to them.

• When tightening the hydraulic hoses, refer to "HYDRAULIC HOSES FITTING AND FLARE PIPES" (Page a·S7.)

Bucket

1. Remove the bucket (3) from the dipper stick (4).

(1) Pin (25 x 129 mm)

(2) Pin (25 x 129 mm)

(3) Bucket

(4) Dipperstick

(5) Locking Nut

W1015866

3TAAAAGNP023A

3TAAAAGNP024A

(9)

Dipperstick and Bucket Cylinder

1. Remove the pins (6) and remove the bucket link (7) and guide link (5).

2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (2) and remove the bucket cylinder (4).

3. Remove the pins (1). (9) and remove the dipperstick (8) .

• NOTE

• To prevent from the damage of hydraulic hoses, set the wooden block etc. between dipperstick cylinder and boom.

(When reassembling)

• Lock the locking nuts to setting bolts at position where the setting bolt may still be rotated.

• Replace the spacers (9) at their original position.

{1} Pin {30 x 142 mm}

(2) Hydraulic Hose

(3) Pin (25 x 137 mm)

{4} Bucket Cylinder

(5) Guide Link

(6) Pin (0.98 x 6.68 in.)

(7) Bucket Link

(8) Dipperstick

(9) Spacer

(10) Pin (1.18 x 7.96 in.)

W1016036

3TAAAAGNPOO2A

9-514

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(8)---~+-

3TVAAACNP048B

(7) (8) (9) (10) (11 )(12) (13)

BACKHOE

&

L R

Dipperstick Cylinder, Boom, Boom Cylinder and Hoses

1. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses and remove the dipperstick cylinder (4).

2. Remove the pins (1), (3) and remove the boom cylinder (2).

3. Remove the pin (6) and remove the boom (5).

4. Remove the hydraulic hoses from the control valve.

(When reassembling)

• Lock the locking nuts to setting bolts at position where the mounting bolt may still be rotated .

• Connect the hydraulic hoses at their original positions and be sure to connect the hose angle as indicated table below.

Port

T,P

A6, B6

P.B.

Ai, A2, B1, B2

(Reference)

• Color of type

Angle of Bent Tube

L 1.57 rad (L 90 0)

R 1.83 rad (R 105°)

R 2.09 rad (R 120 0)

R 0.17 rad (R 10°)

Port

Ai, B1

A2,B2

A3, B3

A4.B4

A5.B5

Color

Red

Orange

Green

White

Yellow

• NOTE

• P port is short hose without sleeve.

• T port is long hose with sleeve.

(1) Pin (30 x 142 mm)

(2) Boom Cylinder

(3) Pin (30 x 169 mm)

(4) Dipperstick Cylinder

(5) Boom

(6) Pin (1.18 x 7.96 in.)

(7) T Port (Tank)

(8) A1 Port (Rod Side of Bucket

Cylinder)

(9) A2 Port (Rod Side of Dipperstick

Cylinder)

(10) A3 Port (Bottom Side of Stabilizer

Cylinder RH)

(11) A4 Port (Bottom Side of Stabilizer

Cylinder LH)

(12) A5 Port (Bottom Side of Boom

Cylinder)

(13) A6 Port (Rod Side of Swing

Cylinder)

(14) P.B. Port (Power Beyond)

(15) B6 Port (Bottom Side of Swing

Cylinder)

(16) B5 Port (Rod Side of Boom

Cylinder)

(17) B4 Port (Rod Side of Stabilizer

Cylinder LH)

(18) B3 Port (Rod Side of Stabilizer

Cylinder RH)

(19) B2 Port (Bottom Side of Dipperstick

Cylinder)

(20) B4 Port (Bottom Side of Bucket

Cylinder)

(21) P Port (Pump) a: Bottom Side of Bucket Cylinder b: Bottom Side of Dipperstick

Cylinder c: Rod Side of Boom Cylinder d; Rod Side of Bucket Cylinder e: Rod Side of Dlpperstick Cylinder f: Bottom Side of Boom Cylinder

L: Installation Angle

R: Installation Angle

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX, lA240. BT601, WSM

3TAAAAGNP029A

BACKHOE

W1016286

Swing Frame

1. Disconnect the swing cylinder rods (5) from swing frame (4).

2. Remove the swing frame (4) from main frame (1).

(When reassembling)

• Lock the locking nuts to setting bolts at position where the setting bolt may still be rotated.

• Reinstall the thrust washers (6) at their original positions.

(1) Main Frame

(2) Pin (35 x 98 mm)

(3) Pin (25 x 107 mm)

(4) Swing Frame

(5) Swing Cylinder Rod

(6) Thrust Washer

W1017110

(1

Swing Cylinder

1. Remove the swing cylinder bottom pin (3).

2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1).

3. Remove the swing cylinder (2).

(1) Hydraulic Hose

(2) Swing Cylinder

(3) Pin (25 x 157 mm)

W1017745

Stabilizers and Stabilizer Cylinder

1. Remove the pins (1) (4) and remove the stabilizer cylinder (2) with hydraulic hoses.

2. Remove the pin (5) and remove the stabilizer (6).

(When reassembling)

• Lock the locking nuts to setting bolts at position where the setting bolt may still be rotated.

(1) Pin (25.4 x 75 mm)

(2) Stabilizer Cylinder

(3) Main Frame

(4) Pin (25.4 x 101 mm)

(5) Pin (25.4 x 105 mm)

(6) Stabilizer

W1017254

9-516

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

Lever Support and Valve

1. Remove the cover (1).

2. Disconnect the control lever rods (3) of valve side.

3. Remove the lever support (2) with control levers.

4. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses.

5. Remove the control valve (4).

(When reassembling)

• Connect the hydraulic hoses at their original portions and be sure to connect the hose angle as indicated table below.

Port

T,P

A6. B6

P.B•

Angle of Bent Tube

L 1.57 rad (L 90 0)

R 1.83 rad (R 105°)

R 2.09 rad (R 120 0)

• NOTE

• P port is short hose without sleeve.

• T port is long hose with sleeve.

(1) Cover

(2) Lever Support

(3) Control Lever Rod

(4) Control Valve

(5) T Port (Tank)

(6) A6 Port (Rod Side of Swing

Cylinder)

(7) P.B. Port (Power Beyond)

(8) B6 Port (Bottom Side of Swing

Cylinder)

(9) P Port (Pump)

L: Installation Angle

R: Installation Angle

W1024374

(9)

(1

3TAAAAGNP035A

!

L R

Backhoe Main Frame and Hydraulic Hose

1. Hoist the backhoe main frame (1) and remove the mount pins.

2. Remove the three hydraulic hoses (2).

3. Separate the main frame (1) from the tractor frame.

(1) Backhoe Main Frame (2) Hydraulic Hose

W1017875

9-S17

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM BACKHOE

6. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING

Relief Valve Setting Pressure

• NOTE

• The relief valve of the tractor hydraulic system is used as a relief valve of the backhoe hydraulic system.

(Reference)

Relief valve pressure Factory spec.

12.3 to 12.7 MPa

125 to 130 kgf/cm

L

1778 to 1849 psi

W1019092

9-S18

BX25, RCK54{P)-23BX, RCKSOB-23BX, LA240, BTS01, WSM BACKHOE

[2]

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Control Valve

( 5 ) - - - r

(6)

(7)

( 8 ) - - - .

(9)---'l~

( 1 0 ) - - - " ' 0

(11 )-----<....

(12)

( 1 3 ) - - - - n

(14)---+e

(19)

Disassembling Control Valve

1. Remove the spring and load check valve.

2. Remove the seal plate and wiper ring from valve housing.

3. Remove the cap, seal plate and wiper ring, and draw out the spool from the valve housing.

(When reassembling)

• Clean all parts with a suitable solvent, and dry with a lint-free cloth or air.

• Visually inspect all parts for signs of scoring or damage.

• Install the spool and seal plate to the valve housing, taking care not to damage the O-rings.

(1) Screw

(2) Seal Plate

(3) Wiper Ring

(4) O-ring

(5) Valve Housing

(6) Plug

(7) O-ring

(8) Wiper Ring

(9) Seal Plate

(10) Spring Seat

(11) Return Spring

(12) Spring Seat

(13) Cap Screw

(14) Cap

(15) Screw

(16) Load Check Valve

(17) Spring

(18) Plug

(19) O-ring

W10360S1

(15)-_--l.I

3TAAAAGNPOO5A

3TAAAAGNP004A

(2)

Disassembling Overload Valve (Port Relief Valve)

1. Remove the overload relief valve (1) from the valve housing (3).

2. Separate the all component parts.

(When reassembling)

• Clean all parts with a suitable solvent, and dry with a lint-free cloth or air.

• Visually inspect all parts for signs of scoring or damage.

• Install the overload relief valve assembly to the valve housing, using care not to damage the O-ring.

(1) Overload Relief Valve

(2) Control Valve

(3) Housing

(4) Check Valve Poppet

(5) Relief Valve Poppet

(6) Piston Spring

(7) Piston Poppet

(8) Lock Nut

(9) Adjusting Screw

(10) Pilot Spring

(11 ) Pilot Poppet

(12) Pilot Section

W1021194

I

.TVAAACN P060A

(12)

9-S19

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601, WSM BACKHOE

(2) Boom, Dipperstick, Bucket, Swing and Stabilizer Cylinder

3UFAAABLP035A

(3)

Cylinder Rod Assembly

1. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder, and secure the tube end of the cylinder in a vise.

2. Unscrew the cylinder head (1) with the adjustable gland nut wrench (4).

3. Pull out the piston rod assembly (2) from the cylinder tube (3).

(When reassembling)

• Visually inspect the cylinder tube for signs of scoring or damage.

• Insert the piston rod assembly to the cylinder tube, using care not to damage the piston seal on the piston.

• Install the cylinder head to the cylinder tube, using care not to damage the O-ring on the cylinder head.

3UFAAABLP036A

(4)

Tightening torque

Boom cylinder head

Dipperstick cylinder. stabilizer cylinder head

Bucket cylinder head

Swing cylinder head

350 to 400 N'm

35.7 to 40.7 kgf·m

259 to 295 ft-Ibs

250 to 280 N'm

25.5 to 28.5 kgf·m

185 to 206 ft-Ibs

200 to 230 N'm

20.4 to 23.4 kgf·m

148 to 169 ft-Ibs

246 to 274 N'm

25.0 to 28.0 kgf·m

181 to 202 ft-Ibs

3UFAAABLP037 A

(1 )

L

(5) (6)

(2)

(7)

II

(1) Cylinder Head

(2) Piston Rod Assembly

(3) Cylinder Tube

(4) Adjustable Gland Nut Wrench

W1021758

Cylinder Head. Piston and Nut

1. Secure the rod end in a vise.

2. Unscrew the nut (4), and remove the piston (3) and cylinder head

(2) from the piston rod (1).

(When reassembling)

• Visually inspect all parts for signs of scoring or damage.

• Insert the piston rod to the cylinder head, using care not to damage the wiper seal (5) and oil seal (6).

Boom cylinder piston mounting nut

200 to 230 N'm

20.4 to 23.4 kgf'm

148 to 169 ft-Ibs

Tightening torque

Dipperstick cylinder, bucket cylinder, stabilizer cylinder, piston mounting nut

150 to 180 N'm

15.3 to 18.3 kgf-m

111 to 132 ft-Ibs

Swing cylinder piston mounting nut

216 to 245 N'm

22.0 to 25.0 kgf·m

159 to 181 ft-Ibs

(5) Wiper Seal

(6) Oil Seal

(7) O-ring

(1) Piston Rod

(2) Cylinder Head

(3) Piston

(4) Nut 3UFAAABLP038A

W1021908

9-S20

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240. BT601. WSM

3TVAAACNP061A

(((@

3UFAAABLP048A

(a)

(1 )

(2)

I---=E=---I_,",,",--I.!

G

3UFAAACLP035A

(b)

"'­ i--"

3UFAAACLP036A

~J

I

B

0

(3)

C D

K L

BACKHOE

A

B

C

0

E

F

G

H

I

J

K l

80..J

0.157 rad.

9°

65.18 mm

2.57 in.

66.18 mm

2.61 in.

42.0 mm

1.65 in.

10.0 mm

0.4 in.

58.5mm

2.3 in.

14.0 mm

0.55 in.

35.0 mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad.

7°

65.2 mm

2.57 in.

73.9 mm

2.91 in.

Cylinder Adaptor Angle

• Connect the cylinder adaptor at their original positions and be sure to connect the adaptor angle as indicated table below.

Cylinder

~

Dipperstick

Bucket

Stabilizer (LH)

Stabilizer (RH)

Rod Side

R40 ±1 (deg.) o

±l

O±l

O±l

R20 ±1

L20 ±l

Bottom Side

R40 ±1 (deg.) o

±1 o

±1 o

±l

I 0 ±l o

±1

W1022523

Piston Seal and O-ring

1. Remove the piston seal (2) and O-ring (3) from the piston (1).

• IMPORTANT

• When installing the O-ring (3) and piston seal (2) to the piston (1), use the slide jig and correcting jig as shown in the figure.

I Boom Cylinder

Dipperstick. Swing.

Stabilizer Cylinder

Bucket Cylinder

80 "

0.157 rad.

9°

60.18 mm

2.37 in.

61.18 mm

2.41 in.

42.0 mm

1.65 in.

10.0 mm

0.4 in.

58.5mm

2.30 in.

14.0 mm

0.55 in.

35.0mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad.

7°

60.2 mm

2.37 in.

68.9mm

2.71 in.

80 "

0.157rad.

9 0

50.18 mm

1.98 in.

51.18 mm

2.01 in.

42.0 mm

1.65 in.

10.0 mm

0.4 in.

58.5mm

2.30 in.

14.0 mm

0.55 in.

35.0 mm

1.38 in.

0.122 rad.

7°

50.2 mm

1.98 in.

58.9 mm

2.32 in.

(1) Piston

(2) Piston Seal

(3) O-ring

(a) Slide Jig

(b) Correcting Jig

W1022090

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(1) (2)

3UFAAABLP039A

(3) (4)

BACKHOE

Installing O-ring and Piston Seal

1. Place the slide jig (2) on the piston (4).

2. Install the O-ring (3) on the piston using the slide jig.

3. Install the piston seal (1) over the O-ring using the slide jig.

4. Compress the piston seal to the correct size by installing the piston into the correcting jig (5) .

• NOTE

• Do not turn (roll) the piston seal as you install it.

(1) Piston Seal

(2) Slide Jig

(3) O-ring

(4) Piston

(5) Correcting Jig

W1022984

(5)

I

..

. 1

3UFAAABLP040A

•

9-S22

BX25. RCK54(P)-23BX. RCK60B-23BX. LA240, BT601, WSM

Clearance between Pin and Bushing

1. Measure the pins 0.0. with an outside micrometer.

2. Measure the bushings 1.0. with a cylinder gauge.

3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace pin or bushing.

BACKHOE

3TAAAAGNP036A

9-S23

BX25, RCK54(P)-23BX, RCK60B-23BX, LA240, BT601, WSM

(2). (3). (4)

BACKHOE

Clearance between Pin and Bushing (continued) rl

(1 )

Clea""'"

Boom cylinder rod pi

Faok"'1 " "

0.060 to 0.185 mm

Allowable limit

1.0mm and cylinder bushing 0.002 to 0.007 in. 0.0394 in.

0.140 to 0.180 mm

0.006 to 0.007 in.

{2}

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

Dipperstick fulcrum pin and bushing

Dipperstick cylinder rod pin and cylinder bushing

Bucket cylinder rod pin I

Guide link pin I Bucket fulcrum pin I Bucket link pin and bushing

Boom support pin and bushing

Main frame fulcrum pin and bushing

Swing cylinder rod pin and cylinder bushing

0.060 to 0.185 mm

0.002 to 0.007 in.

0.204 to 0.315 mm

0.008 to 0.012 in.

0.140 to 0.180 mm

0.006 to 0.007 in.

0.070 to 0.130 mm

0.003 to 0.005 in.

0.108 to 0.259 mm

0.004 to 0.010 in.

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

0.5mm

0.0197 in.

1.0mm

0.0394 in.

W1024653

3TAAAAGNPQ40A

3UFAAABlP041A

Thrust VVasher VVear

1. Measure the thickness of thrust washer with an outside micrometer.

2. If the wear exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.

• NOTE

• Visually inspect the thrust washer for signs of scoring or damage not only on the thrust washer but also on the main frame and swing frame contact surface.

Thrust washer thickness

Factory spec.

Allowable limit

2.66mm

0.1046 in.

1.8mm

0.0709 in.

W1025818

Piston Rod Bend

1. Place piston rod on V blocks.

2. Set a dial indicator on the center of the rod.

3. Tum the piston rod and read the dial indicator.

4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.

Piston rod bend wable limit

0.25mm

0.0098 in.

W1026026

9-S24